Home

PDF - IBM Redbooks

Contents

1. Label Switch E ETHERNET STACKABLE HUB ie a LC Vian Parton CL wa HAHAHAHA AAA AAA com l 8 OA y ep A 10 BASE T Ports Uplink Hub Port Status LEDs switch een Media LEDs Expansion OK Management Port Manager Com Port Collisions Media Expansion Port Status Model and Serial Number Label Figure 22 IBM 8224 Model 001 and 002 Front Panel 2 4 1 1 Connectivity Features Below is a description of the 8224 s connectivity features e Media Expansion Port MEP This port can be used as the 17th port or for cascading to another Ethernet network The available pluggable expansion port module options are IBM 8224 AUI Media Expansion Port Module f c 9730 provides a standard DB 15 connector for an AUI cable or transceiver IBM 8224 10Base2 Media Expansion Port Module f c 9731 provides a standard BNC connector for coax ThinNet IBM 8224 Optical Fiber Media Expansion Port Module f c 9732 provides standard ST connectors to support both FOIRL and 10Base FL over fiber media 50 125um 62 5 125um 100 140um FOIRL 10Base FL o EE o RX Oo 6 AUI Port 10Base2 Port Figure 23 Front Views of 8224 Media Expansion Port Modules e 10Base T Ports Sixteen ports with shielded RJ 45 connectors are standard per unit Category 3 4 5 UTP or STP cable is supported The 16th port has s
2. Figure 37 Two IBM 8224 Stacks With Backup Ports Enabled Cascading Application This example shows multiple hub stacks connected via cascading over a backed up 10Base T link The link between port 14 on hub 3 on stack 1 to port 16 on hub 1 of stack 2 is the primary P connection The link between port 16 on hub 3 on stack 1 to port 14 on hub 1 of stack 2 is the secondary S or backup connection Backup Port Operation 1 Primary Backup port designations are defined in the IBM 8224 MIB via standard SNMP commands 94 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 As long as the primary port is the active connection the backup port is disabled to prevent a redundant active connection 3 In the event of loss of the link OK on the primary port or an autopartition of that port the backup port will automatically become the primary port and the designated primary port will be disabled When this occurs a health state trap will be sent to each device whose address is located in the 8224 IP and IPX trap tables 4 To reset the designated primary port as the active port the 8224 MIB must be used 5 When the backup port is active its LED will be green and the primary port will be disabled with its status LED orange 6 The primary and backup ports cannot be set up for load sharing 7 Both ports within a primary backup pair must be on the same hub 2 4 4 2 Management in a Stack Eac
3. 3270 LAN EMUL SERVER REQ CB NCB NETWARE REQ 802 2 PROTOCOL NETBIOS IPX SUPPORT ODINSUP ADAPTER 1 8 10 Memory Overview For DOS workstations memory consumption becomes very critical Figure 9 shows the DOS PS 2 memory map The area from 0 KB to 640 KB is called conventional memory The area from 640 KB to 1 MB is called upper memory The area from 1 MB to 16 MB is called extended memory The first 64 KB of extended memory is called high memory Inside the upper memory area an Expanded Memory Specification EMS area can be defined so that expanded memory can be paged in and out of the defined EMS area In Figure 10 on page 42 a more detailed chart is shown of the upper memory area The area typically reserved for video display adapters communication and I O adapters system ROM and machine BIOS are shown In a typical workstation portions of this area are not used which provides the user the option to load things like LAN protocol stack drivers in upper memory This is all under the assumption that there is sufficient room and that the driver set supports code loaded in upper memory PS 2 MEMORY MAP 16M Extended Memory 1M 64K E M High Memory Reserved 836K Expanded Upper Memory EMS page frame Memory 769K Paal 640K Reserved Conventional Memory OK 31781
4. Power Class 943333 Slot 12345 Bosa sa o go D 28 p 00 oa o0 LJ a a o a e a a apoasa e Power Up Affected Area s e Highest Power Class First Lowest Slot to Highest a ganan m f pa Eno das oats 00000000 953 Y l E 3 E o MU MN 3 9 O a gt as 222 y MENEM y Figure 91 8260 Cooling Zones and Power Classes e Modules are powered down until the 5 volt power supply consumption is reduced by 50 watts e The temperature is allowed to stabilize for 15 minutes and if the temperature is still too high all the 8260 modules in the affected zone are powered down e When the overheat condition is resolved the modules are powered back up Modules with the highest priority are powered up first e The 8250 modules and the 8260 modules with power class 10 cannot be powered down by the controller module e If the Overheat_Auto_Power_Down is disabled the controller module will not take any action If the over temperature condition continues the 8260 may be damaged 2 11 7 8260 Distributed Management To fully manage the 8260 and the installed modules the 8260 uses a distributed management architecture In this architecture the various tasks of managing the various elements of the hub are distributed across the following elements e Distributed management module e MAC daughter c
5. 2 0 0 0 0000 4 131 2 9 IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator 2 0 2 0 0 200000 136 2 9 1 Hardware Description 2 0 0 0000004 136 2 9 2 Ordering Consideration 000000002 2s 139 2 9 3 Installation Consideration 0 200000 0004 140 2 9 4 Problem Determination 0 0 0 00004 141 2 9 5 Maintenance Facility MF 0 o o o 142 2 10 IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator 145 2 10 1 FDDI Concepts 0 00000 a D AE ee 145 2 10 2 Technical Description 2 0000 146 2 10 3 Configuration 0 00000 a 148 2 10 4 Cabling Examples and Specifications 150 2 10 5 Management 2 000 a a 156 2 106 POSIIONINYD 22 fo a Saree AY hop See eA oo Re ae 161 2 11 IBM Nways 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub 161 2 11 1 8260 Model 017 and Model 010 o e 164 2 11 2 8260 Backplane o 164 2 11 3 8260 Payload Area e 171 2 11 4 8260 Fault Tolerant Controller Module 171 2 11 5 8260 Intelligent Power Management Subsystem 174 2 11 6 8260 Intelligent Cooling Subsystem 175 2 11 7 8260 Distributed Management 176 2 11 8 8260 Modules and Daughter Cards 184 2 12 IBM Workgroup Hubs ata Glance 5 196 2 12 1 8222 Models 008 and 0
6. 0 0 4 22 1 8 LAN Support Programs and Adapter Interfaces 23 1 8 1 NDIS Interface e 23 1 8 2 Open Data Link Interface ODI 0 0 e 24 1 8 3 Operating System and Driver Environments 25 1 8 4 OS 2 Transport 2 0 00 2 ee 27 1 8 5 IBM Network Transport Services 2 NTS 2 29 1 8 6 DOS Transport Serali t be aes bE be hee a 32 1 8 7 IBM Local Area Network Support Program LSP Version 1 3 4 34 1 8 8 IBM LAN Client oe rei i a poitea uo a d a aa a a ee 36 1 8 9 Mixed IBM and Novell Requester Workstation Support 38 1 8 10 Memory Overview aoaaa aaa 000 ee 41 1 8 11 LAN Support Program LSP Memory Consumption 42 1 8 12 Memory Considerations 45 1 9 LAN Adapters for the RISC System 6000 46 1 10 3172 LAN Adapters o 49 1 11 3174 LAN Adapters 2 ee 51 1 12 3745 LAN Adapters terror e a a ee 53 1 13 AS 400 LAN Adapters o 54 1 13 1 6611 Communication Adapter Features 58 O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 iii Chapter 2 HUBS 4 23 5 lo doy ad dow AD da Re e 63 2 17 What Are Rubs 2 2 4 ia a dad 63 2 2 IBM s Workgroup Hubs 2 2 000 2 64 2 3 IBM Nways 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hub 67 2 3 1 Technical Description 0 a 67 29 27 Gontigurationy cia 44a toe ee eek REA SA AOR y 70
7. Fiber Links to 8271 Switch a224 002 5224 001 with Fiber Expansion Port Inter Hub Stack Connection 8224 002 224 001 Fiber Transceiver Fiber to 10Base T Converter Figure 35 8224s in a Campus Network 2 4 4 Management 92 The 8224 provides for automatic disablement partitioning of any of its ports connected to a device that generates repeated collisions re enabling that port when the condition clears The 8224 also automatically detects and corrects for polarity reversals on cables connected to its 10Base T ports repeater receive pair The 8224 contains status LEDs for at a glance network monitoring The 8224 contains status LEDs for power of the 8224 collision on the Ethernet network and identifying if the hub is a managing unit or not A link OK disabled partitioned LED is provided for the media expansion port and for every 10Base T port The 8224 provides centralized management of remote sites and branch offices through its out of band management support via the SLIP protocol IS managers can dial up a remote site or branch office and receive the management information from the 8224 at that site The 8224 supports BOOTP BOOTstrap protocol for effortless power on configuration Configuration information like the IP address needs to be entered the first time the managed 8224 units are used Every time the managed units are powered on the hub will se
8. CORR RR a y e External Ethernet Bus Figure 33 8224 Hub B Segmented from the External Ethernet Bus 90 Linking Segmented 8224s In order to manage a stack of 8224s e The 8224 you want to manage must either be a Model 002 or be connected in a stack with a Model 002 e There must be an Ethernet link between the 8224 to which your management workstation is attached and the 8224 you want to manage When you segment an 8224 from a stack you break either the Ethernet link to that 8224 or if your management workstation is attached to that 8224 to the rest of the stack You have two choices for re linking segmented 8224s cascading or interconnecting using a bridge router or Ethernet switch To cascade two or more 8224s must be segmented When you cascade 8224s they can communicate with one another in one collision domain but not with the rest of the stack If you interconnect the segmented 8224 or 8224s with the rest of the stack using a bridge router or Ethernet switch they can communicate with the other 8224s and remain independent collision domains The next sections explains these options in detail Cascading Segmented 8224s lf more than one 8224 has been segmented you can cascade them Figure 34 on page 91 shows a stack in which hubs B and C have been segmented from the external Ethernet bus Hub C is cascaded from port 16 of hub B and hub B s uplink switch is set
9. Virtual Switch 0 1 Ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 103 Switch Divided in Two Using TokenPipe Universal Feature Slot The 8272 LANStreamer Switch Model 108 includes one universal feature slot into which a variety of optional field installable universal feature cards can be inserted to provide additional connections in addition to the eight token ring ports standard on the base product Some of the universal feature cards are listed next One Port 155 Mbps ATM This optional connection provides the capability to connect workgroup LAN switches to an ATM switch such as an IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub with its 2 Port ATM Concentrator module using a 155 Mbps SONET interface that is fully ATM Forum compliant With these optional features token ring or Ethernet LAN switches can be connected to an ATM switch using multimode fiber cabling at distances up to two kilometers This card fully supports ATM Forum compliant LAN emulation Multiport Token Ring Twisted Pair UTP STP For customers that require more than the eight ports that are available with the base 8272 LANStreamer Switch Model 108 product but want to use the 8272 Model 108 in small or medium size networks that may not have a high speed backbone this card for the 8272 will provide multiple additional twisted pair UTP STP ports with RJ 45 connectors Multiport Token Ring Fiber With this card you can provide multiple connections to an optical
10. ATM ports 100 ohm UTP category 3 4 or 5 and 150 ohm STP Types 1 1A 9 and 9A ATM switch 62 5um multimode fiber LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM EIA 232 port EIA 232 cable Connector Types ATM ports RJ 45 connectors ATM switch SC connector EIA 232 port DB 25 connector Shipping Group ATM Workgroup Concentrator Base Unit Mounting brackets Cable management bracket Power Cord 8282 Configuration and Management Utility diskette 8282 microcode diskette IBM Turboways 8282 Concentrator Installation and Service Manual IBM Turboways 8282 Concentrator Reference Information IBM Turboways 8282 Concentrator Introduction and Planning Guide Graphical Management Applications Available Configuration and Management Utility Windows Chapter 2 Hubs 203 204 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Chapter 3 Switches This chapter discusses the functions and features of the latest series of IBM switches Please consult the installation and planning manuals for each of these devices for further information 3 1 IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch The 8271 EtherStreamer Switch provides the ability to forward Ethernet frames among up to eight shared Ethernet LAN segments via Ethernet 10Base T or attachment unit interface AUI connections Similar in function to a multiport Ethernet transparent bridge the 8271 EtherStreamer Switc
11. 99 NLY pue sqny siaejdepy s onpojg pue sideguo NYI Table 7 Page 2 of 2 Comparison of IBM s Hubs Token Ring Ethernet Nr of Lobe Ports Unmanaged Managed Graphical Management Platforms Windows NV for Windows NV for AIX 8282 001 Windows NV for Windows NV for AIX The following sections deal with each of IBM s workgroup hubs in turn except the 8250 and 8260 multiprotocol hubs 2 3 IBM Nways 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hub The IBM Nways 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hubs are a family of unmanaged IEEE 802 3 Ethernet low end low cost concentrators The IBM Nways 8222 family of hubs is intended for installations that do not require SNMP network management These hubs are available in two models 8222 008 containing eight 10Base T ports and 8222 016 containing sixteen 10Base T ports The 8222 6 Port 10Base T Workgroup Hub has been withdrawn by IBM and will therefore not be discussed in this document The primary function of the Nways hubs is to provide an economical means for devices to be connected over unshielded twisted pair cabling and communicate with one another over an Ethernet local area network They are also used to extend the range of Ethernet networks These hubs can be joined via cascading over a variety of media 10Base T 10Base2 thin coax 10Base5 thick coax or optical fiber to allow additional devices to connect to an Ethernet network segment Th
12. IBM TURBOWAYS 100 ATM MC Adapter The TURBOWAYS 100 ATM MC Adapter can operate in a LAN backbone structure that includes an OS 2 or NetWare server and an 8260 with a bridge module It also supports AIX 3 2 5 Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 17 servers and clients A maximum of tw TURBOWAYS 100 Adapters can be installed in a RS 6000 system IBM TURBOWAYS 25 ATM ISA And 25 ATM MCA Adapters IBM s TURBOWAYS 25 ATM Adapters provide a 25 Mbps full duplex connection to the ATM network using low cost cable for distances up to 100 meters The TURBOWAYS 25 connects to the ATM network via the 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator or to an ATM switch that supports the 25 Mbps interface IBM TURBOWAYS 155 ATM SBus Adapters The TURBOWAYS 155 ATM SBus UTP5 Adapter and TURBOWAYS 155 ATM SBus Multimode Fiber MMF Adapter are 155 Mbps speed adapters offering ATM connectivity for Sun workstations running Solaris and Sun OS IBM TURBOWAYS 25 ATM SBus Adapters The TURBOWAYS 25 ATM SBus Adapter is a 25 Mbps speed client adapter providing ATM connectivity for Sun workstations Operating system support includes Solaris and Sun OS These adapters offer the following benefits e A specialized chip that handles ATM segmentation and reassembly resulting in high throughput e Configuration installation and diagnostics for Sun OS or Solaris 155 ATM adapters and OS 2 25 ATM adapters e An SNMP sub agent for TCP IP Network Management compatibility e S
13. Jabber e Dimensions 2 7 8 x 2 1 8 Fiber Distributed Data Interface Adapter 2720 The Fiber Distributed Data Interface Adapter uses FDDI a LAN communications technology that uses optical cabling designed for a line speed of up to 100 Mbps FDDI is designed to support the TCP IP protocol and supports NFS over TCP IP The FDDI implementation supports ANSI standard X3T9 5 with the exception that station management SMT function is limited to agent support only A programming interface API is provided for the device driver Fiber optic cable is designed to be immune to electromagnetic interference EMI Therefore using fiber technology may prevent jamming by high power emissions Additionally fiber optics do not emit electromagnetic radiation EMR This feature enhances security since it helos prevent eavesdropping The RISC System 6000 Fiber Distributed Data Interface Single Ring Adapter provides a single attach station SAS option and attaches to the FDDI network s primary ring directly or via an external FDDI concentrator Connection via an external FDDI concentrator isolates the workstations from the primary ring and protects the network from routine station on off cycles and individual station failures Each FDDI adapter requires one Micro Channel card slot A maximum of six Micro Channel card slots may be used for FC 2720 and FC 2722 adapters in any combination The FDDI card requires multimode 62 5 125 micron FDDI
14. 2 10 3 3 Selecting an Operating Mode The 8244 ships configured as a dual attachment concentrator including A and B ports and four or ten master ports However each concentrator can be configured to operate in any of the following modes Standard mode Connecting up to ten single attachment stations to the FDDI ring This is the default operating mode Cascading mode Using cascaded concentrators leaving up to 11 master ports per concentrator for stations Stand alone mode Where all 12 ports can be used as master ports Dual homing mode Allows the use of redundant SAS connections for class A dual attachment stations For more details on these operating modes refer to 2 10 4 1 8244 Cabling Examples 2 10 4 Cabling Examples and Specifications The 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator supports the following cabling specifications 150 Multi Mode Fiber MIC connector Up to 2 kilometers in 62 5um multimode fiber Cabling will be reusable for ATM Shielded Twisted Pair Copper STP DB 9 connector Up to 100 meters in ICS STP type 1 or 2 cable Based on SDDI specification Cabling is reusable from token ring Twisted Pair Copper Either unshielded UTP or folded FTP 4 twisted pairs 100 ohm impedance RJ 45 connector must be shielded 100 meters maximum with UTP category 5 cable Based on TP PMD standard Cabling is not reusable from token ring or Ethernet if the impedanc
15. 2 9 1 2 Ring Attachment Module RA Module The ring attachment module allows you to attach the concentrator as a dual attaching station DAS to an FDDI ring Another possibility is to connect the concentrator as a dual homing concentrator DHC or a single attaching concentrator SAC to other concentrators The attachment to the FDDI ring is made via multi mode optical fiber cables The left receptacle is coded with a Key Type A and the right receptacle is coded with a Key Type B There are LED pairs green and amber at the front of the module to indicate the status one pair for the the RA module one pair for the A port and one for the B port respectively The RA module must always be installed in the second slot of the IBM 8240 below the CC Module see Figure 71 Module A Port Port LEDs B Pert Part Numbe Port Address Labels Latches Figure 71 IBM 8240 Ring Attachment Module 138 2 9 1 3 Device Attachment Modules DA Modules There are two device attachment modules available for the IBM 8240 one for optical fiber connection using multimode optical fiber cable and one for copper connection using IBM cabling system types 1 2 6 or 9 shielded twisted pair Each module has four master ports M Port to attach up to four devices either end stations or concentrators The receptacles are coded with a Key Type M LAN Co
16. As in any other analog transmission system a radio frequency local area network is impaired by signal attenuation and noise Unlike its wired counterpart which may incur a bit error rate BER of less than 10 12 a wireless LAN may have a BER that is typically in the range of 105 During normal operation special attention should be paid to minimize errors which will reduce overall network throughput The challenge for indoor communications where base and remote stations are either stationary or slowly moving is to calculate the probability of signal impairment and what are the counter measures available Radio channels may suffer from distortion of the transmitted signal due to amplitude attenuation fading time delay phase shifts or some combination of any or all of these Path loss is the attenuation of signal strength over distance When there are no obstacles as in free space signal strength decreases as the square of the distance between transmit and receive antenna inverse square law in free space But for indoor transmissions in a modern partitioned office building for example signal strength can be reduced up to the fifth power of the distance or greater In addition to path loss electromagnetic barriers may exist between a transmit and receive antenna pair such as e Metal surfaces surrounding the antenna e Reinforced concrete walls floor ceiling e Metallic furniture e Metallic poles may shadow some area In addi
17. Follow 8230 only rules e Other non repeated 8250 60 Modules Follow normal token ring cabling rules Chapter 2 Hubs 125 126 2 7 3 4 Using 8228 As a Splitter A cable runs from an LIU port of an 8230 003 013 to the RI port of an 8228 e Lobe cables are Type 1 STP from 2 Port ICS LIUs For every 8228 connected as a fanout device use the following formula Maximum Lobe Length 290m M 2x a b c 3 5x0 where M is the longest lobe length connected directly to 8230 LIUs a b c are the distances between the 8230 LIU and the 8228 RI port Qis the total number of 8228s used in this single 8230 e Lobe cables are 100 ohm category 4 5 from 4 Port RJ 45 LlUs Same formula as above but subtract from 200 meters instead Maximum Lobe Length 200m M 2x a b c 3 5x0 Lobe cables are 100 ohm category 4 5 from 3 Port Active RJ 45 LIUs Same formula as above but subtract from 360 meters Maximum Lobe Length 360m M 2 x a b c 3 5x0 2 7 3 5 Using 8226 As a Splitter If the 8226 is set to concentrator mode follow the calculation as if it were an 8228 If it is set to splitter mode the calculation is much simpler M mta where e M is the maximum allowable lobe length for that particular LIU LAM e mis lobe length from 8226 to workstation e ais the length of cable between LIU LAM lobe port to 8226 RI 2 7 3 6 RLAM Cabling Two category 5 UTP cables are required to connect a Remote LAM to
18. NATIVE SUPPORT NDIS SUPPORT LLC ON ADAPTER LLC IN HOST Shared RAM Adapter moe R Busmaster Adapter APPLICATION CONSUMPTION APPLICATION 640K NETBIOS NETBIOS DXMTOMOD SYS DAMTOMOD SYS 802 2 a DXMCOMOD SYS 802 2 fee 40K DXMEOMOD SYS CONVENTIONAL MEMORY 1K INTERRUPT TK ARBITRATOR INTERRUPT DXMAOMOD SYS ARBITRATOR DXMAOMOD SYS 0 70K NDIS MAC DRIVER OK AND SUPPORT TOTAL LAN SUPPORT 41K TOTAL LAN SUPPORT 76K 136K aes lo E See ELIE Figure 11 LSP DOS Memory Consumption Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 43 LSP DOS MEMORY CONSUMPTION NATIVE SUPPORT LLC ON ADAPTER CONVENTIONAL Shared RAM Adapter MEMORY A CONSUMPTION 640K NETBIOS DKMTOMOD SYS DXMCOMOD SYS 15K CONVENTIONAL MEMORY 1K INTERRUPT ARBITRATOR DXMAOMOD SYS OK TOTAL LAN SUPPORT 41K I Ue Ce ee C2 Fe ene mc E wean WALL LLL J NDIS SUPPORT NETBIOS ONLY Busmaster Adapter APPLICATION NETBIOS DXMIJOMOD SYS 1K 45 INTERRUPT ARBITRATOR DXMAOMOD SYS 0 70K _ NDIS MAC DRIVER AND SUPPORT TOTAL LAN SUPPORT 56K 116K
19. NOVELL also PEQUBSTER 05 2 PROTOCOL PROTOCOL STACK STACK LANDD 082 IPXODI SYS NDIS ODI MAC MAC TBMTOK 082 TOKEN SYS ADAPTER ADAPTER ODI SUPPORT AIX SOCKET SUPPORT NOVELL _SERVER EE NETWARE PROTOCOL AIX SOCKET 1 F ne AIX KERNEL MAC TCP UDP TOKENDMA LAN gt aa Ip ADAPTER DRIVER ADAPTER Figure 4 OS and Driver Environments with Module Name Examples 1 8 4 OS 2 Transport The OS 2 Transport for IBM software support is an NDIS environment with no native support provided The following are example applications for the OS 2 environment LAN Network Manager e 3270 and 5250 emulation part of Communications Manager e SNA and 802 2 applications e OS 2 LAN Server and other NetBIOS applications e TCP IP applications Figure 5 on page 28 shows the OS 2 transport The dotted area at the top isolates the portion of Communications Manager that provides LAN support The Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 27 emulator code uses the SNA support to make requests to the network The SNA requests are translated to IEEE 802 2 requests via the LAN DLC module The LAN DLC module uses the 802 2 Device Driver Interface DDI which in turn interfaces through NDIS to the appropriate LAN adapter As the chart shows there is both a ring O and a ring 3 interface for both 802 2 and NetBIOS Ring 0 is a low level device driver interface and ring
20. The adapters work in machines with MC ISA or EISA bus architectures and they support all the software environments and perform the same functions as previous IBM FDDI adapters The IBM FDDI UTP 5 MC Adapter is a 16 32 bit bus master adapter designed for the PS 2 family of system units and for OEM workstations implementing the Micro Channel architecture The EISA adapter is a 32 bit bus adapter designed for those industry personal computers that implement the extended industry standard architecture bus The ISA adapter is a 16 bit bus adapter for the low end of the PS 2 family of products those system units having an AT bus PS Value Point and compatible personal computers that implement the industry standard architecture bus The adapters provide only the single access station SAS type of connection to an FDDI network dual access station DAS is not supported Multimedia over FDDI is possible with these adapters using FDDI synchronous frame transmission and bandwidth allocation The FDDI multimedia support is packaged with the the network driver interface specification NDIS OS 2 device driver on MC ISA and EISA systems because the NDIS OS 2 device driver is synchronous enabled The FDDI synchronous frame transmission function has characteristics that satisfy many multimedia applications It is based on the Synchronous Forum Implementer s Agreement The IBM FDDI UTP 5 adapters support this synchronous frame transmission function Two s
21. e Does not support non broadcasting multiaccess networks such as X 25 IPX Routing Support The following is a summary of the IPX implementation in the Multiprotocol Interconnect Module e Supports RIP routing information protocol and SAP service advertising protocol e Supports split horizon Does not support poison reverse e Does not support split path routing e Does not support static RIP or SAP entries e Does not support equal cost paths e Can pass or block datagrams according to user defined security access list DECnet Phase IV Routing Support The Multiprotocol Interconnect Module in a DECnet environment is always a level 2 router It implements the DECnet routing layer and provides network management and security including the following e Supports configurable circuit cost e Supports designated router priority e Supports designated router priority e Can pass or block datagrams according to a user defined security access list Configuring Multiprotocol Interconnect Module Both one slot and two slot Multiprotocol Interconnect Modules provide six ports that can be attached to any of the Ethernet segments on the ShuntBus or Enhanced TriChannel These ports are referred to as ports 1 thru 6 Additionally the two slot module provides the housing for two I O cards that can be used to provide connections to external token ring and or Ethernet segments These ports are referred to as ports 7 and 8 To confi
22. Connects up to 36 devices to the hub The module provides 36 10Base T compliant ports using 25 pairs 10Base T cables The main value add of this module is the integration and the low cost solution for Ethernet networks The 36 port 10Base T module provides the following features Security through the 8260 Ethernet security card that provides continuous eavesdropping and intrusion protection without affecting network performance Driver and receiver integrity checking by use of remote diagnostics mode Support of scalable network management architecture that enables you to gather Ethernet and remote monitor RMON network statistics for any of the 8260 backplane segment 184 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Support of two daughter cards including a Medium Access Control Card E MAC for in depth monitoring of the network or a Security card E SEC for private Ethernet conversations e Support of three 12 port Telco 50 pin connectors which you can switch per connector to any of the eight 8260 backplane channels or eight extended segments in the addition of the eight e Per connector switching to all eight of the 8260 backplane segments and eight isolated segments e IEEE repeater statistic gathering for monitoring of 8260 s security and network management architecture e Up to 100 meters on 10Base T compliant unshielded twisted pair UTP wiring as well as shielded twisted pair STP wiring 8260 Ethernet 24 Port 10Bas
23. Eliminates having to choose between 100 Mbps and 155 Mbps Easy installation and reconfiguration Common management inventory power classes Redundant power supplies Chapter 5 ATM Products 255 5 3 6 8260 UTOPIA 1 ATM Carrier Modules The one slot module and the two slot module has a generic motherboard which can hold one or two daughter cards respectively e It is IBM s intention to give third parties access to IBM s ATM campus technology If you are willing to develop your own ATM applications you can accomplish this without necessarily investing in an independent or new ATM platform e This offers you as an ATM user the largest range of applications that make use of ATM transport It enables you to use new applications over which new services and opportunities can be developed It reduces your network cost of ownership through the consolidation of various applications over a single homogeneous ATM infrastructure The motherboard accepts a daughterboard that incorporates a specific function or application that will benefit of ATM characteristics The motherboard offers a simple interface to IBM s ATM system structure and provides you with various sets of services that will enable consistency with 8260 system functions and management The ATM carrier module offers a simple interface based on well known industry standards UTOPIA 1 5 4 Systems Management 12 refid 8260 systems management Systems managem
24. The IBM Token Ring 16 4 Credit Card Adapter is a credit card sized adapter that provides an interface between computer systems and token ring networks The credit card adapter is designed to operate in computer systems with card slots that comply with the standards of Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA Release 2 0 Type II slots Compliance with the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 5 standards allows the credit card adapter to be managed with network management tools such as the IBM Local Area Network LAN Support Program The credit card adapter uses the following computer system software programs and PCMCIA services to operate e Required System Software IBM or Microsoft DOS Version 5 0 or higher IBM OS 2 Version 2 1 with Card Services 2 0 IBM or Novell token ring network operating system software e Supported PCMCIA Environments PCMCIA Card Services Version 2 0 IBM provided connectivity enablers for DOS provided with the credit card adapter The IBM provided connectivity enablers are used if the computer system does not support card services The installation program determines the operating environment and if required prompts the selection of appropriate enabler software 1 5 3 1 Features e User productivity is enhanced by providing an easy to use high speed local area network LAN attachment to portable systems via a PCMCIA slot The high s
25. super stackable hub with high end features 2 8 1 Technical Description The IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub addresses the emerging higher functionality needs of both main office telecommunications closets and those of mission critical remote sites As networks have grown from department oriented methods of sharing resources to everyone s connection point to the enterprise s vital information equipment in the telecommunications closet has evolved from unmanaged passive multistation access units such as the 8238 to highly manageable chassis based multiprotocol capable intelligent hubs such as the IBM 8250 and 8260 More and more frequently stackable hubs such as the 8238 that combine high end management with fault tolerant features and lower cost are considered for telecommunications closet installation where multiprotocol support is not required Branch banks retail stores medical clinics insurance offices and sales agencies are just a few examples of remote sites that are now being connected to the enterprise network Enterprise networks often contain hundreds even thousands of such remote sites that demand the same level of service and support as the networks in the home office because they are performing the same mission critical tasks Here again the 8238 s high fault tolerance and remote manageability make it a superior choice for extending the enterprise network and its mission critical applications to branch
26. 154 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Primary Server HG secondary tig redundant Class A Station Figure 82 Optical Fiber Connections in 8244 Standard Mode The appropriate keyed optical fiber MIC connectors are labelled A B M and S accordingly e Key A is used to fit a plug into port A on the concentrator e Key B is used to fit a plug into port B on the concentrator Key M is used to fit a plug into ports M1 to M10 on the concentrator e Key S is used to fit a plug into the jacket on a workstation s interface card Figure 83 on page 156 shows you how to key cable plugs for different operating modes Chapter 2 Hubs 155 FDDI Ring Dual Homing Standard Cascading Standalone Figure 83 Keying 8244 Cable Plugs in Different Operating Modes m Important All connections to ports A and B must be fiber Connections to other ports can be either copper or fiber For more information on FDDI standards planning and implementation of FDDI networks refer to the IBM FDDI Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3892 and FDDI Concepts and Products GG24 3865 2 10 5 Management 156 The 8244 is delivered as plug and play The software is preloaded and a typical configuration is preset Software is flash based for upgradeability Modules can be exchanged or updated through a software tool Upgrades and customization can be
27. A defective power supply A defective backplane DA Module 1 suspected errors The problem can be caused by An incorrectly installed DA Module A defective DA Module A defective RA Module A defective CC Module A defective backplane DA Module 2 suspected errors caused by the same problem as for DA Module 1 DA Module 3 suspected errors caused by the same problem as for DA Module 1 DA Module 4 suspected errors caused by the same problem as for DA Module 1 DA Module 5 suspected errors caused by the same problem as for DA Module 1 DA Module 6 suspected errors caused by the same problem as for DA Module 1 Backplane suspected errors caused by the same problem as for DA Module 1 Not used NP bus errors caused by the same problem as for DA Module 1 Not used Fan failure 2 9 5 Maintenance Facility MF The Maintenance Facility Program for the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator has the following main functions which will be described in more detail e Configure the IBM 8240 e Load microcode to the IBM 8240 e Display the link quality of the IBM 8240 ports Obtain the ring status of the IBM 8240 and its ports e Build a ring map of the FDDI network e Send generic Station Management SMT frames through the ring e Obtain help information from the Maintenance Facility panels The program uses OS 2 Presentation Manager as its user interface The usage of windows menus push buttons and check boxes are the same as for other L
28. By connecting their workstations to one or more segmented 8224s you can limit their network access while keeping control of the 8224s 2 4 2 Configuration Refer to Chapter 2 of the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Installation and User s Guide GA27 4024 for step by step instructions for installing the 8224 and the optional media expansion port modules 2 4 3 Cabling Examples and Specifications 80 When planning an Ethernet network the size of each Ethernet collision domain you create is restricted by these factors e The limit of four repeaters between any two devices in one collision domain e The cable length restrictions unique to each type of segment that is for 10Base T 10Base2 and so on e If you make use of optical fiber links The limit of 4200 meters 13780 feet between any two devices in one collision domain The optical fiber power budget 2 4 3 1 Four Repeater Limit IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard specifies that a maximum of four repeaters can be placed in the path between any two devices in one collision domain Count a stack as one repeater hop as long as the total hub expansion cable length is less than 45 7 meters 150 feet If the total hub expansion cable length is between 45 7 meters 150 feet and 76 2 meters 250 feet count a stack as one and one half repeater hops Note There may be more than four repeaters within a collision domain as long as there are no more than four repeaters in the pat
29. In these environments the 8224 is used to connect departments workgroups and branch offices to the corporate network Network management is a critical requirement Thus customers in these environments will purchase a combination of 8224 Model 001 and Model 002 units Price network management remote management capability and the ability to centralize management on a recognized platform will be key factors in this market The structure of IBM s Ethernet hub family with the 8224 is compared in Table 10 Table 10 IBM Ethernet Hub Comparison Customer Requirement IBM Ethernet Hub Unmanaged and unmanageable 8222 Models 008 016 Unmanaged but manageable 8224 Model 001 Managed single protocol 8224 Model 002 Managed multiple protocol 8250 8260 The network management applications available for the 8224 are the first results of IBM s effort to provide widespread management support for the 8224 In order to help IBM sales representatives sell the 8224 hubs into existing Ethernet environments it is important that the 8224 can be managed in the customer s chosen network operating system environment 2 4 5 3 Management for Small Companies For small to medium sized companies requiring single 10Base T Ethernet networks StackWatch for Windows is the solution for customers with only 8224 Ethernet hubs in their network or for those customers that desire the most inexpensive 8224 network management application It runs on the
30. by connecting together up to four user configurable full duplex token ring ports on one 8272 to those on the other Each of these full duplex token ring interswitch links provides up to 32 Mbps of bandwidth between the switches for a maximum of 128 Mbps of bandwidth using four links between switches With multilink TokenPipes traffic is automatically distributed across the links within a TokenPipe using destination addresses so that traffic load can be more evenly balanced across each of the parallel links between switches TokenPipe support Chapter 3 Switches 213 provides the user with the ability to grow and tune the bandwidth required between 8272s TIAS ARPA RAR EEE CREO EEE AO oe oO SERVERS E EEEE COE OOEE OOO OD Client Group Client Group A B Figure 102 8272 Example Using TokenPipe e Virtual Switch Support It may sometimes be desirable to construct a switch network of less than eight ports That is for security or traffic load management reasons it may be desirable to group ports on a single 8272 so that no traffic including broadcasts flows between the ports within one group and any of the switch ports outside the group This virtual switch capability on the 8272 LANStreamer Switch model 108 allows a single physical 8272 to be divided into two to four virtual switches each consisting of a nonoverlapping set of two to four switch ports 214 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM
31. e gt o pp TI O x cx oa oo 4 a LAA Y AANA gt gt A 025 NY z O ee sn ts ed o pr IO cx oa oo EA gt lt me Cams 2 Ei z Sey eee en cS o pp L O gt Sx ja u O O A m S A lt n ae z N on gt lt m o H Pr H O 4 c 4 oa oo o a gt v j Q L v jae a yo lt IBM 8230 Data Flow Figure 57 IBM 8230 Data Flow 117 Chapter 2 Hubs S NI RI RO T es TT TT TT T PI ii ii Po l RI Fault Figure 58 Wrap RI s Ni RI RO T T 155 TT T te PI i pa ii PO l RO Fault S IBM 8230 station on back up ring PI IBM 8230 station on primary ring RI side PO IBM 8230 station on primary ring RO side i ring station inserted on IBM 8230 Figure 59 Wrap RO 118 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM By 1 1 RI RO T Pest T TT TT T gt PI i ii ii PO l External Fault Figure 60 Wrap RI RO s 4 f 1 1 RI RO f T Rai TT TT T T d PI ii jii i Po l Internal Fault S IBM 8230 station on back up ring PI IBM 8230 station on primary ring RI side PO IBM 8230 station on primary ring RO side i ring station inserted on IBM 8230 Figure 61 Wrap RI RO Top E
32. in which the IBM 100 10 ISA Ethernet Adapter is installed will have to be directly connected to a switch such as the IBM 8271 Nways Switch with the 100Base TX Universal Feature card It will also operate in FDX mode at 10 Mbps when connected to an FDX enabled port on a switch such as the IBM 8271 Nways Switch IBM 100 10 ISA Ethernet Adapter is supported by a lifetime warranty and IBM s PC Company HelpCenter which offers 24 hours a day 7 days a week support Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 13 1 6 3 IBM ISA Etherjet Adapters IBM Etherjet ISA Adapter The 16 bit IBM Etherjet ISA Adapter and IBM Etherjet 10Base T ISA Adapter can operate at 10 million Mbps in Industry Standard Architecture ISA bus computers Both adapters are identical in function differing only in the types of Ethernet media supported The IBM Etherjet 10Base T ISA Adapter contains a single connector for attachment to 10Base T networks while the IBM Ethejet ISA Adapter contains connectors for 10Base T 10Base2 and AUI 10Base5 or fiber networks The IBM Etherjet ISA Adapter and IBM Etherjet 10Base T ISA Adapter follow IEEE 802 3 standards and are operate in 16 bit bus slots Both adapters feature full duplex operation and easy installation through IBM s LANAID applications They are plug and play enabled and a remote initial program load RIPL option is available In addition support is provided for IBM s LAN client Device drivers are included for many of t
33. optical fiber jumper cables The FDDI jumper cables are available in five standard lengths of 4 meters 12 feet 7 meters 20 feet 15 meters 50 feet 31 meters 100 feet and 61 meters 200 feet or custom lengths in one foot increments They are available with MIC FC ST or SC connectors For more information about the jumper cables planning design and installation of optical fiber cabling systems refer to IBM Cabling System Optical Fiber Installation and Planning Guide GA27 3943 Jumper cables are the responsibility of the customer and may be ordered from your local authorized IBM cabling distributor or by calling 1 800 IBM 2468 in the United States For EMEA customers cables are available from Montpellier through CE offerings Fiber Distributed Data Interface Dual Ring Upgrade Kit 2722 This feature consists of an upgrade kit to be applied to a system with an existing RISC System 6000 FDDI Adapter FC 2720 The RISC System 6000 Fiber Distributed Data Interface Dual Ring Upgrade Kit provides a dual attaching station DAS option and attaches to both the FDDI network s primary and secondary ring In the event of failure this type of attachment allows the wrapping of the primary to the secondary ring for high network availability and problem isolation This dual attach station DAS option can also attach to concentrator ports as a single attached station or a dual homing station Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 47
34. serial Number Address Label DA Module 1 Copper DA Modules 2 Copper DA Module 3 Copper DA Module 4 Fiber DA Module 5 Fiber DA Module 6 Fiber Figure 69 IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator Note The sequence of the DA modules is arbitrary 2 9 1 1 Concentrator Control Module CC Module The concentrator control module contains the control electronics of the IBM 8240 It maintains the access to the FDDI network for the concentrator and for the FDDI stations which are attached to this concentrator There is a label at the front cover which shows the universally administered MAC address of the concentrator This module also has an interface for an external optical bypass control connector There are two LEDs light emitting diodes green and amber anda 4 digit hexadecimal display at the front of the module They indicate the status and error codes of the concentrator see 2 9 4 Problem Determination on page 141 The CC Module must always be installed in the first slot of the IBM 8240 see Figure 70 on page 138 Chapter 2 Hubs 137 4 Digit MAT Optical Part Diplay Address Bypass Number Connector Figure 70 IBM 8240 Concentrator Control Module
35. 1 IBM Wireless Products IBM has developed wireless solutions for a variety of communication environments IBM Wireless LAN Entry IBM Wireless LAN and IBM Infrared Wireless LAN are designed for the local area network environment and support various IBM OEM and industry standard communication protocols Three further products RadioPAC 400 PagerPAC 400 and ARTour are designed for the wide area network environment These provide communication between a wireless enabled device and a remote host They depend upon a third party network provider to supply the wide area networking infrastructure Yet another product AS 400 Wireless LAN is also designed for the local area network environment and is host based IBM products with wireless capability are listed below Note Only the IBM Wireless LAN and IBM Wireless LAN Entry products are dealt with in this document IBM Wireless Products 1 The following are local area network products a IBM Wireless LAN Entry It supports point to point communication between workstations in the same cell e It supports communication with workstations in other cells when the cells are Ethernet LAN connected e It supports seamless roaming between cells which are Ethernet connected e It uses CSMA CA as a transmission protocol To connect a cell to a LAN an IBM Wireless LAN Access Point is required The IBM Wireless LAN Access Point acts as a MAC level bridge between the client devices in
36. 1 The maximum number of hops between any two workstations directly connected to 8224s is kept at one or one and one half depending on distance 2 Ports intended for connecting workstations are not being used for interconnecting 8224s Figure 26 shows an example of interconnecting two 8224 hubs with UTP via the HEPs 8224 002 8224 004 Managed Stackable Hub Manageable Stackable Hub 10Base T UTP Hub Expansion Link 762m Wax Figure 26 Interconnecting 8224 Hubs via the Hub Expansion Ports A single 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub allows the connection of up to sixteen stations to an existing IEEE 802 3 Ethernet network As the number of workstations on the network increases more 8224s can be added to the network to meet the demand The added 8224s can be connected in three ways Chapter 2 Hubs 83 1 Stacking the 8224s on top of another A 6 inch unshielded twisted pair cable the HEP cable is included with every 8224 to connect 8224s together through the stacking expansion ports Up to ten 8224s can be stacked together for a total port count of 170 including MEP The 8224s can also be connected together via the stacking expansion ports by a standard category 3 UTP cable The cable may be any length from 15 24 centimeters 6 inches to 76 2 meters 250 feet long The overall sum of the lengths of the expansion cables may not exceed 76 2 meters 2 Cascading through the optional media expansion port to connect 8
37. 1 far right of the base unit All RI RO ports are fully repeated for longer drive distance and better signal conditions e The following are the five choices of RI RO modules STP IBM cabling system connector Rl and RO f c 7737 Optical fiber ST connector Rl and RO f c 2010 Shielded RJ 45 RI and RO f c 2007 Fiber Rl and STP ICS RO f c 7754 5 STP ICS RI and Fiber RO f c 7751 E e The fiber ports provide the interface to the main ring path via 50 125 62 5 125 85 125 or 100 140 multimode optical fiber cables terminated with ST connectors and operated at a wavelength of 850 nanometers Optical fiber If you are not familiar with optical fiber cables multimode means the cables are for a light source that is generated by LEDs rather than by laser devices The above numbers are the sizes of the core fibers and their cladding in microns e Fiber RI RO ports are compatible with other 8230s the 8250 Fiber Repeater Module f c 3822 or the 8260 Dual Fiber Repeater Module f c 3010 The 8250 module requires a setting called 8230 compatibility mode enabled Read BM 8250 8260 Planning and Site Preparation Guide GA33 0285 for references e As fully repeated pairs the copper RI RO ports are compatible with other 8230s the 8250 Copper Repeater Module f c 7386 the 8260 Token Ring 18 Port Active PPS and PMS Modules f c 3018 and 3118 when two of their ports are configured for RI RO Note that a jitter attenuator d
38. 13R 23R or 63R Licensed Internal Code customization and host definition for operation with this feature are the same as a model 13R 23R or 63R 2 When used for the IBM 16 4 Mbps token ring gateway function this feature with Configuration Support B Releases 1 or 2 provides for data passage between a single IBM host and 16 4 Mbps token ring network This feature with Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 51 52 Configuration Support B Release 3 or later or Configuration Support C and a Model 12L or 22L with ESCON Director or a Model 11L 11R 12R 21H 21L or 21R with concurrent communication adapter s provides for data passage between multiple IBM hosts and a 16 4 Mbps token ring network Ethernet Adapter 3045 Models 11L 11R 12L 12R 13R 21H 21L 21R 22L 22R EMEA only 23R 61R 62R 63R The Ethernet adapter provides IEEE 802 3 and Ethernet DIX Version 2 network support The feature ships with an Ethernet adapter diagnostic wrap plugs installation and maintenance manuals and Configuration Support C Release 4 LIC A Configuration Support C License feature 6010 6015 6060 6065 or 4710 is a prerequisite The Ethernet adapter provides the interface to attach to 10Base5 10Base2 and 10Base T networks The Ethernet adapter has a standard female attachment unit interface AUI connector An AUI cable and a medium attachment unit MAU are required to attach to the 10Base5 network Both the AUI cable and MAU ar
39. 2 Multipath Fading Multipath channels cause signals to experience fading due to constructive and destructive interference between replicas of the transmitted signal Walls metallized tinted windows and office cubicles can attenuate signals while inducing multiple reflections that arrive tenths to hundreds of nanoseconds after the first signal component reaches the receiver Small movements can produce phase shifts in individual multipath components that result in large variations of their coherent sum Therefore fading describes small scale variations that occur over short distances on the order of a meter or less and small time intervals on the order of seconds or milliseconds 4 2 2 1 Flat Fading Flat fading can occur when the delay spread which corresponds to the difference in arrival time due to different paths is significantly less than the bit duration Here the time dispersion of the channel has a negligible effect on the shape of the transmitted signal and only the signal gain of the channel varies with time The amplitude patterns of flat fading signals are often modeled by one or several probability distributions such as Weibull Appropriate for line of sight topographies and when there is motion around portable stations Nakagami Appropriate when there is motion around bBase stations Log normal Appropriate for shadow fading which corresponds to blockage and attenuation of signal by walls doors Ricean More applicable
40. 3 UTP cables with lobe lengths of up to 100 m 328 ft Up to 225 m 738 ft of Category 5 UTP and up to 400 m 1312 ft of 150 ohm STP type 1 cabling are also supported The PLL ensures that crosstalk and jitter will not distort signals and hinder the LAN operation even at these extended non standard distances For facilities with high quality building cabling and shorter lobe lengths passive media models that employ the PLL circuit once for each hub provide a highly reliable cost effective solution Categories 4 and 5 UTP cabling of up to 100 m 328 ft or 150 ohm STP of up to 200 m 656 ft are all supported at 16 Mbps Categories of 120 ohm UTP ScTP or FTP cabling are supported at the same LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM distances as 100 ohm cabling for both active and passive modules For connections between 8238s or to other IBM concentrators or hubs such as 8230s 8250s or 8260s IBM offers both copper and multimode optical fiber RI RO modules 2 8 1 3 Network Management Whether you are using the 8238 in a telecommunications closet down the hall or in a branch office in another state you need to be able to diagnose and resolve problems without leaving your network management workstation The 8238 s three levels of upgradable network management software offer the network management you need where you need it The bronze level offers configuration management real time error monitoring on a per port basis and ri
41. 3 is a higher level application interface The ring O interface is more complicated to program to but provides a higher performing interface The current TCP IP product set provides both TCP IP support through 802 2 and also TCP IP support directly through the NDIS interface The bottom dotted area outlines the transport code that is being shipped with the Network Transport System 2 NTS 2 product SPORT 3270 5250 LAN 802 2 NETBIOg LAN TCP IP NET EMU EMU SNA APPI APPL SERVER APPL APPL MGR REQ LUA LU 6 2 SNA Support LAN DLC bale io eke eee eee NETBIOS DLR SOCKET I STN MGR gt DLR ye 3 STN MGR RING 0 D ERES eer g02 2 ppr NETBIOS DDE Y gopy rp i NETBIOS p 802 2 802 2 Device Driver TEPATE SUPT Device Driver LLC SUBSET NO EXTERNAL 802 2 I F SUPT NDIS Interface 3 _____aa OA NDIS MAC NDIS MAC NDIS MAC NDIS MAC NDIS MAC Nee i Device Driver Device Driver Device Driver Device Driver Device Driver PC Network Ethernet Token Ring FDDI OEM Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Figure 5 OS 2 Transport for IBM LAN Adapters 28 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 1
42. 48 Each FC 2722 FDDI adapter kit requires one Micro Channel card slot adjacent to the 2720 adapter A maximum of three FC 2722 adapters per system is supported FDDI Fiber Dual Ring Upgrade 2723 Dual attaching stations DAS using the RISC System 6000 FDDI Fiber Single Ring Adapter and FDDI Fiber Dual Ring Upgrade will allow customers to attach to both the primary and secondary FDDI rings In the event of a failure this type of attachment allows the wrapping of the primary and the secondary ring for high network availability and problem isolation The dual ring upgrade can also attach to concentrator ports as a single attached station or a dual homing station A dual homing station attaches to two different concentrators with the second concentrator acting as a backup or a standby for the station in the event of a concentrator or port failure Characteristics e Supports dual ring FDDI attachment at 100 Mbps e Requires two Micro Channel slots including the single slot required for the FDDI single ring adapter Maximum of three FDDI dual ring adapters supported on each RISC System 6000 machine depending upon slot availability per machine type e Fiber optic cables are required for adapter connectivity and are the responsibility of the customer FDDI Fiber Single Ring Adapter 2724 Single attaching stations SAS using the RISC System 6000 FDDI Fiber Single Ring Adapter will allow customers to attach the workstation direct
43. 5 3 1 The 8260 ATM Backplane The ATM backplane has a dedicated set of connections between the ATM concentration modules and the switch control point module This star architecture gives you much higher bandwidth than traditional bus architecture Two separate stars of dedicated connections are available on the ATM backplane in Model A17 This gives you the possibility to install two ATM switch control point modules The function of automatic switch over will be provided later This design of the ATM backplane gives you two types of possible configurations in a Model 017 Capacity mode One switch control point module installed in position 9 10 This allows you to have 14 ATM concentration modules installed in slots 1 8 and 12 17 Chapter 5 ATM Products 251 e Back up Mode Two switch control point modules are installed one serving as a backup Switch A in position 9 10 Switch B in position 11 12 In slots 1 8 and 13 17 you can install up to 13 ATM concentration modules In Model A10 the switch control point module resides in position 9 10 and allows you to install concentration modules in slots 1 8 The general architecture of the 8260 LAN backplanes supports hot plugging and uses passive technology for greater reliability It uses female connectors to avoid pin bending 5 3 1 1 The ATM Upgrade MES If you already have an IBM 8260 Model 010 or Model 017 you can order a model conversion MES The ATM Upgrade MES consists
44. 8 5 IBM Network Transport Services 2 NTS 2 IBM Network Transport Services 2 NTS 2 provides programming interfaces NetBIOS IEEE 802 2 and Network Driver Interface Specification NDIS necessary for OS 2 2 0 LAN enablement in customer environments where the OS 2 LAN Server is not required NTS 2 provides the transport protocols and network adapter software to run network applications Integrated with NTS 2 is the LAN Configuration Installation Distribution Utility which supplies file system redirection and code server setup for OS 2 2 0 based products Through the NDIS interface NTS 2 allows the Novell NetWare Requester for OS 2 to share network adapters with other network applications Using NTS 2 DOS applications written to the NetBIOS and IEEE 802 2 interfaces on OS 2 2 0 are supported This virtual local area network LAN support enables these DOS applications to share an adapter with other DOS and OS 2 applications running on the same machine 1 8 5 1 Features Provides LAN enablement for NetBIOS and IEEE 802 2 APIs e Provides NDIS compliant LAN Adapter and Protocol Support LAPS e Enables Novell NetWare Requester adapter sharing e Provides OS 2 2 0 virtual NetBIOS and virtual IEEE 802 2 API support for DOS applications e Provides OS 2 2 0 LAN Configuration Installation Distribution Utility CID 1 8 5 2 Overview IBM Network Transport Services 2 NTS 2 provides LAN Adapter and Protocol Support LAPS which is a
45. 8224 Model 001 which provides an unmanaged but manageable solution for small and medium sized companies The 8224 Model 002 is for companies that desire SNMP network management capability The 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub and the 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub round out the IBM Ethernet hub line providing network connectivity and management capability for large companies with multiple LAN media types and protocols in their enterprise networks There are different customer sets for the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Chapter 2 Hubs 97 98 2 4 5 1 Small Companies One customer set for the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub is the small to medium sized companies that wish to connect their PCs and other resources in a single 10Base T Ethernet network They buy the unmanaged model initially with the capability of upgrading their network with management as their networking needs grow The 8224 Model 001 will satisfy these customers with its low per port price In addition due to the hub s stackable feature customers will not have to throw away their investment in previously purchased Model 001s when upgrading their networks with management The customer can purchase a Model 002 to manage up to nine Model 001s in an Ethernet segment 2 4 5 2 Corporate Environment The second customer set of the 8224 is the large companies that have multiple segments many or all of which are Ethernet combined with bridges routers or intelligent hubs
46. ATM 274 ZYa d4 009000 suou ZvOZDEL 8v0ZDEl 9 VSI b 91L SVGIW4S0 0000 Zi vOJE9 VSI3 N3Vv18000 8000 S08SDEZ suou S966969 91 OW 18W83 SNYT P3 18000 2000 suou vISIDEZ S966969 Wat 9000 8000 GO8SDEZ uou 1v68326 P3 18000 2000 suou vISIDEZ 1v68326 Ze OW JOWeeJISNYT H3Z 18000 9000 1990909 suou 1v68326 EVI dW 00 000 suou uou Z9PEE60 a yY9 LIGSYO Z06ZV 010000 uou uou Z9VEE60 LAOS Sn 9960469000 6203 0 9N suou 9Sz04 0 Il HAldvav 91 9960469000 6203 0 9N INON Z1Z0J 0 Il HAldvav 91 908 W 8000 00 EGeesvl pSEEsrl 8 193b2 Y dYL p 91 v908 W 8000 00 ESES YSESAYL 6z S404 dv p 91 808ZV suou suou 6bLv4b2 V HALSVW SNa vr6bZ0 Z000 00 6ESVI26 8ESv326 ve 0J 6 0SS ZO 0000 00 Gze6drl 9ze64rl Z6764S2 v908ZV 8000 00 2G64S2 peG64Sz2 Z6764S2 bid aZ9SZZV Z000 00 vv6497 vr v6497 Y88849Z VOld4 00 000 8z509 v8vz509 Gly6drZ uA LYOHS V v 91 L06ZV 0100 00 2896402 9896474 GL 6Jb2 vr6bZ0 Z000 00 6ESVIZ6 8ESv326 LEE04 6 0SS ZO 0000 00 Gze6drl 9ze64rl 8yZL4Es 908 W 8000 00 e296497 v296497 8v413 6 eS V6LZ3Zb Z000 00 Leg6 493 ZEG64S2 pyL Lgl ado N3A3 13431 3009089IM N d WOHd3 nua 3INVN H3LAVOAV ssajdepy sdqw p 91 104 sjana7 SPoDOLDIN sajidepy Bbuly uayo 6g ajqeL 275 Appendix B Microcode Level Tables 276 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Appendix C ISA Adapter Switch Settings This a
47. Adapter for 8 or 16 10BaseT o For customers that desire the Ethernet ISA wa Y 10Base2 flexibility of having support 486716 60G0740 AUI for all Ethernet media types LAN Adapter A for 16 or 32 10BaseT o Workstation adapter for Ethernet MC NA Y 10Base2 customers with MicroChannel 4867171 60G0745 AUI machines EtherStreamer MC 32 10BaseT o High performance adapter for Adapter MC 32 32 N 10Base2 servers and workstations 5969066 60G3310 AUI running high 1 0 applications Ethernet Credit E o Notebook computers and Card Adapter M 16 NA N workstations with POMCIA 0933290 N A C 10BaseT Type II slots with Card and 0933280 N A pa 10Base2 Socket Services Release 2 Ethernet Adapter Comparison Appendix D LAN Adapter Selection Summary 289 290 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Appendix E Special Notices This publication is intended to help customers systems engineers services specialists and marketing specialists understand LANs and IBM LAN solutions and architectures for planning and support purposes The information in this publication is not intended as the specification of any programming interfaces that are provided by the products mentioned in this book See the PUBLICATIONS section of the IBM Programming Announcement for IBM LAN products for more information about what publications are considered to be product documentation References in this publication to IBM products progr
48. Chapter 2 Hubs 67 e Internal auto ranging power supply the internal DC power supply will operate over the expected world wide range of utility voltages and frequencies 2 3 1 1 8222 Models 008 and 016 Model Number of Number of AUI Port BNC Port Uplink Stations 10Base T Port Attached Ports 008 Up to 9 8 Yes Yes 016 Up to 18 16 Yes Yes Note With the 8222 Model 008 you cannot use both the AUI port and the BNC port at the same time Figure 14 and Figure 15 on page 69 show the front panel of the IBM Nways 8222 Model 008 and Model 016 Ethernet Workgroup Hubs AUI and BNC Activity LEDs Power 10BASE T LED Link Activity LEDs MDI Port T dl HEH d A B 7 8 00000 ooo0oo0 10BASE T MDI X Ports Partition LEDs Collision LED AUI and BNC Partition LEDs Figure 14 8222 Mode 008 Ethernet Workgroup Hub The Model 008 consists of the following 1 Eight MDI X Media Dependent Interface Crossed 10Base T network ports 2 One MDI 10Base T port e Alternate to port 8 does not have receive transmit pair reversal e Useful for cascading without the need for crossover cables 3 One AUI port 4 One 10Base2 BNC Port e The AUI and BNC ports cannot be used concurrently 5 AUI BNC Switch e Determines which port is active 68 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM AUI and BNC Activity LEDs Power 10BASE T LED Link Activity
49. Concentrator is a wiring concentrator for use in an FDDI network lt provides a dual attachment for an FDDI ring The concentrator itself can provide up to 24 ports for the attachment of FDDI stations and concentrators connected either via optical fiber cable or via copper cable Each IBM 8240 is shipped with a Maintenance Facility Program It is installed on a PS 2 with an FDDI adapter under the OS 2 operating system It can be used to communicate with the concentrator for example to get status information to configure the IBM 8240 and to monitor a single FDDI segment 2 9 1 Hardware Description The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator is a single media access control MAC concentrator The mounted frame has eight slots for different modules The modules are e One required concentrator control module CC Module e One required ring attachment module RA Module One to six optional device attachment module DA Module The size of the concentrator is 482 6 mm 19 in wide 442 mm 17 4 in deep and 443 7 mm 17 5 in high It will therefore fit in a standard ElA Electronics Industries Association 19 inch equipment rack The weight depends on how many modules are installed It varies from 25 Kg 56 Ib with no modules to 50 Kg 112 Ib with all modules installed Figure 69 on page 137 shows the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator 136 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Cc Module RA Modul AC Power Switch
50. Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM The Serial Control Interface SCI The SCI is the same as that used in the 8250 All modules 8250 and 8260 alike use the SCI to transmit module and port configuration data The controller module uses the SCI to gather VPD from the modules and to get power and cooling status The controller module in conjunction with the DMM also uses the SCl as a medium to change the status of power supply to the modules and to remove and add modules in the event of a change in the power or cooling subsystems Figure 92 on page 178 illustrates the relationship between the MLAN SCI and the modules 2 11 3 8260 Payload Area The payload area provides the housing for media and management modules In addition to the 8260 module you may install all the 8250 modules except the Controller module in an 8260 Once these modules are installed on the 8260 they will be connected to the backplane Certain modules provide you with per port switching capability which allows you to connect different ports on the same module to different backplane segments Other modules are module switching modules which means that all the ports on the module must be connected to the same network segment The per port switching capability is available for both Ethernet and token ring Since the 8260 modules are taller than the 8250 modules when you install one or more 8250 modules in the 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switch you must u
51. Figure 12 LSP DOS Memory Consumption with JO Module 44 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM E l gog S E w r E LSP IN UPPER MEMORY NATIVE SUPPORT NDIS SUPPORT LLC ON ADAPTER LLC IN HOST Shared RAM Adapter Busmaster Adapter APPLICATION APPLICATION MEMORY NETBIOS CONSUMPTION NETBIOS DXMTOMOD SYS 1M DEXMTOMOD SYS 25K 802 2 40K DXMEOMOD SYS UPPER MEMORY DEMCGMOD SYS 15K INTERRUPT 1K ARBITRATOR INTERRUPT ARBITRATOR 1K DXMAOMOD SYS 640K DKMAOMOD SYS MEMORY MEMET TK CONVENTIONAL z O aie MEMORY MANAGER 10K OK TOR DIS MAC DRIVER AND SUPPORT TOTAL LAN SUPPORT 1K TOTAL LAN SUPPORT 11K 71K ES had SS alo a e L y ii le 888 Figure 13 LSP DOS Memory Consumption Utilizing Upper Memory 1 8 12 Memory Considerations For DOS workstations memory usage is a major concern OS 2 workstations usually do not have memory constraints assuming the machine has sufficient memory hardware The following are some key points to consider e DOS LAN workstations that are experiencing memory constraints should try a memory manager such as QEMM or 386MAX e Windows workstations that use old DOS applications may continue to experience memo
52. IP applications In addition support is provided for programs written to the NetBIOS or IEEE 802 2 application programming interfaces 1 8 8 1 IBM LAN Client Features As little as 2 KB of conventional memory required See below for more detail One common environment for concurrent multiple protocols One or more of NetBIOS IPX TCP IP and IEEE 802 2 Shim modules such as ODINSUP and LANSUP are not needed e Includes client software for attachment to Novell NetWare servers and IBM LAN servers Supports DOS LAN Services 4 0 New Novell NetWare Client 32 for DOS Windows Beta version Provides full access to essential NetWare services such as NetWare Directory Services NDS Provides improved connection reliability including the ability to automatically reconnect open files Provides enhanced Large Internet Packet LIP and Packet Burst support e Includes an installation tool with a graphical user interface GUI for easy installation of client software e Includes a command line version of the installation tool for use by network administrators installing on a large number of workstations e Allows the same adapter device driver to be used for client workstations and for Novell NetWare servers reducing support complexity 1 8 8 2 DOS Conventional Memory Usage Reduction IBM LAN Client minimizes the use of DOS conventional memory for network communications With IBM LAN Client IBM LAN ada
53. LAN adapters for IBM devices and LAN support programs including device driver information Please consult the installation and planning manuals for each of these adapters for further information IBM plans to supply drivers with each of its future LAN adapter packages 1 1 OSI Reference Model and LAN Components The OSI reference model chart as shown in Figure 1 on page 2 relates the LAN product set to the seven layer OSI reference model The left column labeled OSI Model shows the seven layer stack beginning at the application layer and moving down through the presentation session transport network data link and finally the physical layer From a product viewpoint middle column the LAN products are usually split into application programs interfaces and protocols and network support products The right column gives examples of the products that fit each of these categories The following are examples of applications e Communications Manager including 3270 and 5250 emulation LAN Network Manager e Station Manager e LAN Server Requester e Novell NetWare e 3270 emulation e 5250 emulation Examples of protocols and interfaces are e Provided by LAN Support Program LSP a DOS product IEEE 802 2 interface used by emulators LAN Network Manager etc NetBIOS the interface used by IBM LAN Server Requester PCLP Microsoft LAN Manager Requester Lotus Notes etc e Provided by Network Transport 2 NTS 2
54. LANs Ethernet or token ring can interoperate using an ATM LAN link To the LAN workstations the ATM network will appear just as an extension of the LAN The token ring LAN emulation server support and the Ethernet LAN emulation server support that are provided for the TURBOWAYS 25 100 and 155 adapters will comply with the ATM Forum recommendations in early 1996 The current LES is a software solution on a PS 2 or a PC and capable of supporting 1000 connections Each ATM attached station and each bridge count towards this number But the LAN attached stations do not count in this LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM calculation This means that you can have in theory 1000 LANs each with many stations connected to one LES via 1000 bridges If you have more than one LES you have more than one emulated LAN The only way that the stations attached to two different emulated LANs can communicate with each other is through a bridge or router Since we do not currently offer a bridge router for this purpose the only way that you can do it today is to go out of one emulated LAN to a real LAN through an 8281 and then get to the other LAN via a LAN bridge or router and then back into the second emulated LAN via another 8281 The 8281 can have 512 connections Each connection to an ATM station or another 8281 counts as one The connection to the stations behind a bridge another 8281 does not count Note An IBM 8260
55. LIC s One of the above ten eight plus two slots must contain either a combined trunk and control point Type 2 or an independent control point Type 1 or Type 2 adapter AC or DC power input The following required component must be installed on the shelf One combined trunk and control point Type 2 or an independent control point Type 1 or Type 2 adapter The following optional components can be installed on the shelf Up to seven low speed or high speed adapters or voice server adapters if the required control point adapter is a combined trunk and control point adapter or Up to eight low speed or high speed adapters or voice server adapters if the required control point adapter is installed as an independent control point adapter in one of the two slots reserved for them Note A maximum of four voice server adapters can be installed in both these cases Up to eight Line Interface Coupler LIC s or voice server extensions A backup switch A second power supply A second control point must be the same adapter type as the primary control point One or two clock cards LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 3 4 1 4 2220 Nways Switch Model 501 The 2220 Nways Switch Model 501 is an expansion unit to the 2220 Nways Switch Model 500 It consists of the following base components A rack with an expansion shelf containing six adapter slots e Six slots for port or trunk Type 1 or Type 2 adapters or voice server adapt
56. LLC functions This adapter offers the customer a connection to Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LANs which support communications with both IBM and non IBM products Concurrent sessions with both Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802 3 stations are possible These two CSMA CD protocols are able to coexist on the same LAN but they cannot communicate with each other This Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 55 concurrent session capability of feature 2617 allows the 9406 to support a customer s staged migration from Ethernet Version 2 to the newer EEE 802 3 LAN I O Card Slots Used One Maximum Four per system on all supported models except the Models E80 E90 E95 F80 F90 and F95 which have a maximum of six Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart in Table 5 Cables The customer must procure the AUI cable which connects between the adapter and the Ethernet IEEE 802 3 transceiver This cable and the transceiver are not available from IBM but can be obtained from an Ethernet supplier AS 400 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD LAN Adapter 2625 The Ethernet IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD LAN Adapter feature available on 9406 D E and F Models provides a single attachment to one Ethernet Version 2 or one IEEE 802 3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect LAN The feature consists of an adapter card and internal code which supplies Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802 3 media access control MAC plus IEEE 802 2 logical link control LLC functions The custom
57. MAU e 8230 Token Ring Controlled Access Unit CAU e 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub e 8240 FDDI Concentrator e 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub e 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub e 8281 ATM LAN Bridge e 8282 Turboways ATM Concentrator This wide range of hub products represent IBM s commitment to the workgroup interconnectivity arena IBM s introduction of these standards based products demonstrates the company s commitment to supporting technologies other than its own a necessity in today s enterprise networks that consist of a variety of multivendor communications hardware and software Table 7 on page 65 compares IBM s hubs with each other to help you position and place them in a network environment LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM sqnH zg 1ejdeyo S9 Table 7 Page 1 of 2 Comparison of IBM s Hubs Model Token Ring Ethernet Nr of Lobe Unmanaged Managed Graphical Management Platforms 8222 008 8222 016 8224 001 8224 002 X but manageable Windows NV for Windows Novell NMS NV for AIX Windows NV for Windows Novell NMS NV for AIX 8230 001 8230 002 LNM for OS 2 LNM for AIX LNM for OS 2 LNM for AIX 8230 003 013 NV for Windows LNM for OS 2 LNM for AIX 8244 12F 12S8 12U LNM for AIX Windows NV for Windows NV for AIX
58. MAU for example even if this is proven to be compatible to an 8228 when set up in stand alone mode All LIU ports supported In the original 8230 003 013 announcement only the ICS LIU was supported to attach splitters Now all lobe ports in all LIUs are supported for splitter attachment as long as cabling rules are taken into consideration Using IBM 8228s Connect 8228 RI ports to LIU ports or ports on RLAMs not local LAM ports You need to enable passive concentrator attachment privileges PCAP through the EIA 232 port Concentrator configuration maintenance facility CCMF is activated via the EIA 232 port on the 8230 003 013 with a PC running an ASCII terminal emulation program Phantom Current Phantom current is the electrical signal that a normal token ring adaptor uses to open the relay in a port ports on LIUs in this case for connection An 8228 contains no active components and cannot supply this signal It is therefore necessary to manually open the port through management software by enabling PCAP LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 8228 O no Liu LIU LIU Liu RIRO workstation ma workstation Figure 64 Fan Out Using 8228s Using IBM 8226s Connect 8226 RI ports to LIU ports LAM ports or ports on RLAMs No config
59. Microsoft Windows operating system and can be used on any PC either attached to or in a stack with an 8224 Model 002 SNMP management model 2 4 5 4 Management for Large Companies For corporate environments with multiple SNMP managed devices bridges routers hubs on the networks either StackWatch for NMS or the 8224 NetView for Windows and AIX Applications will provide a quality solution The 8224 NetView for Windows and AIX programs are the graphical management applications for the 8224 on the NetView for Windows and AIX platforms LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM respectively The NetView for Windows application provides network management support for many products including the IBM 8271 8230 and several non IBM products These applications should be used when other IBM and non IBM devices are used in the network and the customer is using the IBM NetView for Windows or AIX platform StackWatch for NMS is the 8224 graphical management application for Novell s NetWare Management System V2 0 platform As with NetView for Windows NMS provides network management support for many network products like hubs routers and bridges through applications like StackWatch StackWatch for NMS should be used when several non IBM devices are used in the network and when the customer is using Novell s NetWare Management System V2 0 platform The StackWatch for NMS product provides 8224 management support for 10 of all existing E
60. PS 2 Industrial Computers and non IBM workstations implementing the Micro Channel architecture e The IBM PS 2 PS ValuePoint Industrial Computers and industry compatible personal computers implementing the ISA bus e Non IBM workstations implementing the EISA bus These new IBM FDDI Adapters are replacing the current IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters IBM FDDI Fiber Base and Extender Family Support under new operating systems with corresponding device drivers is also offered In addition a new range of IBM workstations are supported by the new adapters The IBM FDDI Adapters are shipped at the latest level of FDDI Station Management Standard SMT 7 3 The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator and the FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent used to perform the network management are also upgraded to the same SMT 7 3 level of the FDDI standard The following is a list of the new FDDI adapters IBM FDDI Fiber Base MC Adapter e IBM FDDI Copper Base MC Adapter e IBM FDDI Fiber Base EISA Adapter IBM FDDI Copper Base EISA Adapter e IBM FDDI Fiber Base ISA Adapter e IBM FDDI Copper Base ISA Adapter e IBM FDDI Fiber Extender MC Adapter e IBM FDDI Copper Extender MC Adapter e IBM FDDI Fiber Extender EISA ISA Adapter e IBM FDDI Copper Extender EISA ISA Adapter e IBM FDDI UTP 5 MC Adapter e IBM FDDI UTP 5 EISA Adapter e IBM FDDI UTP 5 ISA Adapter IBM FDDI MC ADAPTERS These adapters should be used for IBM Personal System 2 systems for server and client enviro
61. Requirements for the 10Base T Ports The sixteen 10Base T ports in the 8224 accept either 100 ohm UTP category 3 4 or 5 cables 100 or 120 ohm FTP category 5 cables or 150 ohm IBM STP type 1 6 9 1A 6A or 9A cables UTP and FTP cables must use RJ 45 connectors STP cables must use cable adapters to convert to RJ 45 connectors Token ring STP cables will not work as is in Ethernet environments because the wires pin out to the connectors differently However you can adapt the connectors for the correct pinout for Ethernet see Figure B 3 on page B 1 of the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Installation and Users Guide GA27 4024 for the correct pinout At end stations and at the 8224 you will also need impedance matching devices to change the impedance of 150 ohm STP and 120 ohm FTP to 100 ohms Changing the impedance does not reduce maximum drive distances Whether UTP FTP or STP all cables and connectors you use should meet specifications of TIA EIA Standards Proposal 2840 A a revision of the Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Straight Through or Crossover Cables Use straight through cables to make 10Base T connections to devices such as workstations and servers Crossover cables are typically required when making 10Base T connections to Chapter 2 Hubs 81 82 other hubs The 8224 however offers a way to bypass this requirement If connection is to a different hub use 8224 port 16 and turn the uplin
62. S 390 Open Systems Adapter 2 by providing support for ATM IBM intends to comply with ATM Forum UNI Specification Version 3 1 IBM intends to provide support for ATM Forum compliant LAN emulation as well as native ATM support It is expected that this support will be provided at data rates up to 155 Mbps IBM intends to enhance the IBM 3746 Nways Multinetwork Controller Model 950 and the IBM 3746 Model 900 Network Node to offer solutions responding to the emergence of ATM The IBM 3746 Model 950 and Model 900 will provide an ATM interface supporting the frame relay emulation for connection to the Nways switch family and to standard ATM networks Chapter 5 ATM Products 265 266 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Appendix A Adapter Tables Table 26 on page 270 is an easy to use fact sheet providing answers to most of the commonly asked questions concerning shared RAM style IBM token ring adapters lt should also be useful as an aid in identifying already installed adapters Most of the information found in this table can be referenced in the individual adapter announcements and LAN Technical Reference IEEE 802 2 an NetBIOS APIs SC30 3587 or LAN Technical Reference Adapter Interfaces SBOF 6221 The following items describe the headings in Table 26 on page 270 A 1 1 Adapter Name In most cases the adapter names used in Table 26 on page 270 and Table 27 on page 272 should be prefixed with the phrase IBM Token R
63. V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter is identical in function to the Multi Interface Serial Adapter Note The 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter is only available in some countries An IBM representative should be consulted to determine the LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM availability of the 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter in a particular country Each interface of the 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter can support one of three data link protocols e PPP Point to Point Protocol e Frame Relay permanent virtual circuits only e The protocol implemented by the IBM Token Ring Network Bridge Program Version 2 2 when used as one half of a remote bridge Each 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter requires up to two DCE interface cables appropriate to the type of DCE interface in use The available DCE interface cables are the following 6611 V 35 Compatible Serial Adapter Cable feature 2655 6611 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter Cable feature 2657 IBM 6611 Token Ring Network 16 4 Adapter 2660 The IBM 6611 Token Ring Network 16 4 Adapter provides a single interface to either a 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps IBM Token Ring Network Each IBM 6611 Token Ring Network 16 4 Adapter requires one 6611 Token Ring Network Adapter Cable feature 2665 6611 Ethernet Adapter 2680 The 6611 Ethernet Adapter provides a single interface to a 10 Mbps CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access
64. Windows that comes with the hardware and runs on top of IBM NetView for Windows is an example In larger installations IBM LAN Network Manager for AIX which runs on top of IBM NetView for AIX is another choice As for CMOL support the code is not available at the time of writing LNM for OS 2 V2 0 with application of certain PTFs should provide management functions graphically using CMOL by the time this book is published Remote LAM The remote LIU and remote LAM both contain their own microprocessors and communicate to each other over a control wire using category 5 UTP that can be up to 100 meters long Parallel to it is a data cable which provides transport of data on the ring Lobe cables that attach workstations to the RLAM are governed by its cabling rules Mixed Wiring Mixing and matching of different wiring types makes the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit Model 3 the most versatile work group concentrator available e Any combination of active or passive devices can be connected e 150 ohm or 100 120 ohm balanced cable shielded or unshielded can be mixed in one base unit with a combination of different LIUs and LAMs e RI and RO connections can either be made with ICS data connectors RJ 45 connectors or optical fiber ST connectors e Support of category 3 UTP cable via an active LIU or active RLAM LAMs Ability to attach up to three LAMs to the IBM 8230 base unit Each LAM that is available now has 20 ports Fan Out
65. adapters capable of full duplex Ethernet upgrading to adapters capable of full duplex Ethernet may be the most cost effective way to double network access bandwidth given server slot constraints and the re usability of non full duplex adapters elsewhere in the user s network 3 1 2 Compatibility The 8271 EtherStreamer Switch is compatible with and can forward frames between existing Ethernet 10 Mbps LAN segments whether the segments consist of IBM or non IBM machines whether the machines contain IBM or non IBM Ethernet adapters and whether the Ethernet LAN segment is formed using IBM or non IBM concentrators as long as these network components conform to the specifications listed in the IEEE 802 3 standard The IBM 8271 is compatible with all current IBM Ethernet adapters and concentrators including the following e IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet IBM LAN Adapter A for Ethernet e IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP e IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet CX e IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter e IBM 8222 10Base T Workgroup Hub e IBM 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub e IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub e RISC System 6000 Ethernet High Performance LAN Adapter 3 1 3 IBM EtherStreamer Switch Release 1 1 Microcode Release 1 1 of the IBM EtherStreamer Switch microcode is available at no additional charge to existing IBM EtherStreamer Switch customers The IBM EtherStreamer Switch is being improve
66. and ATM e All these LAMs are passive They do not contain circuits to do retiming and regeneration of electrical signals e The shielded RJ 45 LAM and the RJ 45 LAM unshielded are basically the same except for the RJ 45 connectors The shielded connectors allow for connection using 150 ohm RJ 45 STP cables Before the announcement of this feature 150 ohm STP cables had to be terminated with ICS data connectors and connected to the ICS LAMs which take up more rack space Latest IEEE Recommendations Because of the latest changes in IEEE 802 5 recommendations a mix of all supported LAM types in one 8230 base unit is now supported by IBM This is significantly different from the original 8230 003 announcement The Model 3 becomes even more flexible in supporting different cabling needs In mixed LAM environments the most stringent cabling rules prevail concerning lobe length and number of attached stations in one ring segment e In a mixed LAM environment within one 8230 place any RJ 45 LAM with unshielded media first starting with LAM position 1 followed by any shielded RJ 45 LAMs with shielded media followed by any ICS LAMs IBM Cabling LAM LEDs System Data Handle Number Connector Handle DOO Figure 52 Front View ICS Lobe Attachment Module LAM LAM LEDs Number RJ 45 Handle Recess Connector Ha
67. and interconnect LANs on both media types through the adapter s card to card switching capabilities The adapters have support for the following Networking Operating Systems IBM OS 2 LAN Server and Novell NetWare Figure 108 IBM Ethernet Quad BT PeerMaster Server Adapter 3 4 The IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch The following section describes an IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch 2220 Nways Switch and how it implements the BroadBand Networking Services architecture The 2220 Nways Switch will be presented in the following manner e An overview of the physical components of an 2220 Nways Switch and the various models e A discussion on the 2220 Nways Switch s architecture e A high level view of the cell switch e Local node management e Details of the adapters and links supported Later sections will cover network wide subjects such as supported user protocols network management network clocking and other topics 3 4 1 General Node Description and Models The 2220 Nways Switch consists of components that fit into one or two IBM 19 inch racks depending on the 2220 Nways Switch model The major sections of a rack and its dimensions are shown in the following figure Chapter 3 Switches 223 Nways Switch Physical Cabinet s Model 300 Model 501 XPANSION Height 1830mm 72in Height 1830mm 72in Depth 873mm 34in Depth 873mm 34in Width 660mm 26in Width 59
68. applications and device drivers The main disadvantage of the shared RAM architecture is that any data movement between the shared RAM area and other areas of system memory must be done under direct control of the system s CPU This means that the CPU may be tied up doing the relatively menial task of moving data around within system memory when it could be doing something more useful such as performing a database transaction This movement of data to and from the shared RAM area must be done because applications cannot operate on data while that data resides in the shared RAM area 1 3 Bus Master DMA Adapters Bus master DMA adapters utilize on board DMA controllers to transfer data directly between the adapter and system memory without involving the system processor The primary advantage of this architecture is that it frees up the system processor to perform other tasks which is especially important in a server environment Bus master DMA adapters do not use the shared RAM mechanism to transfer data to system memory However bus master DMA adapters do use shared ROM when they are performing the remote initial program load RIPL function The following are the primary advantages of the bus master DMA adapter e The ability to transfer data directly to and from system memory without involving the system processor e High performance levels can be achieved in certain environments OS 2 with LAPS or NTS 2 and Novell ODI which cannot
69. as Mixed Trunk Adapter and Not Applicable Not Applicable Trunk 1000 Trunk 1000 Control Point Models 300 500 connections connections per LSA per HSA speed less speed less than 2 Mbps than 52 Mbps Network up to Network up to 250 nodes 250 nodes 1000 trunks 1000 trunks Line Interface Coupler LIC s Physical line cards connect to external devices leased lines or carrier services Clock Module optional Clock Module to provide synchronization for networks that transport voice or other circuit emulation services Voice Server Adapter VSA optional and Voice Server Extensions VSE optional The voice server adapter provides the following functions for 64 Kbps Pulse Code Modulation channels e Voice compression e Silence removal A law Mu law conversions FAX detection 226 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Digital echo cancellation The voice extensions are paired with the voice server and provide support for additional voice circuits 3 4 1 1 IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch Models The 2220 Nways Switch is available in the following three models 2220 Nways Switch Model 300 Contains eight adapter slots 2220 Nways Switch Model 500 Contains ten adapter slots lt is available separately or as an upgrade from a Model 300 2220 Nways Switch Model 501 It is an expansion of the Model 500 providing an additional six adapter slots The Model 500 is a prerequisite which con
70. be referred to as broadcast domains Virtual switch support on the IBM EtherStreamer Switch allows a single physical switch to be divided into two to four virtual switches each consisting of a non overlapping set of two to four switch ports In Figure 98 you can see the switch logically divided in two switches Virtual Switch 0 1 Ports 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 Figure 98 Example of Virtual Switch Configuration e EtherPipe Support To construct switch networks consisting of more than eight LAN segments users of the IBM EtherStreamer Switches with Release 1 0 of the microcode may interconnect two IBM EtherStreamer Switches by connecting a single port on one switch to a single port on the other for a maximum bandwidth of 20 Mbps between the switches With EtherPipe support in Release 1 1 of the microcode this interconnection capability is expanded so two IBM EtherStreamer Switches can be interconnected using up to four links in parallel Each of these inter switch links is a full duplex Ethernet connection that provides up to 20 Mbps of bandwidth between switches or a maximum of 80 Mbps of bandwidth using four lines between switches With Multilink EtherPipes traffic is automatically distributed on each of these links using destination address so that traffic load can be more evenly balanced across each of the parallel links between the switches in a manner consistent with any spanning tree features configured at the time EtherPipe s
71. channel assignment interference does not affect the reliability of the system as long as there are quiet channels available Dynamic channel assignment cannot work if there is interference on every channel Another technique to reduce interference among users is power control As discussed above within a coverage area the signal attenuation between receiver and transmitter can vary widely by as much as 60 dB or more If all base stations and remote stations transmitted at the same power level received and transmitted signals may differ in power again by as much as 60 dB This creates an adjacent channel interference problem To counteract this problem a remote stations transmit power is adaptively controlled This should have the effect of minimizing the amount of interference generated within physically proximate networks Over and above the dynamic capability of the IBM wireless LAN there is a manual facility as well which may be used to reduce the transmit power This function not only reduces interference between cells networks but also increases the average number of cells users per square meter Still another action is possible for stationary systems which consists of antenna focusing The transceiver uses a patch antenna This design offers some directional sensitivity more gain in one direction Aiming the antenna towards the transceiver receiver will minimize the interference while it improves the overall signal quality and strength fo
72. connect up to twelve class B stations to an FDDI ring When used in stand alone mode the FDDI ring is internal to the 8244 To use the stand alone mode you must reconfigure the 8244 as described in 2 10 3 2 Customizing the 8244 Concentrator on page 148 152 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM FDDI Ring ee ze NA escasas A A TRATA REE 12 Stations Maximum Figure 80 8244 Stand Alone Mode Dual Homing Mode Figure 81 on page 154 shows how an FDDI workstation can be attached to two concentrator ports at the same time The two ports can be on the same concentrator or on different concentrators Chapter 2 Hubs 153 Figure 81 8244 Dual Homing Mode The following are the advantages of dual homing e Data integrity on the ring is increased and protection against cable failure is provided FDDI stations are protected against the failure of a given concentrator Note Dual homing is possible only for workstations that are class A stations via for example an FDDI card with a DAS option 2 10 4 2 Configuring Optical Fiber Connections When installing optical fiber connections you only need one optical fiber cable between the concentrator and a workstation except when the workstation is attached in dual homing mode Figure 82 on page 155 shows an example of how to install fiber cables when attaching SAS stations to an FDDI ring in standard mode
73. connected to the token ring segments on the ShuntBus The 8250 token ring modules can only be connected to the token ring segments on the Enhanced TriChannel 8260 18 Port Active Per Port Switching Module This module is a single slot module that supports 18 active ports The main features of this module are e 18 ports with shielded RJ 45 connectors Each port has its own DPLL which actively retimes and regenerates the signal on that port This provides longer lobe distances on both UTP and STP e Each port can be connected to one of the 10 token ring segments on the ShuntBus or one of the 11 isolated segments on the module All the ports can be connected to a maximum of 11 segments consisting of backplane and isolated segments Simultaneous UTP and STP cabling is supported on the module Also UTP and STP attached stations can be connected to the same segment LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Ports 17 and 18 can optionally be configured to be used as RI RO ports for connection to another hub Support for beacon recovery using the recovery ASIC which is implemented on the module Support for address to port mapping using the recovery ASIC Support for fan out devices and splitters for attaching up to eight stations to each port Support for connection of MAC less stations such as token ring tracing tools to all ports except port 18 Automatic speed detection of the attached stations so that only the st
74. connectivity with other IBM products here is list of products and some comments about their connectivity Table 13 8230 Connectivity with Other IBM Products Product Connected To Comments from Other 8230 products side side 8228 8226 or MAU RI RO Drive distances conform to blade on 8250 60 normal token ring cabling rules 8228 8226 LIU lobe As splitter for 8 devices ports 8226 splitter mode LAM As splitter for 8 devices lobe ports 8230 001 002 RI RO Full drive distance as between 8230 003s 8218 8219 8220 RI RO Cannot be half repeater of these devices 8250 TR Fiber RI RO RI RO Fiber connection is fully repeated Repeater module copper is not 8260 18 Port Active RI RO RI RO Fully repeated drive distance PPS and PMS need jitter attenuator card on modules 8260 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 7 2 Configuration Configuration of an IBM 8230 003 013 can be a very straightforward task In fact it is designed as a customer setup CSU machine and will operate properly right out of the shipping boxes without any configuration procedures We have included below a few usage scenarios and the basic setup procedures required m Read This We must point out here that understanding of token ring network design rules is of prime importance for successful implementation of a token ring network using the 8230 or in fact any other hubs The IBM Token Ring Network Intr
75. contact with the Proxy Agent as well as other resynchronization intervals refer to Chapter 10 in Using LAN Network Manager for AIX SC31 7110 which deals with managing FDDI networks Displaying an FDDI Station Submap LNM for AIX provides an FDDI Station submap to represent the managed elements of an FDDI station If you double click on an FDDI station in an FDDI Segment submap the FDDI Station submap opens to display a graphical representation of a computer workstation Icons representing the SMT attachment MAC path path class and ports are displayed in the submap 2 10 6 Positioning 2 11 IBM Nways The IBM 8244 FDDI Concentrator should be marketed as the primary attachment to the FDDI dual ring for attaching workstations bridges and routers to the backbone Customers can now achieve greater bandwidth than existing LANs such as token ring and Ethernet by using the 8244 for attachment to the FDDI network The 8244 therefore can be used for small dedicated workgroups or as a backbone unit for LAN extension and total network interoperability The 8244 can provide connection for FDDI devices that are based on the ANSI and ISO standards The 8244 will operate with management entities that support the ANSI Station Management SMT 7 3 frame based protocols The 8244 FDDI Work Group Concentrator complements the existing IBM FDDI ring attachment products as a concentrator for up to 12 attached workstations The IBM 8250 Multipr
76. determination 141 Index 307 process plug 140 propagation 238 242 protection plug 140 Protocols protocols data link layer 60 61 proxy agent 157 PVC permanent virtual circuit 252 Q Q 2931 258 QOS quality of service 249 Quad B2 222 Quad BT 222 quality of service QOS 249 R RA module 136 138 140 rack configuration 223 rack mounting shelf 136 RadioPAC 400 231 RAF 144 Rayleigh 240 RB reserved bandwidth 249 RD LAP 233 RDF 144 receptacle 138 redundant mode 227 remote bridge adapters supported 60 61 remote concentrator 144 remote monitoring RMON 133 remote program update 142 144 reserved bandwidth RB 249 Reset button 173 RETAIN 225 Ricean 240 RIF routing information field 194 216 right boundary adapter 171 ring attachment module 136 139 RIP 195 RIP implementation 194 RISC 59 RISC System 6000 LAN Adapters 2720 47 2722 47 2723 48 2724 48 2725 48 2726 49 2970 46 2980 46 4224 46 RJ 45 connection 8226 Token Ring 99 RLAM cabling 126 RMON remote monitoring 133 router engine module REM 192 308 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM routing information field RIF 194 216 RPU 142 144 RS 232 62 adapters supported 61 62 cables 61 62 RS 422 RS 449 adapters supported 60 cables 60 S S 390 OSA 265 S CPM switch control point module 252 SAAL 258 SAC 138 SBus Adapters TURBOWAYS 25 ATM 18 SDLC cables 61 communication adapter feature 61 interfaces supp
77. different areas of deployment These wireless LAN products are enabling technologies Their fundamental purpose is to provide a radio interface and appropriate device drivers to common communication protocols such as TCP IP NetBIOS and IPX The radio component of the LAN is totally transparent to applications using these protocols To the end user an application works exactly the same way as it would ona conventional wired LAN such as Ethernet or token ring A brief summary of the host independent wireless LAN products IBM Wireless LAN Entry and IBM Wireless LAN is given in the following sections 4 1 3 IBM Wireless LAN Entry IBM Wireless LAN Entry is a product which enables workstations to be grouped into logical cells using a radio interface built into a PCMCIA type adapter These workstations can then communicate with other systems in the following ways e To other workstations in the cell on a peer to peer basis e To other workstations in the cell via an IBM Wireless LAN Access Point e Via an IBM Wireless LAN Access Point to servers or hosts attached to an Ethernet LAN e To other workstations in other cells via an IBM Wireless LAN Access Point and an Ethernet LAN IBM Wireless LAN Entry operates in the 2 4 GHz frequency industrial scientific and medical ISM band Operating in this band requires no license IBM Wireless LAN Entry employs a technique known as spread spectrum frequency hopping as a means of transmission CSMA CA
78. display shows different numbers during the diagnostic cycle For a detailed explanation of each LED s status and interpretation of the numbers shown on the Error Code Display refer to the 8230 Customer Setup Instruction and Service Guide that comes with the hardware Table 11 on page 106 gives you a rule of thumb of what the status is Chapter 2 Hubs 105 Table 11 General LED Status LED Status Meaning Green On OK ready and operational Off Not ready no power ready but workstation not active lobe ports only Blinking Disabled by management software or internal code Yellow On Error malfunction Off No error Blinking Defective hardware Exception Because LIUs do not have a separate status LED for the module as a whole if all LEDs of a LIU are not lit the meaning could be e Ready but no active workstation connected e LIU installed improperly and has no physical connection with the base unit e LIU is completely dead Switches There are four switches on the base unit See Figure 41 on page 105 Figure 42 on page 105 and Table 12 for reference Table 12 Switches Position and Function Location Switch Function Front Power Turning power on or off to the 8230 4 16 Ring speed selection between 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps Unit restarts if switch position changes CMOL SNMP Management protocol selection CMOL position does not work at the time of writing Need CMOL code update in future Rear Voltage Sele
79. family of homogeneous token ring intelligent wiring concentrators They have better price performance than Model 1 and 2 on a cost per port basis Here are some considerations when choosing between Model 1 2 and 3 13 1 Will you start out with a very small number of ports less than 10 for example e If yes consider Model 3 13 e If no consider Model 1 2 20 ports minimum 2 Will SNMP manageability be a major advantage e If yes consider Model 3 13 3 Will a large number of active RJ 45 ports be a requirement A very common example would be to upgrade a site implemented with 100 ohm category 3 cables from 4 Mbps to 16 Mbps If yes consider Model 2 e If no consider Model 3 13 Active RJ 45 UTP LAMs are not supported but active LIUs and active Remote LAMs can be an alternative if the number of ports required is fewer than 20 2 7 5 2 8230 003 13 Versus 8250 60 Comparing the IBM 8250 60 multiprotocol hubs with their corresponding token ring modules the major considerations are 1 Will any networking topology other than token ring play a major role in the network under consideration If yes consider 8250 60 e If no consider 8230 003 013 2 Will multiple segment configuration in the same site or even micro segmentation be a major benefit to your environment e If yes consider 8250 60 e If no consider 8230 003 013 3 Will cost per port be a major issue Especially for environments where token ri
80. in source routing This allows it to be used in complex token ring networks which include source route bridges and parallel bridges Chapter 5 ATM Products 261 The ATM bridge will filter in the token ring world based on hop count MAC address ring number source SAP and SNAP header For Ethernet it filters based on MAC address Source SAP and Ethertype This gives the ATM bridge an advantage when compared to simple LAN switches which do not support filtering ATM is optional The ATM bridge is ideal for applications where you need a multiport bridge today and ATM in the future Open Enterprise ATM UNI Specification V3 0 RFC 1213 MIB Il Because of the difference in frame format all ATM bridges that share a LAN emulation server have to be configured as the same LAN type token ring or Ethernet Highlights of the ATM bridge include the following Attaches two or four token ring or Ethernet LAN segments e Attaches to an ATM switch at 100 Mbps full duplex using SC connector and multimode fiber optional which allows the bridge to be at a distance of two kilometers e Supports LAN to LAN over the ATM network e Supports local bridging between LANs e Supports bridging LAN to ATM for ATM attached workstations and servers e Discovers ATM partners and establishes a connection on an as needed basis self learning e Provides filtering on token ring and Ethernet LANs e Supports SNMP network management e Provides a PC based c
81. is essential to limit the traffic that needs to cross the WAN which usually has much lower bandwidth than the campus LAN It also avoids cell loss due to a mismatch of bandwidth The 8260 allows you to define multiple networks with different ATM network addresses This is important when you interconnect ATM networks with different addressing structures or authorities A typical application is when you merge sites You link their networks without the need to redefine their ATM addresses 5 4 4 Module Management The 8260 switch control point module has a local console RS 232 port for out of band management from a local or remote via a modem terminal Easy to use but powerful line edit commands are available for management operations Access to this interface is also possible in band through an TCP IP Telnet session The switch control point module supports program updates either from the local port or in band using TFTP protocols The module is provided with a set of tools for troubleshooting It is able to trigger traces on selected functions or to save dumps The saved files can be sent via the network for analysis Chapter 5 ATM Products 257 In line with the general architecture of the 8260 the ATM modules have light emitting diodes LED for visual troubleshooting and they fully participate in the intelligent power and inventory management of the 8260 The modules are full floating with the exception of the switch control point
82. last 8224 in the stack must not exceed 76 2 meters 250 feet Cabling Requirements for the Com Port The com port is a standard DB 9 male connector which provides a standard EIA TIA 232 E RS 232 serial interface You can connect locally with a null modem cable or remotely using a serial cable and a modem at each end and telephone lines in between Once connected you can manage the 8224 and upgrade microcode through this port You can make a null modem cable by connecting a null modem adapter to a standard serial cable 2 4 3 4 Connecting Multiple 8224s Together You can maximize the number of ports available to end stations by interconnecting 8224s using their HEPs Up to ten 8224s can be linked through HEPs and the total hub expansion cable length from the first to the last 8224 ina stack can be 76 2 meters 250 feet An example of interconnected Model 001s in a stack is shown in Figure 25 on page 83 In this example no Model 002 is present therefore only the Ethernet bus is active inside the hub expansion cables LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM oF Terminator 001 001 Ree 001 casa o co ipleleielglylyinieelylyiele V a 001 Physical View Logical View T External Ethernet Bus Figure 25 A Stack of Four 8224 Model 001s The following are the two benefits to using the hub expansion ports to interconnect 8224s
83. limitation is that F C 2501 is mutually exclusive with F C 2800 and F C 2801 It is field installable and the maximum number is 2 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 1 11 3174 LAN Adapters The 3174 is an establishment controller that provides a broad range of connectivity options workstation and host attachment possibilities network asset management capabilities and expandability features In addition to options that allow host connections via both local channel and remote communication link connections the 3174 can connect to the IBM Token Ring network or Ethernet LAN networks IEEE 802 3 and Ethernet DIX Version 2 This section details the features and functions available for the 3174 for LAN attachment IBM 16 4 Mbps Token Ring Network Gateway 3026 Models 11L 11R 12R 61R 62R Note An alternative to this feature is Configuration Support B or Configuration Support C with the Type 3A adapter 3044 This feature should not be ordered when Configuration Support B or Configuration Support C is ordered to provide the gateway support This feature provides the capability of up to 140 token ring attached devices as PU 2 0 devices that is DSPUs to communicate with an IBM host It includes a Type 3A Dual Speed 16 4 Communication Adapter which operates at 16 or 4 Mbps a 2 4 m 8 ft communication cable and Configuration Support S Release 5 Licensed Internal Code Any combination of the following downstream to
84. networks WAN The ATM network control functions are fully distributed all nodes participate as peers in the control algorithms in contrary to a centralized software function that resides on a server This is key to network availability scalability and growth The IBM 8260 ATM switch control point module gives you the following networking functions e Switched and permanent virtual circuits SVC and PVC e ATM signalling SVCs according to the ATM Forum V3 0 specifications upgradable to next versions V3 1 ITU LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Point to point and point to multipoint connections for PVC and SVC services e Topology services and route computation with automatic bypass of failed nodes and links e Switch to switch interface based on an extension of the ATM Forum UNI Version 3 0 as stated in the ATM Forum P NNI framework e Interconnection of local ATM networks over an ATM WAN providing permanent virtual path allowing setup of switched connections between end systems on both sides of the WAN 5 3 3 4 port 100 Mbps ATM Concentration Modules You can get this one slot module with four 100 Mbps multimode fiber ports in two versions with FSD the FDDI MIC or SC connectors The 100 Mbps ATM Concentration modules can interoperate with each other at the full 2 km distance because both devices have identical electrical and optical characteristics Both modules follow the specifications given by the AT
85. of the log file is 64 KB and will be used in a wraparound fashion oldest log entry will be erased by new entry View Mail With this function the latest status report frames SRF which were sent by a IBM 8240 are displayed Once they are displayed they will be deleted from this function but are still logged by the log manager function A Mail icon next to a selected concentrator indicates if new mail is available The following conditions are reported by the IBM 8240 and can be viewed via the View Mail function When the average LER is greater than or equal to the LER alarm generation threshold for a specific port e When the port elasticity buffer error counter is incremented e When the MAC frame error threshold has been exceeded e When the MAC not copied threshold has been exceeded e When a duplicate MAC address is detected on the FDDI ring When an undesirable or illegal connection is attempted When a trace is started propagated or terminated by the concentrator Configuration Manager The Configuration Manager function allows the changing of multiple MIB management information base attributes for any node in an FDDI network where the MF is active The function can create various profiles with different attributes When the profiles are applied associated to an FDDI station the node is configured according to the defined MIB attributes in this profile Profiles can be defined by copying a default profile or any other availab
86. of an inserting workstation is compared to the 8230 s current ring speed and LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM allows insertion only if they match This capability avoids a beaconing condition and hence any recovery cycle The result is a higher availability level than other implementations e The Remote LIU is treated differently It has two ports providing a control and data path to the remote LAM Figure 48 ICS Lobe Insertion Unit LIU Module Figure 49 3 Port RJ 45 Active Lobe Insertion Unit LIU Module Chapter 2 Hubs 111 Figure 50 4 Port RJ 45 Passive Lobe Insertion Unit LIU Module Figure 51 Remote LAM Lobe Insertion Unit RLIU Module LAMs Lobe attachment modules LAMs are also used for extending lobes to workstations They do not fit inside the 8230 base unit but can be mounted above or below it on a standard 19 inch rack Signals and data flow in and out of the 8230 base unit via 2 custom cables These cables run out of the LAM and are terminated with a 9 pin D shell and a 25 pin D shell and are plugged into the corresponding receptacle of the base unit e Three types of LAMs are available 1 IBM Cabling System LAM f c 5501 2 RJ 45 LAM f c 5502 3 Shielded RJ 45 LAM f c 6738 e Both RJ 45 LAMs takes up two units of rack space while the ICS LAM takes up three units e All of these LAMs have 20 ports 112 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs
87. of course some default settings that you should be aware of e Speed verification before insertion at the LIU ports is not enabled by default e You are not able to use 8228s as splitters on any of the lobe ports You can use 8226s set in splitter mode All ports are enabled by default e RI RO ports are in wrap or unwrap state depending on signals they received 2 7 4 2 Management Through the EIA 232 Port Internal code inside the 8230 can interact with the outside world with its ElA 232 port It is called the RS 232 program and is also referred to as Concentrator Configuration Management Facility CCMF in the 8230 Model 3 Token Ring Network Controlled Access Unit Customer Setup Instructions GA27 4061 A chapter in this setup manual is dedicated to CCMF and explains in detail the functions and usage of every menu item You will find that except for performance statistics almost anything that can be done using an SNMP manager can be done here 2 7 4 3 SNMP Managers Two examples of SNMP managers are discussed here NetView for Windows and NetView for AIX Both of them are platforms on which you run specific applications for different purposes To manage 8230 003 and 013 you need e For NetView for Windows 8230 NetView for Windows Program no charge shipped with 8230 hardware e For NetView for AIX LAN Network Manager LNM for AIX Both applications provide realistic displays of the 8230 base unit LIUs and LAMs with
88. of stations when an invalid frame is received or to test new SMT implementations 2 10 IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator This section first gives a brief overview of fiber distributed data interface FDDI concepts that will help you understand the 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator Because the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator is no longer marketed by IBM it will not be discussed in this document 2 10 1 FDDI Concepts Originally envisioned as a standard for high speed host channels FDDI rapidly became used as a new generation of LANs that uses optical fiber to provide high speed communication networks In many ways FDDI is similar to the IEEE 802 5 token ring although there are some differences FDDI uses a token passing protocol in which each station has the chance to transmit data when a token passes A station can decide how many frames it will transmit using an algorithm which permits bandwidth allocation FDDI also allows a station to transmit many frames without releasing the token An FDDI network consists of a set of devices connected to each other as a serial string by a transmission medium to form a physically closed loop Information is transmitted sequentially as a stream of suitably encoded symbols from one active device to the next active one Each device regenerates and repeats each symbol The method of actual physical attachment to the FDDI network may vary and is dependent on specific application requirements FDDI use
89. operation r Note In order to run full duplex token ring you need to use an adapter that supports full duplex such as the IBM LANStreamer Adapter family The PC running full duplex must be the only device on the segment Receive lobe Transmit lobe Physical layer Po SAA SW nt System Interface Pp y Racalva buffers Transmit buffers Figure 106 Full Duplex Operation of a Token Ring Adapter In full duplex mode a station does not employ token protocols including e Token access and token recovery protocols e Frame repeating frame stripping and end of frame status update A key aspect of full duplex operation is that the token ring frame format is preserved without change The frame control field priority bits destination and source address fields and source routing sub fields are all maintained Thus existing IEEE 802 5 end user applications software and network infrastructure for example bridges are preserved making the full duplex mode of operation transparent to the user A single token ring adapter may support both normal half duplex mode token ring and full duplex operation There are two logical connectivity options that an adapter should satisfy LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 1 Activate in full duplex mode when attached to a compatible full duplex switch port 2 Otherwise activate in token ring mode when attached to a standard token ring access un
90. over today s implementation Frames are sorted in hardware by the adapter so the station only sees frames that are meant for it Functional addresses are token ring only while group addressing is designed in all major LAN topologies and is the multimedia standard It is important to note that token ring adapters without group addressing can coexist on the ring with LANStreamer adapters using the multiple group addressing feature the current adapters won t be able to take advantage of this feature Priority Mechanisms The LANStreamer chip set provides two mechanisms for prioritizing frames passing through the token ring adapter These are priority queueing in the adapter and priority tokens on the ring LANStreamer implements two prioritized transmit queues High priority frames can be placed on the higher priority queue to be processed ahead of lower priority frames The LANStreamer adapter will reserve priority tokens on the ring for these high priority frames The ability to prioritize traffic is valuable for applications which have high bandwidth requirements or need to minimize response time In today s token ring adapters frames are handled on a first come first served basis A high priority frame must wait in line behind lower priority frames before being transmitted Applications such as multimedia will benefit from LANStreamer s priority mechanisms by being able to both guarantee bandwidth on the ring through priority token rese
91. performance Micro Channel architecture bus master adapter that attaches the system to Ethernet networks This adapter is designed to provide connection to a 10 megabit Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detection CSMA CD Ethernet network and is compatible with IEEE 802 3 and Ethernet external interfaces To attach the system to the network the customer must supply the appropriate cable for connection to the standard 50 ohm or RG 58A U coaxial cables When using the RG 58A U coaxial cable an external transceiver is required Characteristics e Micro Channel interface e 32 bit bus master e Compatible with IEEE 802 3 or Ethernet Version 2 interfaces e Transmission speed of 10 Mbps e 16 KB of high speed RAM for data buffering Up to four adapters per Micro Channel may be installed e Standard Micro Channel form factor card e Thick DIX or thin BNC cable support Ethernet 10Base T Transceiver Twisted Pair 4224 The Ethernet 10Base T Transceiver provides the complete attachment unit interface AUI to a twisted pair LAN connection It is connected to a 15 pin DIX Ethernet connection via a transceiver AUI cable and converts the signal to 10Base T The medium connection is made through an RJ 45 receptacle Features include e Selectable link test via external toggle switch e Selectable SQE signal via internal jumper e LEDs LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Transmit Receive Link Collision
92. please refer to 2 11 2 5 Network Allocations on the 8260 Backplane on page 168 Figure 86 provides an overview of the Enhanced TriChannel bus ShuntBus Ethernet Channels Token Ring Links FDDI Links Enhanced TriChannel MLAN sel Common Signals Bus Figure 86 Enhanced TriChannel Bus The pins available for user traffic on the ShuntBus are used to set up two dedicated Ethernet segments as well as 10 token ring or 4 FDDI segments as shown in Figure 87 on page 166 On the ShuntBus eight pins are dedicated to be used by two Ethernet segments These dedicated pins are not available to be used by other segment types The remaining 64 pins on the ShuntBus are available to be used by token ring and or Chapter 2 Hubs 165 FDDI segments This allows you to have a mixture of token ring and FDDI segments as well as two Ethernet segments on the ShuntBus The following is the permitted maximum number of LAN segments on the ShuntBus e Two Ethernet and e Ten token ring or four FDDI Note At the time of writing this publication there are no FDDI modules available that can be assigned to the FDDI segments on the ShuntBus Therefore practically the ShuntBus allows you to have two Ethernet segments plus ten token ring segments 2 Ethernets ShuntBus Token Ring and FDDI Rings Enhanced TriChannel Figure 87 8260 ShuntBus 166 2 11 2 2 Ethernet Segments on
93. ports per module is six two I O cards The Ethernet flexible concentration module is per port switchable to all eight Ethernet backplane segments and supports e Up to eight isolated networks e Security through the Ethernet Security Card E SEC The E SEC provides continuous eavesdropping and intrusion protection without affecting network performance Up to two Ethernet security cards may be connected e Allows you to connect up to two Ethernet medium access control cards E MAC for network management e IEEE Repeater Statistics gathering for basic network monitoring through the 8260 security and network management architecture e Offers high port density at a low cost per port e Maintains its own inventory and power management information in non volatile RAM NVRAM e Automatic portioning 8260 Ethernet Security Daughter Card The 8260 Ethernet Security Card E SEC is a daughter card that allows you to provide security on any Ethernet network to which this card is attached You can install this card on any Ethernet media module or the 8260 DMM with Ethernet Carrier EC DMM Chapter 2 Hubs 187 188 Security features provided by this card are only applicable to the Ethernet ports on the 8260 modules Once assigned to an Ethernet network the E SEC card can be used to provide the following security features for that network e Intrusion protection This feature allows only the authorized users for each port to transmit
94. real time statistics of the 8224 hubs and ports The applications communicate with the 8224 hubs via the Simple Network Management Protocol over an Ethernet network and allow you to point and click on various managed graphical elements for immediate statistic displays Four network management applications are currently available for the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hubs StackWatch for Windows is a stand alone low cost Windows network management application for the 8224 only It is the ideal solution for customers LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM with only 8224 Ethernet hubs in their network or for those customers that desire the most inexpensive 8224 network management application lt runs on Microsoft Windows operating system and can be used on any PC either attached to or in a stack with an 8224 Model 002 SNMP management model StackWatch for NetWare Management System is an application which runs on top of Novell s NetWare Management System NMS StackWatch for NMS should be used by customers with multiple SNMP managed devices bridges routers hubs in their network and when they are using Novell s NetWare Management System V2 0 platform 8224 NetView for Windows Program is the product specific module PSM for the 8224 that runs on IBM s NetView for Windows management platform The 8224 NetView for Windows Application like StackWatch for NMS should be used by customers with multiple SNMP managed devices on their net
95. redirected drive In addition it also supports the use of a response file to drive its installation and configuration The Novell NetWare Requester support provided by LAPS enables Novell Open Data Link Interface ODI protocol stacks to share NDIS compliant network adapters with NDIS compliant protocols A suite of NDIS network adapter drivers is shipped with NTS 2 New NDIS network drivers from both IBM and qualified OEM vendors are made available by downloading from the IBM National Support Center Bulletin Board System which is available to the public Also included is a series of NDIS network adapter drivers that have been certified by an independent IBM certified test organization e NTS 2 supports the appropriately configured hardware platforms supported by OS 2 Version 2 0 In addition to supporting appropriately configured IBM hardware and IBM operating system platforms NTS 2 also supports selected OEM equivalent hardware that has passed the OS 2 2 0 compatibility test The approved platforms are listed in numerous forums and publications such as Prodigy CompuServ and OS 2 forums LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 1 8 5 4 NTS 2 LAN VDD Support for OS 2 The Network Transport System 2 product provides support so that DOS LAN applications can execute in the Virtual DOS Machine of OS 2 and utilize the OS 2 transport for the actual communication Figure 6 on page 32 shows the Multiple Virtual DOS Machines and the Pro
96. status displays e EIA 232 serial port for out of band SNMP initialization and port control and configuration Active RJ 45 LAM The Active RJ 45 UTP LAM that is supported on 8230 002 is not supported on Model 003 or 013 2 7 1 1 Base Unit The following figures show the front view and back view of an 8230 003 013 base unit You can familiarize yourself with the locations of all the LEDs receptacles switches and recesses for labels Slot Numbering Note that slots for inserting LlUs or RI RO modules are numbered from right to left LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM PO PI S LAMs Machine Type Unit Dual Ring Redundancy Addresses 1 3 SerialNumber Number Feature Installed Status LEDs Power Power OK Error 4 16 CMOL SNMP Switch 10 LED Code Mbps Switch LED Display Switch Slot5 Slot4 Slot3 Slot 2 Slot1 Pluggable Pluggable LIU Slots RI ACorLIU Slot Figure 41 Front View of an 8230 003 013 Power Voltage Cord Switch Receptacle Dr O Op DE Y 9 PinD shell 25 Pin D shell ElA 232 Receptacles Receptacles Receptacle Figure 42 Rear View of an 8230 003 013 LED Status When the Model 3 is powered on all LEDs should light while the words Lamp then Test appear on the error code display matrix display LEDs They then turn on and off and blink while the error code
97. the 8224 to make the new settings take effect Even if 8224s have been segmented from the Ethernet bus the inter hub control bus allows you to set IP information and segment 8224s from a stack 2 4 1 4 Why Segment 8224s from a Stack Three major uses of segmentation are to improve performance to troubleshoot and to isolate groups of users This section details those uses 1 Improving Performance An unsegmented stack is a single collision domain All devices attached anywhere to an unsegmented stack see all the Ethernet frames generated anywhere else in the stack As network traffic increases excessive collisions can cause network performance to slow You can improve performance by segmenting any number of 8224s from the other 8224s in a managed stack Each segmented 8224 is in its own collision domain as long as it is not linked to any other 8224s Chapter 2 Hubs 79 To enable segmented 8224s to communicate with the rest of the stack you can interconnect them using a bridge router or Ethernet switch 2 Troubleshooting Segmentation can help you isolate areas of your network that are experiencing problems You can segment 8224s one at a time from the rest of the stack while monitoring stack performance This technique can help you localize a problem area to the devices attached to one 8224 3 Isolating User Groups You may have users in your network who have no need for connectivity outside their department or workgroup
98. the LAN addresses of current LANs Ethernet or token ring were used namely e When connected through PVC the end systems exchange their IP addresses This is the InNATMARP mechanism similar to the InARP introduced for IP operation over frame relay e When they want to be connected by SVC the end systems need to perform the following steps 1 Setup a PVC or an SVC with an ARP server which is a particular end system attached to the ATM network in charge of resolving the IP addresses into ATM addresses 2 Register their IP address to the ARP server This way the server will have the IP address ATM address mapping of all end systems of the network Copyright IBM Corp 1996 247 3 When it desires to transmit IP packets to an IP address which is not in its ARP cache an end system sends an ARP request to the ARP server The server replies with an ARP reply including the ATM address of the target end system The format of the ARP exchanges are very close to the format used on current LANs The difference is that the physical address is now an ATM address instead of a MAC address 4 The requesting end system then sets up an SVC with the target end system using the UNI signalling Both INATMARP and ARP are described in Internet RFC 1577 End systems using Classical IP can interoperate with end systems attached to current LANs only through an IP router combining the two types of attachment ATM and current LAN 5 1 2 LAN E
99. the end user workstations using either product can access a wired LAN and whatever resources the LAN supports To the network administrator network designer or systems integrator the radio technology employed in each product is very similar However the design concept is somewhat different for each product which gives rise to differences in functionality Wireless implementers should be aware of these differences when considering a wireless solution Table 24 gives a comparison of IBM Wireless LAN Entry and IBM Wireless LAN by feature and function Table 24 Page 1 of 2 Comparison of Wireless LAN Products by Feature and Function IBM Wireless LAN Entry IBM Wireless LAN 236 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 24 Page 2 of 2 Comparison of Wireless LAN Products by Feature and Function Feature Function Frequency Hopping Data Link Layer Station to Station Peer to Peer Station to Station Indirect Bridge Device Bridge Type NetBIOS Filtering from Wired LAN Network Routing Roaming Support SNMP Agent Throughput Registration Authentication and Authorization Data Compression Data Encryption Signal Strength Monitor Remote Program Load Note e Within own cell only IBM Wireless LAN Entry Yes CSMA CA Yes Via 8227 Access Point 8227 Access Point Transparent Bridge Yes Not applicable Yes Yes 350 Kbps By 8227 Access Point or Cell Leader By 8227 Access Poi
100. the operation of all the installed modules Chapter 2 Hubs 171 172 Monitoring the hub temperature and taking appropriate action in overheated conditions When the hub temperature rises in a particular area the overheated condition is signaled to the controller module Then the controller module may power down 8260 modules within that area according to the power classes assigned to the modules This will be done to bring down the temperature of the hub to an acceptable limit Inventory and intelligent power management Each 8260 module has a serial EEPROM which is used for power management and inventory purposes The EEPROM is programmed at manufacturing and includes information about how much power the module requires its serial number model number the vendor ID and its hardware revision level Upon insertion into the hub the 8260 modules will send vital product data VPD and their power requirements over the control bus SCI to the controller module The controller module also has knowledge of how many power supplies are installed in the hub and how much of the power is used by the currently installed modules therefore it is able to determine if there is enough power left in the hub to power up the new module If the answer is yes the controller module will apply full power to the module allowing it to operate normally The controller module will also update its internal power tables to take into account the power consumptio
101. to obstructed but still a strong direct path and to cellular Rayleigh Direct path is blocked and transmitter and receiver are immersed in highly scattering surroundings In office buildings where the environment is divided into separate rooms the fading occurs in bursts lasting tens of seconds with a dynamic range of about 30 dB For an open space office fading has been observed to be rather continuous with a dynamic range of 7 to 10 dB 240 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM As the distance between two possible fades is about 1 2 if a mobile station moves at 3 6 km h then the number of possible fades per second will be about 1 3 24x2 16 Fortunately fading with significant amplitude does not occur that often When it does occur it is predicted by statistical distributions which vary with the environment 4 2 2 2 Frequency Selective Fading This corresponds to a channel response at time t resulting from an impulse applied T seconds in the past This can be modeled by the Doppler spread and scattering functions e Simple Doppler effect absence of scatterers Variation in frequency of the received frequency due to the movement of the mobile relative to the fixed transmitter Random frequency shift modulation Doppler induced random FM is correlated with vehicle speed fy fm cos where f V A is the maximum Doppler frequency 8 Hz at 3 6km h for 2 4GHz Affects all multiple modulation paths so
102. to the Ethernet segments on the backplane is provided to DMM via E MAC whereas T MAC allows DMM to interface with the token ring segments on the ShuntBus Note that DMM requires one MAC daughter card for each network on the backplane through which DMM is going to communicate with the other devices DMM will use the interface to the backplane segments to communicate with the devices attached to these segments using IP For example to be able to manage the 8260 via an SNMP manager DMM must have an interface to a network thru which the SNMP manager can be accessed e Network monitoring Daughter cards attach to the appropriate backplane segment token ring or Ethernet and listen to the traffic flow and pass all the information back to DMM Note Ethernet MAC daughter cards can be installed on EC DMM or Ethernet media modules whereas token ring MAC daughter cards must always be installed on token ring media modules The combination of DMM and daughter cards provide a cost efficient management architecture that consolidates media management into a single card while distributing network monitoring across a series of protocol dependent daughter cards The DMM is a generic protocol independent module that can be used for both in band and out of band management As mentioned above when used for in band management DMM requires a daughter card The Chapter 2 Hubs 177 flexibility and reduction in cost is achieved by distributing the networ
103. tune and trouble shoot any of the segments attached to the 8271 Model 108 The EtherProbe port is a separate additional to the eight used for shared or dedicated Ethernet segments AUI port on the front of the 8271 Model 108 that can be Chapter 3 Switches 211 configured to monitor or mirror the activity on any one at a time of the eight shared or dedicated segments This configuration can be changed dynamically via the console or SNMP facilities of the 8271 Model 108 To monitor a full duplex Ethernet port the EtherProbe port can be configured to monitor either the transmit or the receive half of the full duplex Ethernet connection Using the EtherProbe port traffic on any of the eight ports on the 8271 Model 108 can be analyzed using a single monitoring device eliminating the need for an analyzer on every 8271 segment thereby reducing hardware and overall operating costs The EtherProbe port on the 8271 Model 108 was designed to be used with a variety of available protocol analyzers such as the IBM DatagLANce Network Analyzer The 8271 EtherStreamer Switch Model 108 includes several other enhancements to the IBM 8271 Model 001 Significant restructuring of the console interface to improve organization and navigation as well as to provide additional functions Ability to collect management statistics on a station basis in addition to the port and switch basis available with the Model 001 Ability to specify uniqu
104. you a cost effective ATM solution for LAN and channel connectivity IBM provides the 3172 with an ATM gateway to S 3X0 Host via ESCON or parallel channels The LAN emulation which gives your applications transparent access to an ATM network is handled by the TURBOWAYS 100 Adapter for 3172 003 and its supporting LAN emulation software at 100 Mbps This TURBOWAYS 155 Adapter is announced to be available in 1996 5 8 3 IBM 8271 and IBM 8272 155 Mbps ATM Up links 264 The IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch Model 108 and the IBM 8272 LANStreamer Switch Model 108 are stand alone LAN switches which provide a high performance method for interconnecting LAN segments LAN switches are becoming important components of networks because they offer you a way to address performance concerns IBM will make field installable 155 Mbps ATM up links for these streamer switches available They will connect your token ring or Ethernet LAN switches to an 155 Mbps ATM concentration module using multimode fiber cabling and SC connectors at distances up to two kilometers The 155 Mbps SONET interface is fully ATM Forum compliant For both the Ethernet and token ring switches IBM will support ATM Forum compliant LAN emulation The shipment of these ATM up links to early support customers is planned for mid 1996 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 5 8 4 S 390 OSA 5 8 5 3746 IBM intends to enhance the network connectivity capabilities of the
105. 00 F6A0 off DC000 Table 45 Interrupt Levels Switches 4 5 Switch Interrupt Level Table 46 Wait State Switch 6 Switch 6 Normal or Fast Machine Table 47 Adapter Mode Switch 7 Switch Normal or Reserved Operation 7 Normal on Reserved don t use this setting off Table 48 Remote Program Load Switch 8 Switch 8 RPL Enable or Disable Disable 282 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 49 DMA Channel Switches 9 10 Switch DMA Channel not used Table 50 Ring Speed Switch 11 Switch 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps 11 4 Mbps on off Table 51 Cable Type Switch 12 Switch STP or UTP 12 STP D shell 9 pin connector on UTP RJ 45 connector off Appendix C ISA Adapter Switch Settings 283 C 5 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter Feature Code 7462 Switch settings for the 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter C 5 1 Switch Block Number One Table 52 Switch Block 1 Cable Type Switch 1 Switch 4 STP or UTP 1 STP D shell 9 pin connector on UTP RJ 45 connector off Table 53 Switch Block 1 Remote Program Load Switch 2 Switch 4 RPL Enable or Disable 2 Enable on Disable C 5 2 Switch Block Number Two off Table 54 Switch Block 2 ROM Addresses Switches 1 6 Switch ROM Addres
106. 004 257 5 4 4 Module Management 2 00000 pe pees 257 5 4 5 ATM Network Management aoaaa aaa a 258 5 5 Requirements reag tysdag ampe a Ge en agin a a e aG 259 Contents V 5 5 1 Hardware Requirements 0 2 2 259 5 5 2 Electronic Customer Support 0 o 259 5 5 3 Software Requirements o 260 5 5 4 8260 MIB Installation 0 o 260 5 6 IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge 2 00 260 5 6 1 Hardware Requirements 2 o 262 5 6 2 Software Requirements e 262 5 7 IBM TURBOWAYS 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator 263 5 8 ATM Adapters escitas rad oe OEE oP ta RSE SS 264 5 8 1 Workstations and Tabletop aoaaa aaa 264 5 8 2 3172 003 ATM Adapter o 264 5 8 3 IBM 8271 and IBM 8272 155 Mbps ATM Up links 264 5 84 SBI OSA 2 sheds faiths paraa e Peta ve le eas 265 BiB Oc TAGs re ike oi ole sac im o wave Ge ovis Buse ede Be ahs Sh Gite rss te 265 Appendix A Adapter Tables 0 20 o 267 AtA Adapter Name ss sm a a AS a 267 Ade2 Feature Code gt sota ra e e Mote oe ge dene tte laa 267 A 1 3 Part Number 0 0000000005002 25 2s 267 A 1 4 Field Replaceable Unit Number 0 267 A 1 5 Adapter Speed 2 00 00 ee 267 As126 Shared ROMVSIZ 60m er ee AoE a he ee ee ww RM ed A i 268 Avie Shared RAMSI Ze 2 a 23 84 4 6 a oe De ee ne Band a lid 268 A 1 8 RIPL R
107. 1 6bLb4bZ ObLb4bz Lvoy vV dLNSsna a qepeo SN NYH HL9N31 AdAL O d sdam INWYN Ssb Py NNV yaav Ya334n9 3009u nuda LUVd Od auvo VO sng 1d1u As aaads y3Ldvav ssajdepy ywWa saisew sng Arewwng sajdepy Bbuly uayo Zg elqel LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 272 Appendix B Microcode Level Tables Table 28 on page 274 and Table 29 on page 275 are lists of known microcode levels for 4 Mbps only and 16 4 adapters respectively These tables may be useful when trying to identify the ring speed capability of an adapter by querying an adapter from LAN Network Manager and looking at the microcode level This is useful for customers who are running a 4 Mbps ring and want to upgrade to 16 Mbps but do not know how many adapters are 4 Mbps only and how many are 16 4s Having that knowledge would let the customer know how many additional 16 4 cards he would need to buy Be cautious because the microcode level will not always tell you whether the card is an AT bus card or a Micro Channel card since both types of cards sometimes use the very same microcode levels The moral here is to use this table as a rough guide for your card purchasing estimates The following are the field descriptions for each table B 1 1 Adapter Name Same as adapter name in Appendix A Adapter Tables on page 267 B 1 2 Field Replaceable Unit Number Same as field replaceable unit number in Appendix A Adapter
108. 16 2 2002000004 196 iv LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 12 2 8224 Models 001 and 002 0 0 0 o co o 197 2 12 3 8226 Model 001 0 020000 a 198 2 12 4 8228 Model 00d 2 ee 198 2 12 5 8230 Models 001 002 003 and 013 0 199 2 12 6 8244 Models 006 and 012 0 e 201 2 12 7 8282 Model 001 00 2002 ee 202 Chapter 3 Switches lt e cosp oen aa ES p ea a a D a G E E E oes 205 3 1 IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch aa o 205 3 1 1 Full Duplex Ethernet 0 e 206 3 122 Gompatibility 1 a sedd e ae en Ae RR OR a hes 207 3 1 3 IBM EtherStreamer Switch Release 1 1 Microcode 207 3 2 IBM 8272 LANStreamer Switch 02 002 00 212 3 2 1 Gompaltibilit lt a 6 24 fe ela eS GRO a eae PE GS 218 3 2 2 Full Duplex Token Ring Operation 219 3 3 IBM Ethernet Quad PeerMaster Server Adapters 222 3 4 The IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch 223 3 4 1 General Node Description and Models 223 Chapter 4 Wireless 0 0 o 231 4 1 IBM Wireless Products 0 000 0 eee ee 231 4 1 1 IBM Wireless Products 2 000 00004 231 4 1 2 PC Wireless LAN Product Overview 233 4 1 3 IBM Wireless LAN Entry 2 0 0 0000 4 233 4 1 4 IBM Wireless LAN 0 0 2 000000 p
109. 17 and 8260 A10 respectively This allows you to set up an ATM network The 8260 chassis is made up of five main areas e The backplane e The payload area e The Controller module slots e The intelligent power subsystem e The intelligent cooling subsystem Figure 85 on page 162 provides a view of an 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub with both 8250 and 8260 modules installed with a second power supply Table 20 shows a comparison between Model 017 and Model 010 Table 20 Comparison between 8260 Model 017 and Model 010 Adapter kit Component Model 017 Model 010 Power Supplies basic 1 Power Supplies additional Fan Units wp wo rm Controller Module Slots By sharing same chassis elements networks can be built using a mixture of Model 017s and Model 010s without an overhead for managing accessories and spare parts 2 11 2 8260 Backplane The 8260 has two standard backplane buses which are used to provide you with the ability to configure token ring Ethernet and or FDDI network segments These two buses are standard features of all the 8260 models and are installed on every 8260 shipped to the customers 2 11 2 1 LAN Segments on the Backplane On each backplane bus both Enhanced TriChannel and ShuntBus there are 96 pins which are used for passing the network traffic between the media modules installed in the hub as well as the control signals between the media modules fault tolerant con
110. 2 3 3 Cabling Examples and Specifications 71 2 34 Management smart eae ke Poe Boe 74 2 307 POSITIONING 2 2 hee eek ech d Pe EU A oe ee eS 75 2 4 IBM 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub 004 4 76 2 4 1 Technical Description 0 020200000 76 2 4 2 Configuration 0 0 00 2 80 2 4 3 Cabling Examples and Specifications 80 2 44 Management 2 35 eck Hae a ew E ee Bees 92 2 4 Positioning lt 2 040 4 be eee ee LOE ee ee eee A 97 2 5 IBM 8226 Token Ring RJ 45 Connection 2 99 2 5 1 Technical Description 2 02 0202 2 ee 99 2 5 2 Cabling Requirements o 100 2 9 3 9226 POSITIONINY sess 4 G4 ee he oP REE OY ee oe Se 100 2 6 IBM 8228 Multistation Access Unit MAU 101 2 6 1 Technical Description 2 0 0 0 0000 101 2 6 2 POSIMONING ems slo ke et oe a Be eee ot a Bek ae 102 2 63 FUNCHONSS guns A aie hn Ye ee ee Bend eee g 102 2 7 IBM 8230 Token Ring Controlled Access Unit 102 2 7 1 Technical Description 2 2 05205 50 2 eee 103 2 62 Gontiguration sob es ee Re e ee Ee ee eS 121 2 7 3 Cabling Requirements and Limitations 124 204 Management ta sd h sss gents ke Ye ee eee ao Bede eee 127 2 7 POSIMONING usa ats waned a A ger lS Geen Oe ae 129 2 8 IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub 131 2 8 1 Technical Description
111. 209 Figure 9 Memory MAP for DOS PS 2 Environments Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 41 DOS UPPER MEMORY MB FFFFF BIOS BASIC 960 K F0000 SYSTEM BOARD ROM 896 K ADAPTER memory E99 AREA ee VIDEO MEMORY Eee hs DISPLAY ADAPTER re Figure 10 Upper Memory MAP Definition 1 8 11 LAN Support Program LSP Memory Consumption 42 The following charts are to illustrate the memory used in a DOS environment by LSP Figure 11 on page 43 shows the conventional memory usage for an IBM shared RAM token ring adapter and a shallow adapter with NDIS MAC driver support Note that the 40 KB total for the shared RAM adapter does not include the 16 KB RAM and 8 KB ROM that are used in upper memory by these adapters The point is that since the shallow adapters are used in an NDIS environment and the IEEE 802 2 support is executed in the host memory along with the NDIS MAC driver the DOS memory utilization is much higher Figure 12 on page 44 is very similar but it shows the estimated memory used with the NetBIOS only option of DXMJOMOD SYS Figure 13 on page 45 estimates LSP DOS memory usage if the modules are loaded in upper memory via a memory manager This once again assumes there is available space for the modules to be loaded high The following are examples of memory managers e DOS 5 0 EMM386 e QEMM from Quarterdeck e 386MAX from Qualitas LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM LSP DOS MEMORY CONSUMPTION
112. 224s together via 10Base2 10Base5 or fiber wiring Figure 27 is an example of cascading two 8224 hubs via fiber expansion ports 8224 002 8224 002 Managed Stackable Hub Managed Stackable Hub 10Ba FL Fiber Cascade Link km Max yy yy LD Dh USES SSS ELLIE Figure 27 Cascading 8224 Hubs via Fiber Media Expansion Ports 84 3 Cascading through a 10Base T port of the 8224 to connect to another 8224 A crossover cable is required to cascade through the 10Base T ports unless you use the 16th 10Base T port of the hub for which a regular twisted pair cable is required An uplink switch is provided for the 16th port which can be set in the crossover state when cascading Only four 8224s can be cascaded together using this method because each 8224 will count as a repeater hop The IEEE 802 3 specification limits the maximum number of repeater hops between stations to four 2 4 3 5 Segmentation and the 8224 As traffic on the network grows the 8224 can divide the network into several segments collision domains to alleviate congestion in the network Stacked 8224s can be segmented while maintaining management capability through a single management unit Model 002 Servers or workstations that generate a lot of traffic on the network can be placed in their own segment to split the 10 Mbps Ethernet bandwidth between fewer stations In addition the remaining stations on the network will enjoy better performa
113. 272 It will automatically configure requiring no operator action each port to operate at the highest level of capability possible No special crossover cables are required for token ring stations on dedicated media segments or for switch to switch connections These connections can use the same cabling as can be used to connect the IBM 8272 port to shared media segments This auto sense auto configure capability of the 8272 can be overridden by explicit configuration The auto sense auto configure capability minimizes the network administrative burden associated with both initial installation and ongoing network changes and helps assure that customers can easily get optimal use of their network without always having to manage the large number of configuration variables 16 Mbps Switch to Switch full duplex 32 Mbps HEE 16 Mbps Server bra fis Figure 104 8272 Auto Configuration Example Full Duplex Token Ring As users segment their LAN populations to relieve network congestion they often extend this segmentation to a point where they have placed a single station on a dedicated LAN segment such as a high traffic file server This may produce congestion of another sort congestion at the network access point or adapter within the server To increase the network bandwidth available to the server dedicated LAN segments connected to any or all of the IBM 8272 s eight ports can be configured to operate
114. 3 0 and Novell NetWare 4 0 ODI The Software Fault Tolerance SFT Ill device driver provides a unique MC solution for high availability IPX networks This support is in addition to the current device drivers for NDIS on DOS and OS 2 ODI on DOS OS 2 and NetWare and UNIX SCO Each of the adapters supports Remote IPL in NetWare environments IBM and non IBM workstations with Micro Channel ISA and EISA bus architectures are supported e PS 2 models and industrial computers with Micro Channel architecture are supported Original equipment manufacturer OEM workstations implementing the Micro Channel architecture are also supported The IBM FDDI MC adapters comply with the September 1991 level of the Micro Channel architecture document e IBM AT bus PS 2 models and Industrial Computers and competitive workstations implementing the ISA bus are supported The IBM FDDI ISA Adapters comply with the July 1991 level of the Personal System 2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference AT Bus Systems Model 35 and Model 40 The IBM FDDI ISA adapters also comply with the IEEE Personal Computer Bus Standard P996 for ISA 16 bit bus systems e Competitive workstations implementing the EISA bus are also supported The IBM FDDI EISA adapters comply with Version 3 12 of the EISA specification The FDDI SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol proxy agent an OS 2 application used to convert SMT to SNMP protocols for use by AIX NetView 6000 or any OEM SNMP based n
115. 3 11 Note IBM LAN Client will only operate with one adapter You cannot use remote program load RPL to download IBM LAN Client from either a Novell NetWare server or an IBM LAN server and Novell Requester Workstation Support In today s LAN environment many customer configurations involve both IBM and Novell software for client requester and emulation support Only one driver either native NDIS or ODI can control the adapter The chart shown in Figure 8 on page 40 describes four different situations that can all provide emulation support IBM LAN Server Requester support and Novell NetWare requester support The four configurations are as follows e Native Driver Support This is a configuration with an IBM token ring shared RAM adapter that is using the adapter handler driver DXMCOMOD SYS from the LAN support program The interface presented by this module is the CCB interface The emulators both 3270 and 5250 both use this interface along with NetBIOS non NDIS Novell provide a module called LANSUP that will allow IPX to use the CCB interface to access the IBM token ring adapter e NDIS Driver with LANSUP In the NDIS environment the 802 2 NDIS protocol DXMEOMOD SYS for LSP provides the CCB interface that LANSUP will utilize for Novell requester support Novell also provides an OS 2 version of LANSUP e IBM s NDIS Support of ODI Protocols IBM has developed a module to support Novell ODI protocols in an environment whe
116. 5mm 23in Weight 400kg 880lbs Weight 370kg 814lbs 4307 067 Figure 109 2220 Nways Switch Rack Configuration Some of the hardware components are shown in the following figure and briefly described in the text following the figure SWITCH BUS NWAYS SWITCH ADMINISTRATION STATION SERVICE BUS SYSTEM CLOCKS 4307 0393 Figure 110 2220 Nways Switch Hardware Components 224 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Power units power and alarm control and fans Redundant power units including their own battery backup Node Administration Station Management point for the node Communicates with remote management station s remote console s RETAIN Remote Support Facility and the IBM Remote Support Center The following components are housed in the primary shelf and if a model 501 in the expansion shelf The shelves are divided into front and back sections Some cards plug into the front section and some the back for example adapter cards plug into the front and their associated Line Interface Coupler LIC s plug into the back Switch The 2220 Nways Switch switch fabric switches 53 byte cells between all other components Adapter cards These are logic cards containing port trunk and control point functions choice of function is determined by software Trunk and port adapters always have an associated Line Interface Coupler LIC on which the physical lines are connected Chap
117. 6 virtual switch support 208 stand alone mode 152 8271 status LEDs 206 standard mode 150 8271 switch 205 technical description 146 8272 TELNET 148 adaptive cut through 213 using LNM for AIX to manage 8244 160 auto sense auto configure 216 using NetView for AIX to manage 160 compatibility 218 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator 145 full duplex token ring 217 8250 introduction 212 adapter kit 171 source route switching 216 compared with other IBM hubs 64 switch 212 positioning with 8222 75 TokenPipe 213 positioning with 8244 161 universal feature slot 215 8250 adapter kit 163 virtual switch support 214 8260 161 250 8281 260 8250 Adapter Kit 171 compared with other IBM hubs 64 8260 fault tolerant controller module 171 hardware requirements 262 adapter kit 162 limitations 262 ATM 155 Mbps Concentration Module 254 software requirements 262 ATM network management 258 8282 202 263 backplane architecture 164 cable tray 162 302 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM A ABR available bit rate 249 activation procedure 221 active module 189 adapter card 225 adaptive cut through 211 213 address filters 207 AIX NetView 6000 229 alarm 143 alternate path 141 amplitude 240 analyzer 212 antenna 238 244 antenna positioning 244 ARP 248 ARTour 231 AS 400 LAN Adapters 2617 55 2618 57 2619 54 2625 56 2626 54 2636 55 2665 58 AS 400 Wireless LAN 231 Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM 161 ATM 161 210 215 247 263 bridge 261
118. 6000 5765 196 Runs the 2220 Nways Switch change control server One per 2220 Nways Switch network is required Version 1 0 NetView 6000 and NetViewDM 6000 can run on the same RISC System 6000 If they are running on separate RISC System 6000s the following program must be installed on the network management station NetView Distribution Manager Agent 6000 NetView Distribution Manager Agent 6000 Runs on the network management station and communicates with the 2220 Nways Switch change control server Version 1 0 For additional information on the IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch see IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch Concepts and Products GG24 4307 Chapter 3 Switches 229 230 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Chapter 4 Wireless This chapter presents an overview of the IBM wireless products in use today which have been developed specifically for or modified to allow communication between mobile or at least portable data handling devices other than radio transceivers A data handling device could be any size computer but in the mobile environment it generally refers to a personal computer of the laptop or notebook size Another topic is about wireless LAN performance including subjects about path loss causes of interferences on propagation and trouble shooting list For greater detail on any of the topics presented here please refer to An Introduction to Wireless Technology SG24 4465 4 1 4 1 1
119. 7 Page 2 of 2 Shared RAM Size Switch 10 Switch 10 16 KB off Shared RAM Size Table 38 Factory Settings Switches 11 12 Switch Factory Settings Setting don t change Appendix C ISA Adapter Switch Settings 279 C 3 16 4 Adapter Feature Code 7367 Table 39 ROM Addresses Switches 1 6 Switch ROM Address on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off Table 40 Interrupt Levels Switches 7 8 Switch Interrupt Level Table 41 Primary or Alternate Switch 9 Switch 9 Primary or Alternate Alternate on Table 42 Page 1 of 2 Shared RAM Size Switches 10 11 Switch 10 11 Shared RAM Size 8 KB on on 280 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 42 Page 2 of 2 Shared RAM Size Switches 10 11 Switch Shared RAM Size 11 16 KB Table 43 Adapter Data Rate Switch 12 Switch 16 Mbps or 4 Mbps 12 16 Mbps off 4 Mbps on Appendix C ISA Adapter Switch Settings 281 C 4 16 4 Adapter ll Feature Codes 5120 and 0255 Table 44 I O Base or RPL ROM Address Switches 1 3 Switch 1 O Base Address RPL ROM Address 1 2 3 96A0 on C4000 A6A0 on C8000 B6A0 on CC000 C6AO on on off D0000 D6A0 off D4000 E6A0 off D80
120. 802 3 not both encapsulation on LAN interface e Datagram fragmentation reassembly support e IP security e Boothelper e Static routes Dynamic routes RIP OSPF RIP Implementation The following is a summary of the RIP implementation in the Multiprotocol Interconnect Module Routing messages are broadcast every 30 seconds e Triggered updates are sent e Split horizon with poison reverse is always used e Host level routing is supported with future WAN I O cards LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM RIP can be enabled disabled on a per logical port basis RIP can be enabled disabled globally e Path cost can be configured on each logical port e Routing table entries are aged out to ensure validity of routes e Can pass or block datagrams according to user defined security access list OSPF Implementation The following is a summary of the OSPF implementation in the Multiprotocol Interconnect Module e Only topology changes are broadcast as per OSPF Specification Version 2 RFC 1247 e Supports alternate routes based on IP Type Of Service TOS e Supports multiple paths with equal costs e Supports authentication between routers e Importation of RIP routes and static routes to an OSPF domain may be enabled or disabled e Filters may be configured to import or discard specific RIP and static routes to OSPF e Supports hop count to OSPF metric conversion when importing RIP and static routes
121. 8230 lobe port on LIU or LAM to the workstation This is sometimes referred to as drop length For an all 8230 ring which means NO 8228s or other passive MAUs in any RI RO path see Table 14 Table 14 Lobe Length LIU LAM Type Commonly Used Cables and Lobe Length ICS LAMs ICS LIUs 150 ohm Type 1 STP 145 meters Active RJ 45 LIUs 100 120 ohm category 5 180 meters Passive RJ 45 LIUs 100 120 ohm category 5 100 meters Shielded Unshielded RJ 45 LAMs Shielded RJ 45 LAMs 150 ohm Type 1 STP 145 meters For other combinations of cables and modules please refer to the above references 2 7 3 2 8230 RI RO Drive Distance This is the distance between two 8230s any models connected together via the RI RO ports If there is no mixed media type on lobes e Using 150 ohm Type 1 STP 200 meters e Using 100 120 ohm balanced category 5 100 meters e Using 62 5um multimode optical fiber 2 km If there is mixed media type on lobes e Using 150 ohm Type 1 STP 140 meters e Using 100 120 ohm balanced category 5 100 meters e Using 62 5um multimode optical fiber 2 km 2 7 3 3 RI RO between 8230 and IBM 8250 60 Token Ring Modules Some of the 8250 60 token ring modules may have better drive distances when used by themselves You need to follow the most restrictive rules when connecting to 8230s Therefore e 8250 Fiber Repeater 8260 Dual Fiber Repeater 2 km using multimode optical fiber e 8260 18 Port Active PPS PMS Module
122. 8FFF These codes are displayed during the IBM 8240 hardware initialization process The step by step progress from the power on state to the operational state can be followed The codes are grouped as follows Range Description 8000 to 80FF RA Module POST Error 8100 to 81FF DA Module 1 POST Error 8200 to 82FF DA Module 2 POST Error 8300 to 83FF DA Module 3 POST Error 8400 to 84FF DA Module 4 POST Error 8500 to 85FF DA Module 5 POST Error 8600 to 86FF DA Module 6 POST Error 8700 to 87FF Not used 8800 to 8DFF CC Module POST Error 8E00 to 8FFF Status during Initialization If the POST process ends with one of the above error codes the relevant module has to be replaced Chapter 2 Hubs 141 Remote Program Update RPU Codes 9000 to 9FFF The codes are displayed during the progress of a remote program load process The 8240 should not be powered off while the process is active Error Codes B000 to FFFF Codes within this range report any kind of IBM 8240 hardware problems The error codes are grouped to identify the failing hardware easier Range B000 to CFFF D000 to DOFF D100 to D1FF D200 to D2FF D300 to D3FF D400 to D4FF D500 to D5FF D600 to D6FF D700 to D7FF D800 to DBFF DC0O to DCFF DDOO to DDFE DFFF Description Ring errors RA Module suspected errors The amber LED on the RA is also lit The problem can be caused by An incorrectly installed RA Module A defective RA Module
123. A 1 8 8 4 Supported Software IBM LAN Client provides support for the following protocols and client applications e For DOS 5 0 or higher EEE 802 2 NetBIOS DOS LAN Services 4 x with IBM LAN Server 4 0 DOS LAN Services 4 x Peer to Peer DOS LAN Requester 3 x with IBM LAN Server 3 0 and higher NetWare Client 32 IPX SPX with Novell NetWare 2 15c and higher PC3270 Version 4 x Artisoft LANtastic Version 6 0 Attachmate 3270 Emulation Client Access 400 e For Windows 3 1 Windows 3 11 and Windows for Workgroups 3 11 IEEE 802 2 NetBIOS DOS LAN Services 4 x with IBM LAN Server 4 0 Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 37 1 8 9 Mixed IBM DOS LAN Services 4 x Peer to Peer DOS LAN Requester 3 x with IBM LAN Server 3 0 and higher NetWare Client 32 IPX SPX with Novell NetWare 4 0 TCP IP using Winsock 1 1 PC3270 Windows Version 4 x AS 400 for Windows Version 4 0 DCAF Version 1 3 CSDs Artisoft LANtastic Version 6 0 APPC Windows Note You cannot run DOS LAN services and NetWare Client 32 at the same time in a Windows environment IBM LAN Station Manager cannot be run in the same workstation as IBM LAN Client 1 8 8 5 Supported Operating Systems IBM LAN Client supports the following desktop operating systems e MS DOS 5 x and 6 x e PC DOS 5 x 6 x and 7 0 e Windows 3 1 and 3 11 in enhanced mode Windows for Workgroups
124. AN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Module Status LCD Display Display Control Module Reset ElA 232 E Local Console o o f ElA 232 423 Remote Console o Figure 93 EC DMM Front Panel The LCD display normally shows the module operating state Each time the display control button is pressed the character display cycles through each of the networks By using the network display LEDs on the EC DMM and the 8260 media modules it is possible to see which modules and which ports are assigned to a network Console and Auxiliary Ports The ports equals those of the DMM card 2 11 7 3 MAC Daughter Cards To be able to monitor the network traffic activity on the backplane segments as well as to be able to communicate with other stations using IP DMM requires the services provided by MAC daughter cards These daughter cards connect to the networks listen to the traffic flow and pass traffic information back to the DMM They also provide the DMM with the Chapter 2 Hubs 181 interface to the networks on the backplane so that it can communicate with the other stations on that network The MAC daughter cards are protocol specific cards and at the time of writing this book the following two types of MAC daughter cards were available e The E MAC Ethernet Media Access Card e The T MAC Token ring Media Access Card These daughter cards can be install
125. AN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Presentation Manager applications Both the keyboard and the mouse are supported 2 9 5 1 Installation To install the Maintenance Facility Program the following minimum hardware and software is required e PS 2 Model 70 with 8 MB memory 3 5 inch diskette drive Video Graphics Array VGA monitor IBM Enhanced Keyboard IBM FDDI Adapter Approximately 1 MB hard disk space e Operating System 2 OS 2 Version 1 3 or higher e OS 2 Extended Services Version 1 0 or higher e OS 2 LAN Services IBM FDDI Adapter Network Device Interface Specification NDIS device driver 2 9 5 2 Functions The functions provided by the Maintenance Facility are either applied to the entire FDDI ring or only to a selected IBM 8240 The following functions related to the IBM 8240 concentrator and other FDDI stations are available Link Quality The link quality function will display the link rate of any port for an IBM 8240 concentrator The related MIB attributes for the link quality which are the average link error rate LER the LER alarm threshold and the cutoff condition threshold are also displayed and the latter two can be changed if necessary Different colors are used for easier recognition of critical conditions green yellow red The average link error rate indicates the current estimated error rate In normal operation the average LER is in the range of 10 15 to 10 10 errors per second e
126. Administrator Program 236 NDIS 143 NDIS interface 23 environments 25 NetView Distribution Manager 6000 229 NetView 6000 229 NetViewDM 6000 229 Network Administrator Program NAP 236 network device interface specification 143 network management 234 network of Ethernet connected cells 234 NIF 144 Node Administration Station 224 225 Node Administration Station NAS 225 non redundant mode 227 not copied threshold 144 NTS 2 features 29 Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub 131 Nways Switch Manager 229 O One slot Multiprotocol Interconnect Module functions 191 optical bypass 137 147 optical fiber 136 140 ordering IBM 8240 139 OS 2 operating 136 OS 2 transport 27 OSI reference model 1 2 OSPF implementation 195 Out of band management 163 Overview of Management and Control Commands 183 P P NNI 253 PagerPAC 400 231 parameter management frame 144 passive module 189 path cost 195 PCI Bus 5 PCI Ethernet Adapter 15 PCMCIA 6 PCMCIA II RF Adapter 22 23 per port switching 171 permanent virtual circuit PVC 252 phantom current 122 phase locked loop PLL 132 PLL phase locked loop 132 PMF 144 point to point 234 Positioning 102 8222 75 8224 97 8226 100 8230 and token ring hubs 130 8244 161 POST 140 141 power class 175 power management 179 power on self test 140 141 PPP adapters supported 60 61 PPP TCP IP protocol 60 61 PPP 60 protocols PPP 61 primary path 141 primary shelf 224 problem
127. Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance is the means by which multiple concurrent transmissions are handled on the same channel This technique provides reliable security against eavesdropping It also ensures that there is minimal interference from or to other devices in the vicinity which may be using the same band Chapter 4 Wireless 233 234 4 1 3 1 The Stand Alone Cell To operate in peer to peer mode workstations are configured as part of a stand alone cell This configuration can support up to 32 workstations with a maximum distance between them of about 180 meters in an open environment In a closed or semi closed environment the effective distance is reduced by physical factors such as relative positioning of workstations reflective surfaces and signal absorption by walls and ceilings In any cell one workstation is configured as a cell leader whose responsibility it is to dictate what frequency channels are to be used within the cell and in what order It also provides authentication and authorization functions for the workstations in the cell Multiple overlapping cells can exist without generally interfering with each other s operation unless the workstation density becomes significantly high Such overlapping is transparent to individual workstations as they only communicate with members of their own cell 4 1 3 2 The Ethernet Connected Cell Workstations in a cell communicate with servers hosts or other d
128. Collision Detection local area network using either IEEE 802 3 or DIX Ethernet V2 frame formats Each 6611 Ethernet Adapter requires an AUI Attachment Unit Interface cable and a transceiver suitable for the type of Ethernet cabling in use 6611 4 Port SDLC Adapter 2720 The 6611 4 Port SDLC Adapter provides four independent synchronous serial communication interfaces that only support the use of SDLC data link protocols Each port of the 6611 4 Port SDLC Adapter provides the following different DCE physical interface attachment capabilities Port 0 Supports EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 CCITT V 35 or CCITT X 21 Port 1 Supports EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 or CCITT V 35 Port 2 Supports EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 Port 3 Supports EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 DCEs providing a CCITT V 35 or CCITT X 21 physical interface are supported at speeds up to 64 Kbps DCEs providing an EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 physical interface are supported at speeds up to 19 2 Kbps Each 6611 4 Port SDLC Adapter requires one 6611 SDLC Adapter Interface Cable feature 2723 and up to four DCE interface cables appropriate to the DCE interfaces in use The available DCE interface cables are 6611 SDLC Adapter EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 Cable feature 2725 6611 SDLC Adapter CCITT V 35 Cable feature 2727 Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 61 62 6611 SDLC Adapter CCITT X 21 Cable feature 2729 6611 X 25 Adapter 2730 The 6611 X 25 Adapter provides a single serial communic
129. Device Driver PC Network Ethernet Token Ring FDDI OEM Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Figure 6 OS 2 NTS 2 Support for DOS LAN Applications 1 8 6 DOS Transport 32 The DOS transport is the DOS based code that provides the LAN communication across the particular LAN type As shown in Figure 7 on page 34 the DOS transport has many pieces Application examples are shown at the top of the chart The LAN Support Program is shown inside the dashed line TCP IP is shown to the right and the adapters and various NDIS MAC drivers are also shown Novell environments are not shown in this chart The LAN Support Program has a number of different modules with the configuration aid assisting the user in setting up the CONFIG SYS AUTOEXEC BAT and PROTOCOL INI of the DOS workstation Note the notation in the bottom right corner of each LSP module box This notation directly relates to the actual module name that is shipped with LSP For example AO notes the LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM DXMAOMOD SYS module The following are three different LSP configuration option examples Native Token Ring Shared RAM Adapter Support The configurator will always configure the Interrupt Arbitrator Module DXMAOMOD SYS for all LSP configurations This module is used to arbitrate the 5C interrupt issued by applications for the use of the CCB interface for IEEE 802 2 services or for the use of the NCB interface for NetBIOS services T
130. Devices Chapter 2 Hubs 103 104 Ability to attach 8228s or 8226s directly to the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit Model 003 via any LIU This improves port density of the concentrator in the lowest cost manner and provides a migration path for existing 8228 users Speed Detection Speed detection before ring insertion This function available only on LIU ports avoids any beaconing condition recovery cycle not necessary if a workstation attempts to insert into the ring at the wrong speed Enhanced Error and Status Displays Four digit display for error and status indication Light emitting diodes LEDs for LAM status are also available on the base unit Backup Path With the MAC feature installed three internal adapters monitor the main and backup ring path to provide not only problem detection but also recovery monitoring RI RO ports wrap and unwrap accordingly to minimize impact to the network Differences between 8230 001 002 and 003 013 The IBM 8230 003 and 013 have base functions similar to the 8230 001 and 002 with the following enhancements More granular and modular design using LIUs e Better price performance of all configurations e Option of management via either SNMP or CMOL A new RLAM with RJ 45 connectors that can be up to 100 meters from the base unit e Mixing and matching of active and passive LIUs STP and UTP cables from the same base unit e Ring speed detect before insertion Enhanced error and
131. ED operation for all LEDs on all 8250 and 8260 modules installed When you press the LED test button every LED on every installed module should light up for approximately five seconds After five seconds the port status LED will blink the number of times representative of the network to which that port is assigned for every port assigned to a backplane network For every port that is not assigned to a backplane network the port status LED will turn off and remain off for approximately 25 seconds 2 11 4 2 Controller Module Fault Tolerance There are two dedicated slots 18 and 19 provided for installing the controller module Once installed the controller does not need to be configured Since the controller module is a critical component it is recommended to have a second controller module installed in the hub for backup purposes When two controller modules are installed in the hub one is active and the other will be a standby Both the active and standby controller modules monitor and modify the hub operating conditions such as temperature and power This redundant monitoring and control capability enables the standby controller module to be ready to take over from the active controller module should the active controller module fail When the standby controller module takes over from the active controller module all the installed modules perform a fast reboot Fast reboot results in all the 8260 modules equipped with on board memory NV
132. Figure 105 shows the normal mode of operation of a token ring adapter The figure shows the repeat path for all frames whether received or not within an adapter The repeat path is required in half duplex token ring operation to allow each transmitted frame to circulate around the entire ring Recelve lobe Transmit loba Physical layer MAC layer System interface E Repeat path Receive buffers Transmit buffers Figure 105 Normal Operation of a Token Ring Adapter If the repeat path is removed and other changes made subsequently a token ring adapter can transmit a frame on the outgoing link while also receiving a frame on the inbound link see Figure 106 on page 220 This is full duplex operation In this full duplex mode frames are transmitted on the outgoing link immediately upon being queued for transmission at the MAC interface Chapter 3 Switches 219 220 Depending upon the capabilities of the adapter its station and the switch to which it is attached sustained transmit rates of 16 Mbps are possible Even more significantly the adapter can also simultaneously receive frames at the 16 Mbps rate on the receive link for an aggregate capacity of 32 Mbps Typically LAN applications for example client server will generate traffic in bursts rather than in continuous streams Thus the achievable data rate of an aggregate 32 Mbps will be required in bursts rather than in a continuous mode of
133. I 1996 For a list of product area specialists in the ITSO TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ORGCARD PACKAGE Redbooks Home Page on the World Wide Web http w3 itso ibm com redbooks redbooks html IBM Direct Publications Catalog on the World Wide Web http www elink ibmlink ibm com pb1 pbl IBM employees may obtain LIST3820s of redbooks from this page ITSO4USA category on INEWS IBM Bookshop send orders to USIB6FPL at IBMMAIL or DKIBMBSH at IBMMAIL Internet Listserver With an Internet E mail address anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an E mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note leave the subject line blank A category form and detailed instructions will be sent to you Copyright IBM Corp 1996 297 How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks Customers may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways IBMLINK Registered customers have access to PUBORDER to order hardcopy to REDPRINT to obtain BookManager BOOKs IBM Bookshop send orders to usib6fp ibmmail com United States bookshop dk ibm com Outside United States Telephone orders 1 800 879 2755 45 4810 1500 45 4810 1200 45 4810 1000 45 4810 1600 45 4810 1100 Mail Orders send orders to IBM Publications P O Box 9046 B
134. IBM 9309 002 Rack Enclosure The limitations are if an FDDI adapter is used with the 3172 003 the 3172 003 must be installed in 9309 002 rack and in a computer room Class A2 Environment It is field installable The maximum number is 1 TURBOWAYS 100 ATM Adapter F C 2310 The TURBOWAYS 100 ATM Adapter provides OS 2 based 3172 003s direct and transparent access to an ATM environment using IBM prestandard token ring and Ethernet LAN emulation The ATM adapter provides dedicated 100 Mbps full duplex connectivity and uses an i960 RISC processor and a specialized chip set to provide high throughput and minimal use of the 3172 processor The adapter supports AAL 5 adaptation layer interface and up to 255 active virtual connections The adapter provides NDIS 2 0 1 support and switched virtual circuit SVC support conforming to the ATM Forum UNI version 3 0 specification Cables are not included with the TURBOWAYS 100 ATM adapter feature and must be ordered separately Cables may be ordered through your IBM Marketing Representative or can be placed through IBM Optical Link Products Endicott N Y 1 800 426 6786 International Call Access Number 01 607 755 9935 Parallel Channel Adapter F C 2501 This feature interfaces with IBM s Parallel Channel as if it is an IBM 3088 and supports speeds up to 4 5 Mbps This feature includes the adapter adapter cable and the channel cable adapter plate Channel cables group 0185 must be ordered separately The
135. Internal Code which supplies IEEE 802 2 logical link control LLC ANSI X3T9 5 ISO 9314 MAC functions and ANSI X3T9 5 station management SMT functions draft Version 7 2 level which is compatible with Version 6 2 OS 400 configuration parameters are used to select whether the adapter operates as a SAS a DAS or a dual homing station An interface is provided which can be used to connect through and control an optical bypass switch A maximum frame size of 4 KB is supported OS 400 Version 2 Release 3 or later is required which provides support for SNA communications Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 57 Refer to IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3892 for an introduction to FDDI concepts descriptions of IBM FDDI components and information for planning and installing IBM FDDI networks on optical fiber media I O Card Slots Used One Maximum For Models D35 D45 E35 E45 F35 and F45 One For Models D50 D80 E50 E95 F50 F95 Two Refer to 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart in Table 5 on page 56 Cables The FDDI adapter requires multimode 62 5 125 micron FDDI optical fiber jumper cables to connect the adapter into the FDDI ring These jumper cables are not provided with this feature Jumper cables are the responsibility of the customer and may be ordered from your local authorized IBM cabling distributor or by calling 1 800 IBM 2468 in the United States For EMEA customers cables are available from Montpellier thr
136. J 45 connector for attachment to 10Base T and 100Base TX networks The IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter is a PCI bus master adapter with 32 bit data bus attachment and is certified as FCC Class B and CISPR222 B It provides support for symmetrical multiprocessors SMP and all personal computers with PCI slots in addition to EISA ISA or Micro Channel MCA slots When operating in full duplex mode the computer in which the IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter is installed will have to be directly connected to a switch such as the IBM 8271 NWAYS Switch with the 100Base TX Universal Feature Card See 8271 Switch Model 108 Planning and Installation Guide GA27 4984 for additional details on this switch Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 15 The IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter is supported by a lifetime warranty and IBM s PC Company HelpCenter which offers 24 hours a day 7 days a week support 1 6 5 IBM Ethernet Quad BT B2 PeerMaster Server Adapters IBM Ethernet Quad PeerMaster Server Adapters are available in two versions The Quad BT PeerMaster is equipped with four ports with RJ 45 connectors for attaching four independent 10Base T network segments via unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling of Category 3 or better The Quad B2 PeerMaster provides four ports with BNC connectors for attaching four independent 10Base2 network segments through thin coaxial shielded twisted pair STP media On both adapters the LAN segments can support any num
137. KB line in the upper memory area The upper memory area is the 384 KB of memory immediately above the 640 KB line The starting address of the shared RAM area is determined by the adapter device driver unless the adapter is a Micro Channel Adapter MCA in which case the address is determined by the setting of the reference diskette In size shared RAM can be 8 16 32 or 64 KB depending on which adapter is used and how it is configured Adapter cards with 64 KB support RAM paging which allows the system to view the 64 KB of memory on the card in four 16 KB pages This scenario only requires 16 KB of contiguous system memory instead 2 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM of the 64 KB required when not using RAM paging RAM paging will not work unless the adapter s device driver supports it An example of a shared RAM adapter is the Shorty IBM Token Ring 16 4 A which was announced on November 5 1991 ltis a 16 bit shared RAM adapter The shared RAM area itself contains various status and request blocks service access points and link station control blocks receive buffers and transmit buffers It is possible to alter the size and number of the transmit and receive buffers by altering parameters associated with adapter device drivers The primary advantages of the shared RAM architecture are the following e On board logical link control LLC e Low memory requirements for DOS environments e Huge installed base of compatible
138. LEDs MDI Port Collision 10BASE T MDI X Ports LED Partition LEDs AUI and BNC Partition LEDs Figure 15 8222 Model 016 Ethernet Workgroup Hub The Model 016 consists of the following 1 Sixteen MDI X 10Base T network ports 2 One MDI 10Base T port e Alternate to port 16 does not have receive transmit pair reversal e Useful for cascading without the need for crossover cables 3 One AUI port 4 One 10Base2 BNC port e Both the AUI and BNC ports can be used at the same time Figure 16 shows the 8222 s rear interface panel BNC AUI Switch Power Connector BNC Port AUI Port Figure 16 8222 Rear Interface Chapter 2 Hubs 69 2 3 1 2 Operation Interface The operation features of the Nways 8222 hubs consist of port indicators unit indicators and an AUI BNC selector switch Port and Unit Status LEDs e Per 10Base T port Link Activity Partition e AUI port Activity Partition e BNC port Activity Partition Hub Power Collision AUI BNC Selector Switch Model 008 only The slide switch on the rear of the 8222 008 unit selects which port AUI or BNC will be active 2 3 1 3 Cable Interface The cable interface of the IBM Nways 8222 Workgroup Hub includes the following items 1 The power inlet connector is a standard appliance inlet 250 Volt 6 Ampere CEE 22 2 10Base T port connectors are standard eight position RJ 45 modular interfac
139. M UNI FORUM V3 0 with support of both PVC and SVC modes and can operate together with any ATM vendor module that follows these specifications Maximum distances of fiber links reachable FSD connectors 3 0 km with 62 5 125 fiber media e SC connectors 2 4 km with 62 5 125 fiber media This ATM UNI interface complies with the ATM Forum proposal for physical layer for 100Mbps multimode fiber interface FSD connectors 2 5 km with 62 5 125 fiber media e SC connectors 2 2 km with 62 5 125 fiber media The modules incorporate the traffic management Application Specific Integrated Circuits ASICs and cell buffers that deal with various ATM classes of service that perform distributed functions such as as cell swapping rate control and reshaping of the traffic in case of bursty LAN transmissions The distributed design ensures that the system performance scales up when the number of modules and ports increases Each module can support a large number of concurrent virtual circuits This is important to satisfy your connectivity requirements when you include large servers or high speed backbone links with a large number of circuits connected You can use the ATM concentration module ports for campus backbone communications between different hubs as parallel links for increased traffic bandwidth or to attach high capacity servers in native ATM mode You can also combine these modes of operation 5 3 3 1 Port Configurations of 100 Mbps M
140. Open Company Limited Xerox Xerox Corporation 386MAX Qualitas Incorporated Other trademarks are trademarks of their respective companies Appendix E Special Notices 293 294 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Appendix F Related Publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this redbook F 1 International Technical Support Organization Publications For information on ordering these ITSO publications see How To Get ITSO Redbooks on page 297 e Installation Guidelines for the IBM Token Ring Network Products GG24 3291 02 available on CD ROM SK2T 6022 e IBM 8250 Intelligent Hub and IBM Hub Management Program 6000 GG24 4033 00 e FDDI Concepts and Products GG24 3865 00 e High Speed Networking Technology An Introductory Survey GG24 3816 01 available on CD ROM SK2T 6022 e IBM Workgroup Hubs and Switches GG24 2528 00 e 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub GG24 4370 0 e IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch Concepts and Products GG24 4307 00 e Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Technical Overview SG24 4625 00 A complete list of International Technical Support Organization publications known as redbooks with a brief description of each may be found in International Technical Support Organization Bibliography of Redbooks GG24 3070 F 2 Other Publications This publication is also relev
141. RAM to automatically load the configuration stored there This occurs regardless of the current DIP switch settings on the modules Fast reboot facilitates immediate resumption of the hub activity following the failure of the active controller module and takeover by the standby controller module 2 11 5 8260 Intelligent Power Management Subsystem 174 The 8260 provides extensive power management functions that allow you to take advantage of the modular load sharing power supply system available on the 8260 The power subsystem provides an easy access power bay which can support up to four load sharing high capacity managed power supplies The 8260 comes standard with one load sharing power supply but it allows you to have up to a maximum of four power supplies installed in a single 8260 Each power supply is hot swappable and is accessible from the front panel of the 8260 hub after removal of the power supply bay cover as shown in Figure 85 on page 162 The power consumed by the controller media and management modules currently installed in the 8260 is evenly distributed over all the installed power supplies With the 8260 intelligent power management function which is LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM available through the distributed management module and the controller module you can perform the following functions e Assign power class priority to each 8260 module e Display the power class assigned to eac
142. S STATUS o 1 o 8260 8260016 Le LU S o 2 o o o o 8 o o Q a 4 o Q o o5 QD o o o o NN o o o o o o o en ow on o acit Y TIVITY o STATUS SS o STATUS gt DIAG SS o DIAG o DLOAD N o DLOAD mo ERROR o ERROR o DLOAD Y o DLOAD o RESET a o RESET o S o U o Fis232 RS232 Be Le Figure 96 Front View of the Multiprotocol Interconnect Modules Bridging Functions This module can perform transparent bridging TB between Ethernet or 802 3 segments as well as between token ring segments Also it can be configured to perform source route transparent SRT bridging between token ring networks Finally it can perform translational bridging between token ring and Ethernet or 802 3 networks when both the token ring and Ethernet or 802 3 segments are using transparent bridging Chapter 2 Hubs 193 194 Note This module cannot perform source route to transparent SR TB bridging like the IBM 8209 and 8229 This module supports the spanning tree protocol and can coexist and interoperate with other transparent and source route transparent bridges that support the spanning tree protocol Note This module cannot use the spanning tree protocol to interoperate with source rou
143. S 2 and IBM Industrial computer IBM Dual EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter The IBM Dual EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter is a 32 bit bus master adapter for server systems and clients where high performance is required The EtherStreamer Adapter provides 40 Mbps data streaming and supports full duplex operations which provides 200 20 Mbps Ethernet capabilities The adapter supports transparent or source route bridging 12 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM and can detect and configure itself to the media type installed Microcode upgrades are handled through flash EPROMS and provides 10Base T attachment for two LAN segments minimizing the number of PC slots and adapters required in the server Device driver support includes NetWare 3 X and 4 X server drivers and DOS OS 2 ODI NDIS drivers Novell DOS ODI Client and DOS Transport Modules IBM LAN Adapter A for Ethernet The IBM LAN Adapter A for Ethernet is a client adapter which can be installed in either 16 bit or 32 bit slots and provides media connectors for 10Base T as well as 10Base2 and AUI 10Base5 and fiber Supports the same devices drives as the IBM Dual EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter 1 6 2 IBM ISA Ethernet Adapters There are three IBM ISA Ethernet Adapters that operate in ISA based machines using either 8 bit or 16 bit slots These include the following IBM LAN Adapter for TP For 10Base T twisted pair networks IBM LAN Adapter for CX For 10Base2 thin coaxial netw
144. SG24 4754 00 Local Area Network Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM May 1996 International Technical Support Organization Raleigh Center International Technical Support Organization ASA Local Area Network Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM May 1996 Take Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information in Appendix E Special Notices on page 291 First Edition May 1996 This edition applies to the most recent IBM LAN products and LAN architectures Comments may be addressed to IBM Corporation International Technical Support Organization Dept HZ8 Building 678 P O Box 12195 Research Triangle Park NC 27709 2195 When you send information to IBM you grant IBM a non exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you O Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1996 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Pretace iii e A a A ix How This Redbook Is Organized 0000002 eee ix The Team That Wrote This Redbook 0 00 x Comments Welcome xi Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 1 1 1 OSI Refe
145. Streamer uses a pipelined architecture Frames are streamed directly between the token ring and attaching system memory without being stored on the adapter and without any adapter processor intervention Rather than first moving frames from system memory to the adapter and then moving them from the adapter to the ring LANStreamer simultaneously moves the frame from the system onto the adapter and out onto the ring This new architecture is made possible by the implementation in VLSI of the functions previously done in software by the adapter processor This dramatically improves performance because the processing time required for each frame is the major bottleneck in the store and forward architecture To transmit a frame the attaching system adds a control block to its transmit queue The adapter bus master interface reads this control block into special hardware registers and begins moving the frame from the system to the LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM token ring There is a small FIFO first in first out buffer on the adapter to guarantee that there is always data available to move onto the ring in case the adapter loses the Micro Channel temporarily Data is moved into this FIFO from system memory and simultaneously moved from the FIFO onto the token ring The process for receiving frames is similar The adapter hardware sorts out MAC frames and they are processed on the adapter by the adapter processor This proce
146. TM Figure 101 IBM 8272 LANStreamer Switch The 8272 can be mounted in a standard 19 inch rack or similar surface The 8272 can also be placed on a flat surface such as a desk or tabletop The 8272 provides the following functions Adaptive Cut Through The IBM 8272 LANStreamer Switch Model 108 can be configured to operate in cut through mode that uses a switching technique referred to as on the fly switching This provides for extremely low latency or delay as frames traverse the switch While token ring networks are generally very reliable the 8272 may still be used in networks where it may be desirable at the expense of latency to operate in what is called store and forward mode In this mode by completely checking every frame before forwarding customers can use the switch to isolate erroneous frames generated on one segment from traversing the switch into another To address the requirements of these customers the 8272 may be configured to operate in either cut through or store and forward modes or to operate in adaptive cut through mode where the 8272 will automatically alternate between cut through and store forward switching depending on the user configurable per port error rate thresholds e TokenPipe Configurations larger than eight token ring LAN segments can be constructed using the 8272 by connecting 8272 ports together This capability called TokenPipe support allows two IBM 8272s to communicate
147. TM network is nearly as easy as installing a shared media LAN because of two things e The control point is integrated in the hub so there is no need to set up a separate server for connection management or configuration You do not need to have a given server operational e You only need to set a few network parameters The control point learns dynamically the machine resources port speeds and network topology This makes it easier for you to install and operate the ATM network and fewer resources are needed to manage it 5 4 3 Multinetworking with ATM The control point architecture of the 8260 ATM switch control point incorporates all the functions you need to handle small to large scale networks This includes the interconnection of ATM campus networks over ATM wide area networks WAN Networks of 8260s can be grouped into multiple subnetworks where the topology of each subnetwork is hidden from other subnetworks This subnetworking is essential where you have multiple ATM LANs interconnected through an ATM WAN because subnetworks on each side of the WAN do not need to exchange topology information This reduces the overhead of control traffic over WAN links Also when you connect the 8260 to a WAN ATM the total amount of bandwidth to be carried over this connection can be restricted so you do not overflow the WAN links with campus traffic or you do not exceed the contracted bandwidth with the WAN service bearer This function
148. Tables on page 267 B 1 3 EPROM Part Numbers In general the microcode for the adapters is located on a set of two removable EPROMS Newer adapters use only one EPROM These EPROMS are marked with part numbers which coincide with a particular level of microcode B 1 4 Microcode Level This is the level of the adapter s microcode which can be displayed by querying the adapter from LAN Network Manager or by running adapter diagnostics O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 273 Vres V LLE9X96 cLE9X96 VLLSX96 W dVL eeGllV 6989X96 8989X96 ZLSX96 dav V8Zeeve 2000 00 1616493 8916492 0p9 393 012S29 1000 00 26 104 6 96 104 6 6 v936 0d pue VW YdAldVdV g69Z8SV S8VLXE8 98v X 8 8 18X69 6928SV LSVLXE8B 8SVLXE8B 641539 0000 00 1269336 0365336 1vv 36 8bv 36 1808ZV 0000 00 s088393 9088393 9Vv 0391 9939 V 888393 2888393 aSeSZlvV 1ys0J391 cvS049 4 Il Yaldvav GeSLZLV GELSX96 9ELSX96 O vseev 0000 00 acvseev 11999p9 9199979 8Ev0XZ9 cv8eEV 68E0XZ9 O6E0XZ9 Cleseev GZ999b9 vL99909 OLE8EEWV 69 X69 OZZLX69 ale8eev LOLLX69 99ZZX69 VIE8EEV SVLLX69 9VLLX69 0016EE9 u3idvav LE8eev 608EX19 808 X19 AcOseev 128 X1L9 2c8 XL9 ac0seev L1699y9 0L699p9 cO8eeVv LVL6EE9 9pL6 9 ado N3A3 13437 30090891 N d NOYdA3 nad AWVN Y3LdAVOV ssajdepy sdqy p 104 SJ A97 aposolsiy sajdepy Buly uSyO gg elqel LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and
149. The LER alarm generation threshold indicates when the average error rate is in a critical condition and an alarm should be generated In this case an SRF status report frame is sent The default value is 10 8 but can be changed in steps of 10 between 10 15 and 10 4 The value cannot be set below the cutoff condition threshold e The cutoff condition threshold indicates when a port will be removed from the ring after the link error rate has increased and alarms were generated The default value is 107 but can be changed in step of 10 1 between 10 15 and 10 4 e The link rate is the difference between the average link error rate and the alarm generation threshold Using the above default and average values the link rate would be between 10 7 to 10 2 The field in the MF menu will only display 7 to 2 Note Therefore a value of 2 reflect a worse link quality than a value of 7 Chapter 2 Hubs 143 144 Log Manager When the Maintenance Facility is activated a log is started to record status report frame SRF conditions and parameter management frame PMF changes requested by the user In addition other SMF frames can be selected by a filter provided by MF The following are examples of frames e Neighbor Information Frame NIF e Status Information Frame SIF e Resource Allocation Frame RAF e Echo Frame ECF e Request Denied Frame RDF Another filter is available to select the various fields of these frames The size
150. You can see in Figure 100 on page 210 how the 8271 establishes communication with the BOOTP server Chapter 3 Switches 209 Broadcast for Directed Request BOOTP TFTP to TFTP Server Server File Transferred using TFTP Protocol IP Parameters TFTP Filename Figure 100 Communication between the BOOTP Server and the 8271 210 Universal Feature Slot The IBM 8271 Model 108 s most significant enhancement over the Model 001 is its universal feature slot It supports several different optional universal feature cards that provide additional connections to augment the eight 10Base T Ethernet ports standard in the base product Some of these universal feature cards are the following One Port 155 Mbps ATM These optional connections will provide the capability to connect the workgroup LAN switches to an ATM switch such as an IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub with its 2 Port ATM Concentrator Module using a 155 Mbps SONET interface that is fully ATM Forum compliant With these optional features token ring or Ethernet LAN switches can be connected to an ATM switch using multimode fiber cabling at distances up to two kilometers The ATM uplink supports ATM Forum compliant LAN emulation One port 100Base T Ethernet This feature card provides one 100Base T Ethernet port for connection to a 100Base T backbone segment via an external 100Base T Ethernet repeater hub or for connection directly t
151. a Remote LIU one for control signals and the other for data flow Control signals are the commands and responses between the microprocessors in the RLIU and RLAM e From RLIU to RLAM active or passive 100 meters e From Active RLAM to workstation Using 150 ohm Type 1 STP 350 meters Using 100 ohm category 3 100 meters Using 100 120 ohm category 4 200 meters Using 100 120 ohm category 5 225 meters e From passive RLAM to workstation Using 100 120 ohm category 4 5 100 meters UTP category 3 is not supported for 16 Mbps 100 meters for 4 Mbps 150 ohm Type 1 STP is not supported LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 7 3 7 Overall Recommendation m Be Safe Limit horizontal cabling length from wiring closets where 8230s MAUs or RLAMs are installed to work area to 90 meters This provides allowance for patch cables on both ends and would most likely survive future upgrade of the network to use higher speed equipments Use category 5 cables whenever possible Patch cables patch panels and wall plate modules should be of the same grade as installed cables e Consider using optical fiber if wiring closets are more than 100 meters apart or cable path is exposed outdoors Lobe Filters l any unshielded media is used ensure the proper use of lobe filters A for ICS connectors B for RJ 45 to meet FCC Class A CISPRA or CISPRB standard Read the 8230 Model 3 Supplement fo
152. a maximum frame size of up to 8 KB This increased frame size along with other changes to the licensed internal code provide improved performance during large file transfer operations Short interactive workstation exchanges will see little response time improvement over the 4 Mbps IBM Token Ring network subsystem 6240 I O Card Slots Used One Maximum For Models D35 D80 E35 E70 and F35 F60 Four For Models E80 E95 and F70 F95 Six Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart in Table 5 on page 56 Cables One token ring network attachment 2 5 meter 8 foot cable AS 400 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 Adapter HP 2617 The Ethernet IEEE 802 3 Adapter HP provides a single attachment to one Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect LAN Feature 2617 offers enhanced performance when compared to feature 2625 This high performance adapter uses a faster microprocessor and additional memory to provide up to six times the throughput of feature 2625 Support of OS 400 Version 2 Release 2 or later is required A 15 pin D connector provides a standard AUI for connection through an external transceiver Transceivers which attach to 10Base T unshielded twisted pair 10Base2 Thin Ethernet and standard Ethernet coaxial media can be obtained from an Ethernet supplier The feature consists of an adapter card and internal code which supplies Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802 3 media access control MAC plus IEEE 802 2 logical link control
153. a transition between traditional LANs token ring or Ethernet and an ATM network Many networks are close to the limit of current technology More and more users are attached to local area networks and network servers are growing in speed and capacity Use of client server applications is climbing and delay sensitive applications such as voice and video put new requirements on your network Communication expands from a local group to a global interconnection The ATM bridge gives you the ability to phase ATM into your networks in an orderly fashion Today s LANs can be interconnected through a high capacity ATM network Network servers connects directly to the ATM network This frees them from the constrains of traditional LAN attachment Users who need more power are connected with 25 Mbps ATM Users on traditional LANs gain some of the ATM benefits without disruption by using ATM as a backbone Your current applications operate unaltered and your current LAN infrastructure of workstation adapters LAN wiring and LAN concentrators and hubs continue to function without modifications This gives you the ability to roll out ATM today without installing an interim solution such as FDDI or fast Ethernet The ATM bridge is ideal for connecting current LANs with ATM networks It is designed for very high traffic applications Extensive filtering is provided to block unnecessary traffic coming from the attached LANs The ATM bridge fully participates
154. aRed LAN Adapter IBM Infrared Wireless LAN adapters give you everything you d get with a conventional network adapter except the hassle and expense of wiring They give you a number of benefits over wired networks thanks to versatility and functions that include Quick and easy installation Capability to create instant ad hoc networks for new or temporary work groups with no need for in wall cabling controllers and network support administration e Non line of sight infrared wireless communication e Complete coverage in most rooms up to 30 x 30 feet with no special placement of transceivers needed 17 x 17 when using the PCMCIA with integrated transceiver e Compatibility with IBM PC DOS MS DOS and Microsoft Windows Ability to connect systems via infrared links to wired networks through access points e Ethernet bridging access point software that provides a mechanism to access resources on a wired LAN e Ethernet roaming software that allows users to retain their LAN connection as they move between access points e Device drivers furnished with the adapters that support the most widely used network operating systems IBM PCMCIA II RF Adapter Wireless LAN Entry The IBM PCMCIA II RF adapter meet the PCMCIA Type II Standard and allow a cell diameter of up to 22 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 1200 feet with data rates of up to 350 Kbps The adapter operates in the frequency band of 2 4 GHz using spre
155. ached or dual homed concentrator As a dual attached concentrator it can be attached to a primary and secondary ring The primary ring transmits the data while the secondary ring provides backup for the primary ring FDDI also provides the capability to structure primary and alternate path connections to attaching devices such as the 8244 improving the overall reliability availability and serviceability of the network It allows the construction of hierarchical topologies by cascading several levels deep and by dual homing for example attaching an 8244 to each of two other 8244s to provide optimum network availability in case of a bypassed network failure The 8244 provides connection for FDDI devices that are based on the ANSI and ISO standards The 8244 will operate with management entities that support the ANSI Station Management SMT 7 3 frame based protocols 2 10 2 1 Connectivity Features The front panel of the 8244 is shown in Figure 74 on page 147 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2000000000000 Figure 74 Front View of the 8244 Concentrator On the front panel the numbers 1 to 5 represent the general LEDs 1 5 OK normal operation 2 Ring operational ring is operational 3 4 Through ports A and B are active Receive receiving packets Transmit transmitting packets Numbers 6 to 9 on the front panel represent the connections that you attach to the concen
156. ad spectrum frequency hopping SSFH which provides excellent interference protection IBM Wireless ISA MCA and PCMCIA II RF Adapters Wireless LAN The IBM Wireless RF adapters for ISA Micro Channel and PCMCIA II machines allow a cell diameter of up to 1600 feet with data rates of up to 2 2 Mbps These adapters also operate in the frequency band of 2 4 GHz using SSFH for interference protection All the adapters support many major Network Operating Systems including IBM LANServer Novell NetWare Novell Personal NetWare Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Microsoft LAN Manager Windows NT and Artisoft LANtastic 1 8 LAN Support Programs and Adapter Interfaces This section covers the NDIS and ODI adapter interfaces It will also cover the major LAN support programs available from IBM 1 8 1 NDIS Interface The NDIS is a de facto standard interface used in the LAN industry for adapter driver and protocol stack development The current NDIS specification is Version 2 01 NDIS 3 0 for Windows NT Figure 2 on page 24 details the NDIS specification which was jointly developed by 3Com and Microsoft It defines a configuration and binding process that is handled by a module called the Protocol Manager The NDIS MAC driver that is normally developed by the LAN adapter vendor provides the communication between the adapter and the host resident protocol stack This MAC driver handles packet transmission and reception to from the LAN The NDIS
157. ad write To use the MIB browser to look at FDDI MIB information maintained by the Proxy Agent enter the IP address and community name used by the Proxy Agent and then choose the MIB information you wish to display To select the MIB objects you need to know the full identifiers used to get to the subtrees which contain the Proxy Agent MIB information You can select to see any or all of the MIB information contained in the MIB subtrees supported by the Proxy Agent e RFC 1285 Subtree Revision 6 2 of SMT The MIB object identifier used for this subtree is org dod internet mgmt mib 2 transmission fddi IBM Extensions for SMT 6 2 The MIB object identifier used for this subtree is iso org dod internet private enterprises ibm ibmArchitecture fddi fddismt6 2 e RFC 1512 Subtree Revision 7 3 of SMT The MIB object identifier used for this subtree is iso org dod internet mgmt mib 2 transmission fddi fddimib IBM Extensions for SMT 7 3 The MIB object identifier used for this subtree is iso org dod internet private enterprises ibm ibmArchitecture fddi fddismt73ext IBM Extensions for 8240 Concentrator The MIB object identifier used for this subree is iso org dod internet private enterprises ibm ibmProd ibm8240 When using MIB browsers over FDDI rings containing a mix of SMT 6 2 and 7 3 stations be aware that these situations may occur e When you browse over SMT 7 3 MIB for the stations implementing only SMT 6 2 the variabl
158. adable levels to meet all your requirements Same MIB as the 8250 and 8260 supported by the NetView family of network management products Supported by IBM Intelligent Hub Management Program IHMP DOS Entry Version 2 or IBM Nways Manager for Windows AIX support with NWAYS Campus Manager LAN For AIX EIA 232 communications port Two ports provide for simultaneous port consultation between the network administrator and a service provider both of whom can be remote from the site Flash Memory Error and status displays Compatibility with other IBM products Lets you update microcode via software download Simplify troubleshooting and performance monitoring Preserves your equipment investment in other IBM products Standardizes network equipment requirements Compatible with 8230 8250 and 8260 concentrators and hubs Automatic speed detection Reduces errors and simplifies management Helps avoid network interrupts Chapter 2 Hubs 135 Table 19 Page 2 of 2 Hub Architecture Enhancements Feature Benefits Service e Provided by IBM Code updates No annual maintenance fee Product preview IBM intends to enhance the 8238 in the fourth quarter of 1995 by adding redundant power and dial in access similar to that of the IBM 8235 Announcement and availability of these functions will be based upon IBM s business and technical judgment 2 9 IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator The IBM 8240 FDDI
159. adapter and into which the standard token ring adapter cable IBM P N 6339098 or equivalent plugs The standard token ring adapter cable must be ordered separately A single cable IBM P N 60G1063 or equivalent may be ordered separately to replace the combination of the conversion cable and standard token ring adapter cable This adapter also supports the use of token ring shielded or unshielded twisted pair cable containing two pairs of wires This twisted pair cable can have either an RJ 45 connector on each end or an RJ 45 connector on one end and an RJ 11 connector on the other end and must be ordered separately Limitations F C 2235 is not supported with F C 3000 or 3010 Field installable Yes Maximum 4 EtherStreamer MC 32 F C 2245 This adapter provides attachment to 10 Mbps Ethernet LANs and conforms to the IEEE 802 3 architecture Connections to 10Base T RJ 45 10Base5 mini AUI and 10Base2 coax Ethernet LANs are supported A conversion cable P N 59G9004 which converts from mini AUI to AUI is shipped with each EtherStreamer adapter Full duplex 20 Mbps mode is only supported through the 10Base T RJ 45 connection and this mode requires an Ethernet switch such as the IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch The 10Base T RJ 45 connection Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 49 50 supports the use of a category 3 4 or 5 shielded or unshielded twisted pair cable with an RJ 45 connector on each end Attachment cables and har
160. al sources of signal integrity problems Review this list when you are experiencing difficulty transceiving or receiving with stations in your wireless LAN 4 2 6 1 Antenna Positioning The patch antenna 5 cm by 5 cm of the transceiver is placed just behind the IBM logo e The IBM logo must be visible If the transceiver is mounted on a desk do not place the transceiver upside down Best propagation results are obtained when directing the IBM logo toward the base station Directing the transceiver in the proper direction may improve the signal strength by a factor of 2 to 3 244 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Clear the area in front of the IBM logo surrounding the antenna to improve propagation e Avoid placing large objects around the transceiver If it is a stationary unit place the transceiver in the highest convenient position This will reduce signal degradation from furniture and moving people as well as modular partitions if they do not go up to the ceiling But don t place it next to the ceiling maintain at least 30 cm of clearance e In case of weak signal strength look for any large metallic items white board cabinet water cooler in the signal path Do not place the transceiver close to moving objects such as large fans moving doors conveyor belts e Do not place the transceiver close to any sources of electromagnetic or radio frequency interference such as a microwave oven radar or an
161. alf duplex 10 Mbps Ethernet connections or dedicated full duplex 20 Mbps connections 3 Port 10Base FL Card The 3 Port 10Base FL Card provides three 10Base FL multimode fiber connections via ST connectors It expands the port capacity of the 8271 from 8 to 11 Any of these three ports can be configured similarly to any of the eight fixed 10Base T ports to provide either shared half duplex 10 Mbps Ethernet connections or dedicated full duplex 20 Mbps connections at distances up to 2 kilometers Adaptive Cut Through In cut through switching the switching process begins as soon as the address fields are decoded This is contrasted with store and forward switching where the entire packet is received and stored before switching begins 8271 cut through switching has very low latencies 50 milliseconds or less but can propagate error frames because it starts switching before frame validity is assured Adaptive cut through switching combines cut through and store and forward techniques The 8271 uses cut through switching as long as the number of error frames is acceptable and automatically converts to store and forward when error rates are not acceptable The 8271 Model 108 may be configured to operate in either Cut through Store and forward or Adaptive cut through mode EtherProbe Another new feature of the IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch Model 108 is the EtherProbe network monitoring port that can be used to
162. allation Tabletop Ensure there is sufficient space around the unit for air to circulate Rack mount Power Selection Preset to 220V 50 Hertz Can support 110 to 220 Volts 50 or 60 Hertz Cabling Types Chapter 2 Hubs 201 Copper ports 150 ohm STP 100 ohm UTP and FTP Fiber ports 62 5um multimode fiber EIA 232 port EIA 232 cable Connector Types Copper ports DB 9 for STP shielded RJ 45 for UTP Fiber ports MIC connector Optical Bypass Mini Din 6 plug EIA 232 port DB 15 connector Shipping Group 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator Power cord by country Side plates for 19 inch rack assembly V 24 null modem interposer Keying bag for fiber transceivers Safety manual System diskette with diagnostics and backup copy of the preloaded software Diskette with Proxy Agent program Diskette with 8244 customization program for NetView for AIX IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator User s Guide IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator Maintenance Guide IBM SNMP FDDI Proxy Agent User s Guide Graphical Management Applications Available LAN Network Manager for AIX 2 12 7 8282 Model 001 202 Physical Specifications Width 483 mm 19 inches Depth 508 mm 20 inches Height 133 mm 5 25 inches Weight 13 kg 30 Ibs Installation Tabletop Rack mount Power Selection 100 to 250 Volts auto sensing Cabling Types
163. ams or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM s product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent program that does not infringe any of IBM s intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product program or service Information in this book was developed in conjunction with use of the equipment specified and is limited in application to those specific hardware and software products and levels IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation 500 Columbus Avenue Thornwood NY 10594 USA The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed AS IS The information about non IBM vendor products in this manual has been supplied by the vendor and IBM assumes no responsibility for its accuracy or completeness The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer s operational environment While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for a
164. an OS 2 product IEEE 802 2 interface used by emulators LAN Network Manager etc NetBIOS interface used by LAN Server Requester Microsoft LAN Manager Lotus Notes etc e Communications Manager 2 APPN support e TCP IP support Copyright IBM Corp 1996 OSI MODEL PRODUCT TYPES LAN PRODUCTS COM MANAGER APPLICATION te eat LAN NETWORK MGR PRESENTATION PROGRAMS LAN SERVER REQ SESSION 3270 EMULATION LAN SUPPORT PGM COMMUNICATION NE ioe INTERFACES AND COM MANAGER PROTOCOL SNA SUPPORT NTS 2 PRODUCTS LLC 802 2 NETBIOS TCP IP TRANSPORT NETWORK DATA LINK NETWORK SUPPORT PRODUCTS ODI LAN ADAPTERS Figure 1 LAN Adapter Software Environment and the OSI Reference Model From an architectural standpoint IBM has produced two types of token ring adapters One is the shared RAM adapter and the other is the bus master or DMA adapter The primary difference between these two architectures is the manner in which data is transferred between the adapter and system memory See Appendix A Adapter Tables on page 267 and Appendix B Microcode Level Tables on page 273 for more information comparing functions and features of IBM token ring LAN adapters 1 2 Shared RAM Adapters Shared RAM adapters derive their name from the fact that they carry on board RAM and share that RAM with the system processor The memory on the adapter card is mapped into an unused block of system memory above the 640
165. and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 12 2 8224 Models 001 and 002 Physical Specifications Width 432 mm 17 0 inches Depth 292 mm 11 5 inches Height 44 5 mm 1 75 inches Weight 3 14 kg 6 90 lbs Installation Tabletop Rack mount Do not attach rubber feet to 8224 s underside if you are planning to rack mount the hub or it will exceed standard height Power Selection Auto ranging 100 to 240 Volts 50 or 60 Hertz Cabling Types 10Base T ports 100 ohm UTP category 3 4 or 5 100 or 120 ohm FTP category 5 or 150 ohm IBM STP type 1 6 9 1A 6A or 9A AUI port thick Ethernet cable 10Base5 or AUI transceiver BNC port standard thin coaxial cable 10Base2 FOIRL 10Base FL port 50 125um 62 5 125um or 100 140um optical fiber cable EIA 232 port EIA 232 cable Connector Types 10Base T ports RJ 45 STP cables must use baluns to convert to RJ 45 connectors AUI port DB 15 connector BNC port BNC connector Optical fiber ST connector EIA 232 port DB 9 connector Shipping Group 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Power cord Cable management bracket Hub expansion cable Self adhesive rubber feet 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Installation and Users Guide Graphical Management Applications Available StackWatch for Windows StackWatch for Novell NMS 8224 Application for NetView for Windows 8224 Application
166. ansion 6209 38H6209 Code Download Kit 6200 38H6200 134 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Management upgrades Table 18 Page 2 of 2 IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub at a Glance Bronze to Silver Upgrade 38H6204 Bronze to Gold Upgrade 38H6205 Silver to Gold Upgrade 38H6205 Protocol IEEE 802 5 token ring at 4 or 16 Mbps management SNMP error and status displays LED indicators for power unit and individual port status Hex display for error codes and diagnostic message Physical specifications Operating environment Warranty Width 434 00 mm 17 1 inches Depth 324 00 mm 12 75 inches Height 89 00 mm 3 5 inches Weight Management Hub 5 kg 11 Ib Expansion Hub 4 kg 8 8 Ib Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Relative humidity 5 to 95 Electrical V ac 1 5 A 50 60 Hz One year Regulatory compliance Meets UL CSA and TUV safety requirements FCC A VCCI 1 VDE B CISPR2 A Table 19 Page 1 of 2 Hub Architecture Enhancements Feature Benefits Device attachment Provides affordable concentration for as few as 16 or as many as 128 users Each managed module can support up to 7 unmanaged modules in the same stack Ring in and ring out modules Cable choices Network management Provide connection to the main ring path Support RI RO via optical fiber or shielded RJ 45 Support Category 3 4 5 UTP cable and STP cable Three upgr
167. ant as a further information source e Internetworking with TCP IP Volume l Principles Protocols and Architecture SC31 6144 O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 295 296 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM How To Get ITSO Redbooks This section explains how both customers and IBM employees can find out about ITSO redbooks CD ROMs workshops and residencies A form for ordering books and CD ROMs is also provided This information was current at the time of publication but is continually subject to change The latest information may be found at URL http www redbooks ibm com redbooks How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks Employees may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways PUBORDER to order hardcopies in United States GOPHER link to the Internet Type GOPHER WTSCPOK ITSO IBM COM Tools disks To get LIST3820s of redbooks type one of the following commands TOOLS SENDTO EHONE4 TOOLS2 REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE TOOLS SENDTO CANVM2 TOOLS REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE Canadian users only To get lists of redbooks TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS REDBOOKS GET REDBOOKS CATALOG TOOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET ITSOCAT TXT TOOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET LISTSERV PACKAGE To register for information on workshops residencies and redbooks TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ITSOREG
168. apters The field descriptions for the bus master DMA adapters are the same as the fields for the shared RAM adapters EXCEPT for two fields The ROM Size and RAM Size fields are replaced by the mCODE and the XMIT RCV BUFFER RAM fields A 2 1 Microcode Level mCODE This field describes the size and nature of the adapter s microcode The bus master A adapter used microcode which came on diskette with the adapter and had to be loaded into a RAM area on the adapter from the PS 2 at IPL time The newer bus master adapters include the microcode in on board ROM A 2 2 Transmit Receive xmit rcv BUFFER RAM The Buffer RAM field indicates the amount of RAM on the adapter which is used for transmit and receive buffers Appendix A Adapter Tables 271 6 0 8 JO Se Na Wo1 ejge rene jjueJino aje ylym sjajdepe ay sejeoIpul 9ION pajioddns WOU SHA 601 8L1 61 ZE ZE VSIA ay 79 v 91 L1v0J 9 Z1v0J 9 ran VSIA jou ul gy 79 ayvog Asowaw WOU 91 OW gt w SJA 8 LL1 61 vz 9l 9 O Sai TE v 91 S966969 8668969 8668 nesnienya ayvog Asowaw WOU ze OW u oF Ww SHA v L Zk 9S0 6 ZE ZE 9 O Sgil TERA v 91 1468426 2v68326 2168 iPaNENya a ayvog WOU LAOD SN II SHA 8 OL 803 261 vz 9l VSI LV O ay v9 TE v 91 9920380 GSz04 0 ggzo eae ie visi r dyuvog WOU I SHA 8 OL 802 261 vz 9l VSI LV NO ay v9 ENET v 91 2120380 S1Z203 0 0213 eae pajioddns Wvd ON bIL ZL 802 061 vz 9l gu iu ay 79 ul arg v 9
169. apters that are available The chart gives the adapter name the form and part number along with information of the bus type memory and location of the 802 2 LLC support For all the IBM Ethernet cards the 802 2 LLC code is executed on the PC processor and is normally supplied by a software package such as LAN Support Program LSP or Network Transport Systems 2 NTS 2 Therefore all Ethernet adapters are shallow adapters Adapter Name Bus Type Data Path Memory 802 2 Support IBM Dual EtherStreamer MC 32 MCA Bus master Shallow In Host Adapter IBM LAN Adapter A for Ethernet MCA Shared RAM Shallow In Host IBM Etherjet ISA Adapter Shared RAM Shallow In Host IBM Etherjet 10Base T ISA Shared RAM Shallow In Host Adapter IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter Bus master Shallow In Host IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter PCI Bus master Shallow In Host IBM 10Base T Credit Card PCMCIA Shared RAM Shallow In Host Adapter for Ethernet IBM 10Base2 Credit Card Adapter PCMCIA Shared RAM Shallow In Host for Ethernet 1 6 8 IBM TURBOWAYS ATM Adapters IBM TURBOWAYS 155 ATM MC Adapter The new TURBOWAYS 155 ATM MC Adapter is recommended initially for Micro Channel bus servers clients operating in a LAN backbone structure that includes an OS 2 or NetWare server and the 8260 with a bridge module and AIX 3 2 5 servers and clients running IP only traffic Up to tw TURBOWAYS 155 adapters can be installed in a single RS 6000 system
170. ards e Controller module 176 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM There are two types of distributed management module DMM e Stand alone DMM The DMM is called a stand alone card because it does not have any mounting facility for the daughter cards e EC DMM This module allows you to mount up to six Ethernet Medium Access Carrier E MAC daughter cards on it At the time of writing there is no carrier DMM available for mounting token ring MAC T MAC daughter cards In terms of management functions DMM and EC DMM are identical The only difference between these two cards is their ability to house Ethernet MAC daughter cards Therefore as this section is discussing management in general the term DMM will be used to refer to both 8260 management modules stand alone DMM and EC DMM The DMM along with the fault tolerant controller module manages and controls the 8260 hub and its modules However to perform certain management functions such as network traffic monitoring there is a need for a daughter card to assist the DMM There are two types of daughter cards e Ethernet Medium Access Carrier E MAC daughter card e Token ring Medium Access Carrier T MAC daughter card These daughter cards provide the following two functions e Interface to the backplane segments To be able to communicate with devices attached to any of the backplane segments DMM requires an interface to that segment The interface
171. as UTP cabling when used with appropriate connectors filters Figure 40 on page 102 shows the front panel of the IBM 8228 Chapter 2 Hubs 101 Figure 40 IBM 8228 Multistation Access Unit 2 6 2 Positioning 2 6 3 Functions The IBM 8228 is a simple unintelligent unpowered token ring hub targeted at small workgroup LANs that use IBM Cabling System Connectors ICS The IBM 8228 offers the following features e Up to thirty two 8228s can be joined together using the ring in ring out ports e Devices are simply plugged in to form a network The 8228 will detect the presence of a signal for each of the eight connections and will configure the ring e Allows up to 1 263 feet of maximum length with IBM Cabling System 330 feet with UTP Easily fits in a standard wiring closet e Fits on a 19 inch rack shelf or is wall mountable 2 7 IBM 8230 Token Ring Controlled Access Unit 102 Although comparisons and discussions on the compatibility of all the 8230 models exist this section focuses on the 8230 Controlled Access Unit Model 3 and 13 For information about 8230 Model 1 and Model 2 refer to LNM 1 0 IBM 8230 CAU and LMU 2 GG24 3754 The 8230 Model 3 is an intelligent token ring network wiring concentrator similar in form and function to the IBM 8230 Models 1 and 2 intended to provide enhanced levels of control and reliability for attaching workstations to the IBM token ring local area network IEEE 802 5 The Mod
172. ases so does the delay spread If antennae are 5 meters apart then the delay spread is typically 20 ns while at 30 meters apart it might be 35 ns but values over 100 ns have been reported The counter measure for stationary remote stations is selective antenna positioning which breaks the reflection causing the frequency selective fading 4 2 5 Cell Arrangement The placement of the base station is of prime importance when planning the installation of your network The clearance around the antenna should be sufficient to allow propagation of radio waves in all directions However if you want to radiate in a preferred direction you should position the front of the antenna the side with the IBM logo in that direction The highest directional sensitivity is oriented along this plane To maximize the cell coverage area place the base station antenna as close to the center of your cell as practical The following radiation pattern is typical for the IBM Wireless LAN antenna design Chapter 4 Wireless 243 IBM LOGO Poe ANTENNA Pei He transceiver back side Figure 112 Antenna Directivity in Azimuth and Elevation The power radiated by the antenna is proportional to its radiation pattern distributed over the surface of a large sphere with the antenna located at its center 4 2 6 Trouble Shooting List The following items are potenti
173. at the source conforms itself to the contract An available bit rate ABR class of service will be used by the IBM 8260 ATM subsystem to increase link utilization for bursty and unpredictable LAN data traffic In this service class no bandwidth at all will be reserved and the sources can transmit on a best effort basis grabbing as much bandwidth as they can without affecting the RB traffic As no bandwidth is allocated it is impossible to rely on Chapter 5 ATM Products 249 losses inside the network to solve congestion In fact every lost cell would trigger the retransmission of a whole frame which would result in more offered traffic and a very poor throughput The ABR service intends to implement a congestion control scheme which will not affect the RB traffic and will be fair treating similar sources in a similar way independently of their location inside the network To do that the IBM 8260 will support the ABR service with a loss free congestion control scheme relying on network backpressure in which stop start signals move hop by hop from congested areas towards the sources 8260 HUB E 8281 LAN Emulation Server ATM LANBridge 2 PS 2 with NetWare 3 12 or IBM LAN Server SERVER FARM 8282 2 ATM Concentrator LANHubs or Switches Fiber Links Server Host with LAN Adapter pl 25 Mbps A ATM WS Figure 113 ATM Connectivity 5 3 The IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intellig
174. ation interface that supports the use of CCITT X 25 protocols using either permanent or switched virtual circuits The interface can attach to DCEs that provide either an ElA RS 232D CCITT V 24 CCITT V 35 or CCITT X 21 physical interface DCEs providing CCITT V 35 or CCITT X 21 physical interface are supported at speeds up to 64 Kbps DCEs providing an EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 interface are supported at speeds up to 19 2 Kbps Each 6611 X 25 Adapter requires one DCE interface cable appropriate to the DCE interface in use which can be any one of the following 6611 X 25 adapter EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 Cable 3 Meter feature 2977 6611 X 25 Adapter EIA RS 232D CCITT V 24 Cable 6 Meter feature 2978 6611 X 25 Adapter CCITT V 35 Cable 3 Meter feature 2987 6611 X 25 Adapter CCITT V 35 Cable 6 Meter feature 2988 6611 X 25 Adapter CCITT X 21 Cable 3 Meter feature 2975 6611 X 25 Adapter CCITT X 21 Cable 6 Meter feature 2976 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Chapter 2 Hubs Industry trends show a dramatic increase in the use of intelligent workstations such as notebooks portable computers and desktop computers Important information is being moved from mainframes to these machines to provide efficient and cost effective client server functions This changing information infrastructure requires faster and more reliable access to data which in turn drives new applications based on multimedia incorporatin
175. ations with the correct ring speed settings can attach to the network Support for simultaneous 4 and 16 Mbps token ring networks on the module When ports 17 and 18 are configured as RI RO ports they are fully compliant with the IEEE 802 5C dual ring recovery standard Support for installation of one T MAC Support for installation of one Jitter Attenuator daughter card 8260 18 Port Active Module Switching Module This module is identical to the 18 port active per port switching module with the exception that it does not support the per port switching feature This means that all the ports on this module can only be assigned to the same segment on the backplane or can all be isolated 8260 20 Port Passive Module Switching Module This is a single slot module that supports 20 passive ports This is a module switching module which means that all the ports must be attached to the same segment The following are the main features of this module 20 ports with shielded RJ 45 connectors A single DPLL which is implemented on the module will remove the jitter before passing the signal to the 8260 backplane The module can be assigned to any of the 10 token ring segments on the ShuntBus or can be isolated Support for both UTP and STP cabling However you cannot mix both cabling types on the same module simultaneously Support for beacon recovery using the recovery ASIC which is implemented on the module Support for address to
176. aughter card f c 8914 is required for the 8260 module m Copper RI RO Without Repeater An 8230 copper RI RO port is also compatible to the RI RO ports of an 8228 the 8250 Fiber Repeater Module copper RI RO the 8250 MAU module f c 3820 and the token ring management modules Since these devices contain no repeaters drive distances are reduced according to normal token ring cabling rules depending on lobe length Our conclusion is that such a connection is not recommended because it does not take advantage of the benefits of the 8230 repeater function Chapter 2 Hubs 107 e 8230 RI RO modules are not compatible with 8218 8219 or 8220 to act as half of the repeaters e The ICS and RJ 45 RI RO ports interface with both 150 ohm STP cables or 100 120 ohm FTP UTP category 4 5 cables 100 ohm cables require impedance matching devices Figure 43 IBM Cabling System ICS Ring In Ring Out Module Figure 44 RJ 45 Ring In Ring Out Module 108 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Figure 45 Fiber Optics ST Ring In Ring Out Module Figure 46 ICS Ring In Fiber Ring Out Module Chapter 2 Hubs 109 Figure 47 Fiber Ring In ICS Ring Out Module 110 LIU Modules LIUs are for lobes the cables that run from a concentrator to workstations One special type of LIU is a remote LIU lt provides attachment for a remote LAM which in turn provides lobes for worksta
177. available are shielded twisted pair STP and unshielded twisted pair UTP which provide the adaptability for attachment to the media present at that location The adherence to standards allows its use in systems supporting the PCMCIA Standard Type II for communication over local area networks conforming to the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet V2 0 Standard The combination of high speed data transfer capability ease of use and ease of attachment to a high speed data source provide the user with functionality previously available only to desktop or floor standing systems The credit card adapter uses the following computer system software programs and PCMCIA services to operate e Required System Software LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM IBM or Microsoft DOS Version 5 0 or higher or IBM OS 2 Version 2 1 with Card Services 2 0 Ethernet network operating system software e Supported PCMCIA environments PCMCIA Card Services Version 2 0 IBM provided connectivity enablers for DOS provided with the credit card adapter The IBM provided connectivity enablers are used if the computer system does not support card services The installation program determines the operating environment and if required prompts the selection of appropriate enabler software 1 6 7 Ethernet Adapters Summary Table 2 Ethernet Adapters Summary The Ethernet adapter summary table is used to display the different types of Ethernet ad
178. be obtained using the shared RAM architecture The following are the primary disadvantages of the bus master DMA adapters e High system memory consumption For example in a DOS environment the NDIS drivers for the 16 4 Adapter Il may consume up to three times as much system memory as the drivers used for the shared RAM adapters While memory is always a consideration memory consumption is not so critical in the OS 2 environment For this reason it makes more sense to use these adapters in the OS 2 environment and avoid the DOS environment unless you are not memory constrained Remember that the bus master A adapter is not supported in the DOS environment Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 3 e Poor performance in certain DOS environments In the DOS environment the 16 4 Adapter Il and the LANStreamer Adapter are supported with NDIS and ODI drivers Poor performance may be seen in the NDIS environment when using LAN Support Program s DXMEOMOD SYS which is an 802 2 NDIS protocol driver This driver must be used when running 802 2 applications such as PC 3270 AS 400 PC Support DOS APPN and TCP IP V2 X for DOS when using the ASI 802 2 interface No on board logical link control LLC Since the adapter itself does not implement an LLC stack one must be written into the NDIS MAC driver or protocol driver if one is needed This means that additional system memory will be needed to implement the LLC stack This is not much of a conside
179. ber of nodes For maximum flexibility with your existing wiring schemes you can mix and match any combination of Quad BT or Quad B2 adapters up to the maximum of six per server and interconnect LANs on both media types through the adapter s card to card switching capabilities The adapters have support for the following Networking Operating Systems IBM OS 2 LAN Server and Novell NetWare 1 6 6 IBM PCMCIA Ethernet Adapters 16 The IBM Credit Card Adapter for Ethernet is available in the following two versions e 10Base T support e 10Base2 support The IBM Credit Card Adapter for Ethernet provides an interface between computer systems and Ethernet networks The credit card adapter is designed to operate in computer systems having Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA Release 2 0 Type Il slots The credit card adapter complies with PCMCIA and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 3 standards The Ethernet credit card adapter enables portable system users to fully participate in all LAN features such as device sharing plotters printers etc data and software retrieval from a server and beyond that access to a corporate database This enables applications previously reserved for desktop or floor standing systems to be candidates for running on a portable system The pervasiveness of local area networks in enterprises provides the connectivity source required The media choices
180. between two links on the same module or two different modules e Auto polarity detection This feature will automatically detect if you have erroneously reversed polarity of the cable during its assembly and will resolve the problem by reversing the polarity e Support for non 10Base T compliant devices This module allows you to disable link integrity which allows connection to some equipment that does not conform to the 10Base T standard Chapter 2 Hubs 185 186 8260 Ethernet 20 40 Port 10Base T Module These are single slot 20 port and two slot 40 port IEEE 802 3 repeater modules that comply with the 10Base T standard and support backbone and to the desk connectivity over unshielded twisted pair UTP as well as shielded twisted pair STP cabling These modules provide 20 or 40 shielded RJ 45 connectors for attaching 10Base T compliant devices using STP and or UTP cabling for distances of up to 100 m Note You can mix UTP and STP cabling on a single 20 40 port 10Base T module On the 20 40 port 10Base T modules all the ports are internally crossed over which allows you to connect them directly to 10Base T transceivers without using external crossover adapters These modules can also be used to provide UTP STP backbone connections between the 8260 and other 10Base T compliant hubs such as another 8260 8250 or 8224 The 24 40 port 10Base T modules provide the following features e Per port switching Each port can be conne
181. bling requirements 100 124 cabling requirements for the 8224 81 cabling system IBM 138 cascading mode 151 CC module 136 137 140 CCITT G 703 60 Index 303 CCITT continued V 24 61 62 V 35 60 61 62 v 36 60 X 21 60 61 62 X 25 62 cell arrangement 243 channel 235 Classical IP 247 clock module 225 226 colocated networks 242 communication adapter features design 59 maximum number supported 59 concentrator 136 139 concentrator control module configuration 178 configuration manager 144 congestion 206 connectivity features 77 146 control electronics 137 control point 257 control point card 252 copper cable 136 138 140 Credit Card Adapter 11 crossover cables 217 CRU 141 CSMA CA 231 233 customer replaceable unit 141 cutoff condition threshold 143 136 137 139 DA module 136 137 138 140 141 DAS 138 data link layer protocols 60 61 DatagLANce Network Analyzer 212 DCE 60 61 62 DECnet 191 195 dedicated media 217 delay spread 243 device attachment module DHC 138 Distributed Management 176 Distributed Management Module DMM 190 DIX 61 DMM front panel 179 DMM facilities 179 configuration 178 fault reporting 178 in band downloading 178 inventory 179 out of band downloading 178 power management 179 SNMP support 179 staging 179 statistics and fault reporting 178 136 140 163 179 304 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM DMM facilities continued Telnet suppo
182. bs and the IBM 6611 Router to provide enterprise wide connectivity for corporations The structure of IBM s Ethernet hub family with the 8222 is compared in Table 8 Table 8 IBM Ethernet Hub Comparison Customer Requirement Ethernet Hub Unmanaged and unmanageable 8222 Models 008 016 Unmanaged but manageable 8224 Model 001 Managed single protocol 8224 Model 002 Managed multiple protocol 8250 8260 Chapter 2 Hubs 75 2 4 IBM 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub The 8224 provides a flexible and comprehensive Ethernet network connectivity and management tool for a wide range of environments Each 8224 provides up to 17 ports of Ethernet connectivity sixteen 10Base T ports and one optional media expansion port for connecting to an existing 10Base2 10Base5 or fiber Ethernet network The 8224 is available in two models Model 001 and 002 Model 001 is an unmanaged unit that can be managed by an 8224 Model 002 in a stack Model 002 is an SNMP management unit that can manage up to nine Model 001s in a stack Up to ten 8224s can be stacked together for a total port count of 170 Stacked units can be separated by a distance of up to 250 feet In addition to the stackable function the 8224 does the following e Supports segmentation The 8224 stack can be divided into several segments collision domains Stacked 8224s can be segmented while maintaining management capability through a single management unit Model 002 The
183. can be done 1 Out of band Using a local or modem attached PC to the RS 232 port on the module 2 Inband Using an IP network The management facilities of the Interconnect Module allow you to do the following e Configure the module for bridging and or routing functions e Monitor traffic counters e Monitor diagnostics information e Monitor address table information for routing and bridging functions The Multiprotocol Interconnect Module consists of 1 Backplane Interface Module BIM This module provides the following functions e Connection to the ShuntBus and Enhanced TriChannel Ethernet 802 3 segments A DB 9 connector for local management e Housing for two additional I O cards 2 slot module only 2 Router Engine Module REM This module is installed on the BIM and provides housing for an 960 processor 3 I O cards available on the two slot module Up to two I O cards in any combination can be installed on the BIM to provide connections for up to two external token ring and or Ethernet segments Note The connectors on the token ring I O modules are via DB 9 connectors 192 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Figure 96 on page 193 shows the front view of the 1 slot and 2 slot Multiprotocol Interconnect Modules There are a number of activity and status LED displays on the front panel of the Multiprotocol Interconnect Module that are used to show the information a onu 2 we STATU
184. cascade capabilities LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM ETHERMET TACHA ELE HUE CO 7 o i 1 id E g a diig L mi a i A M IH our f H b1 ER e e EA o an ay ee ETHERNET STACHAELE HIE C a o El ME e O Hub 2 Oo fe P tg dk et ak ow He OM AE HE opoaneweoeennnanaaagd Hub a 5S e we e y OONN Y a ETHERNET STACHAELE HUE THE o pepe be ohh a ugang a 0 O a MEF e O Hub 4 O Tt 7 ETHERMET TACH AELE HUE od o e me ej a PARADA TL 3 Hub 5 SEGMENT 1 Figure 29 An IBM 8224 Stack Unsegmented This example shows a stack of five hubs none of which are segmented Thus all are connected together in one segment or collision domain through the Ethernet bus in the hub expansion port cables CORRE ca ETHERHET car a g d 556 Hub 1 Isolated o Segment 1 ETHERHET T4ACKAELE HIE EY o o hedeeheeeeeeR UE Hub 2 Isolated O qa vw e mer Era oc i fen gt ETHERMET TACH AELE HUE z a d Hub 3 Isolated a Segment 3 Segment 2 DE gt ETHERMET STACHAELE HUE o SEE LCECLCO N Hub 4 Isolated oO Lat EET e ue d ONONO o e a ae Hub 5 Isolated ETHERNET STACHAELE HUE al I AAA ea ay E Segment 5 Figure 30 An IBM 8224 Stack Fully Segm
185. cause it is not compatible with DXMEOMOD SYS Support has been added for application programs running in Microsoft Windows or with memory managers Most of the LAN Support Program files can be loaded into upper memory blocks to save low memory for other uses The LAN Support Program has been tested with Windows and memory managers only under DOS 5 0 and DOS J5 0 Please refer to the LSP user s guide for processor requirements When the device drivers DXCOMOD SYS and DXMGOMOD SYS are used together both the PC network adapter and the token ring network adapter can be set up as primary in the computer hardware This configuration was not supported in earlier versions The Installation Aid has been redesigned to provide easier NDIS adapter configuration and does not disturb existing configuration information for other protocol drivers in the PROTOCOL INI file It also preserves statements in Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 35 CONFIG SYS that load device drivers and other programs into upper memory such as DEVICEHIGH 1 8 8 IBM LAN Client IBM LAN Client provides program interfaces to support network application programs using selected IBM token ring adapters lt allows a client workstation to communicate with an IBM LAN server at Version 3 0 and 4 0 or with a Novell NetWare server at Version 2 15c or higher or to use TCP IP applications The IBM and Novell client code is included with this package with the exception of PING TCP
186. ccuracy in a specific situation there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will be obtained elsewhere Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and or other countries AIX AnyNet APPN ARTour AS 400 AT DatagLANce ESCON EtherStreamer Extended Services Extended Services for OS 2 HelpCenter IBM LAN Distance LANStreamer NetFinity NetView Nways Operating System 2 OS 2 OS 400 Personal Computer AT Personal System 2 PowerPC Presentation Manager PS 2 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 PS ValuePoint RISC System 6000 291 292 RS 6000 Streamer System 36 TURBOWAYS ValuePoint 400 S 390 SystemView Trouble Ticket Ultimedia VM ESA The following terms are trademarks of other companies C bus is a trademark of Corollary Inc PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company and is used by IBM Corporation under license UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Microsoft Windows and the Windows 95 logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Advantis Apple AppleTalk EtherTalk LocalTalk Macintosh TokenTalk ARCnet AT amp T Attachmate Banyan Cisco Compaq DCE DEC DECnet Digital VT100 EtherLink NDIS 3Com He
187. ceive incoming signals via the acquired clock of the incoming link When there are no frames to transmit a station will transmit and expect to receive a continuous idle stream for example all zeros This idle stream provides a continuous signal to the receiving port for clock synchronization and serves as a means of detecting and or reporting a link failure or disconnection All frames can be transmitted immediately upon proper setup to the MAC interface without having to wait for token access A maximum frame length of 4500 bytes is recommended for full duplex operation primarily to both reduce buffer requirements in the LAN switch and end to end frame transit delays due to Chapter 3 Switches 221 blocking or store and forward queueing delays A station may maintain multiple transmit queues in order to prioritize local access to the full duplex link However first in first out frame order within a given priority must be maintained within a station or LAN switch The low order three bits of the token ring frame control field have been designated as the priority bits of a given frame These bits may be used for priority transmit queueing A full duplex station will receive all frames that are properly formatted and contain the appropriate destination address When in full duplex mode the majority of the normal token ring MAC level protocols are no longer required and can thus be suspended Since many of these MAC protocols depend upon spec
188. ces e The 10Base T ports will drive up to 100 meters over 100 Ohm UTP EIA 568 Category 3 4 or 5 cables 100 Ohm or 120 Ohm FTP Category 5 media or 150 Ohm STP type 1 6 9 1A 6A or 9A cables The 150 Ohm cabling requires impedance matching baluns at each end of the 150 Ohm portion of the link e The AUI port will drive up to 50 meters over AUI cable At the end of the AUI cable an AUI transceiver is required to connect to network media such as thick coax or optical fiber e The BNC port will drive up to 185 meters over coax cable This port requires a T connector provided with the 8222 to connect to coax cabling Note The Nways workgroup hub supports outdoor cable runs only over optical fiber cabling Ethernet connections over copper cables are restricted to indoor wiring only Figure 17 shows the IBM Nways 8222 Workgroup Hub in a typical network configuration of two small workgroups located closely to each other via UTP cabling 10BaseT UTP Cascace Link Figure 17 8222 in a Typical IEEE 802 3 Network 2 3 3 1 Using Nways Workgroup Hubs in 10Base T Networks Using a single Nways Workgroup Hub Model 008 you can build a 10Base T network that consists of 2 to 9 devices A single Nways Workgroup Hub Model 016 can be used to build a network that consists of 2 to 18 devices Chapter 2 Hubs 71 An Nways workgroup hub can be connected to other Nways workgroup hubs and other types of 10Base T hubs through its 10Ba
189. ckplane are reserved for non data traffic Included in these pins are the management LAN MLAN and the serial control interface SCI The Management LAN MLAN The MLAN is a dedicated 10 Mbps Ethernet bus which connects the DMM distributed management module and all the media access control daughter cards E MAC or T MAC The MAC daughter cards connect to their respective networks T MAC to token ring and E MAC to Ethernet and provide statistics about those networks to the DMM via the MLAN Also the IP stack provided by the MAC daughter card is accessed by the upper layer protocol stacks within the DMM SNMP Telnet through the MLAN The E MAC can be installed on either the EC DMM or the 8260 media modules When installed on the 8260 media modules E MAC can collect statistics about all the Ethernet segments on the backplane but will not be able to collect per port or per module statistics for the 8250 modules However if the E MAC is installed on the EC DMM it will be able to collect a full range of statistical information about any segment that it is attached to regardless of whether that segment is using parallel or serial addressing This is because the EC DMM provides parallel to serial address translation Note that E MAC is always able to collect full statistics about 8260 modules irrespective of which type of module EC DMM or 8260 media modules the E MAC is installed on and which networks the 8260 modules are attached to LAN
190. crete block wall 41 5 for brick wall exp 2 for Line Of Site 1 2 per meter for office furniture 2 per wall for double plaster walls 15 for floor with corrugated steel 4 to 8 for various types of floors Example of semi open office Example of closed office FADE MARGIN N 1 2 3 6 10 20 Distance From Transmitter in Meters Figure 111 Receive Level versus Distance from Transmitter at 100mW 2 4GHz Table 25 Page 1 of 2 Typical Values of Multiplicative Path Loss versus Free Space Environment obstacle description Path loss ratio versus free space exponent 2 Office LOS 4 Office OBS 1 to 2 Concrete block wall 3to5 Chapter 4 Wireless 239 Table 25 Page 2 of 2 Typical Values of Multiplicative Path Loss versus Free Space Environment obstacle description Path loss ratio versus free space exponent 2 One floor separation 3 to 4 Storage rack with textile products 1 5 to 3 Storage rack with paper products 1 2 to 2 Storage rack with metal parts 2to 4 Note LOS Line of sight OBS Obstructed 4 2 1 2 Propagation through Floors Although it is possible to propagate through floors under certain conditions it is not recommended as the path loss will be very high The path loss is not directly a multiple of the number of floors as other phenomena will occur including diffraction or reflection from buildings on the other side of the street for example 4 2
191. ct either 115V or 230V Select Receptacles Apart from the power receptacle there are three 9 pin and four 25 pin D shell receptacles at the rear of the 8230 base unit The 9 pin D shell and the left most three 25 pin D shell are for communication with LAMs They are labeled 1 2 and 3 respectively The right most 25 pin D shell receptacle female is for connection to a modem via an RS 232 cable or to an ASCII terminal via a null modem cable It is labeled EIA 232 This port provides out of band management functions 2 7 1 2 Attachable Modules Attachable modules come in the following two types e Actually insert into the base unit compartment e Attach to the base unit via two cables plugged into the 9 pin and the 25 pin D shells 106 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM The former can be RI RO modules or lobe insertion unit modules The latter are lobe attachment modules This section shows these modules in drawings and provide descriptions to their functions and usage RI RO Modules RI RO modules extend the main ring path of an 8230 to a second 8230 or other devices that have RI RO interfaces with matching cabling characteristics m Co Requisite The MAC daughter card dual ring redundancy feature is a co requisite for installing any RI RO module f c 2029 for Model 3 pre installed for Model 13 e One and only one RI RO module can be installed in an 8230 003 or 013 It fits only in slot
192. cted to one of the eight segments on the backplane Also the module provides eight isolated segments to which the individual ports on the module can be attached This means that the ports on these modules can be connected to a maximum of eight segments which can be a combination of backplane and isolated segments e Support for 2 E MACs e Support for 1 Ethernet security card e Support for port redundancy You can set up redundancy between two links on the same module or two different modules Note that port redundancy is supported between different types of modules e Support for non 10Base T compliant devices 8260 Ethernet 10 Port 10Base FB Module This is is a 10 port module that complies with the 10Base FB standard and supports backbone and to the desk connectivity over fiber optic cabling This module supports 50 125 62 5 125 85 125 or 100 140 micron duplex fiber rated at 150 MHz or better and can be ordered with either ST FC or SMA type connectors In general on 62 5 micron cable you can go up to a maximum of 4000 meters when the module is set to operate at high power mode point to point using 8250 and or 8260 10Base FB modules The module provides the following features e Per port switching Each port can be connected to one of the eight segments on the backplane Also the module provides four isolated segments to which the individual ports on the module can be attached You have the freedom to assign any of the 10 por
193. d Figure 19 8222 Hubs in a Network with Coaxial Segments The workstations are attached to the 8222 hubs via UTP in the above scenario In Figure 20 the Nways workgroup hubs are connected to 10Base5 segments B and D and fiber is used to interconnect those segments The maximum segment length of this fiber connection C is two kilometers 10BASE5 10BASE5 Legend Segment Segment LA Repeater Transceiver T Terminator or Terminator and Ground Figure 20 8222 Hubs in a 10Base5 and Fiber Network In Figure 21 on page 74 the Nways workgroup hubs are connected via fiber The maximum segment length of this fiber connection is two kilometers Chapter 2 Hubs 73 Transceiver 10Base FL Fiber Cascade Link 2km Was 10Baze FL Trnscewer SN i A AAAA Figure 21 8222 Hubs Connected with Fiber The workstations are attached to the 8222 hubs with UTP in the figure above Remember the following guidelines when using Nways workgroup hubs in networks that contain different cabling types e Adhere to any network constraints described in your 10Base5 10Base2 or 10Base F product documentation e Ensure that adding an Nways workgroup hub to a coaxial or optical fiber segment will not cause the maximum device limit to be exceeded e A path between two devices should not contain a 10Base2 segment between two 10Base5 segments 2 3 3 3 Cabling Requirements Problems with LANs are frequentl
194. d with a number of significant functions that enhance customers ability to manage the traffic that flows through their IBM EtherStreamer Switches extend their flexibility in constructing switched local area networks and make it easier to remotely manage their IBM EtherStreamer Switches from a central location These new functions are included in Release 1 1 of the IBM EtherStreamer Switch microcode Address Filters Often for either security or traffic load management reasons it may be desirable to control the traffic that flows through the IBM EtherStreamer Switch Address filtering on the IBM EtherStreamer Switch provides the ability to filter or inhibit frame flow at port of entry The IBM EtherStreamer Switch can be configured with a filter table consisting of LAN MAC addresses and Chapter 3 Switches 207 a related switch port number Ethernet frames destined for any of the specified addresses sent from any station on the associated switch port will not be forwarded to any other switch port These addresses may be unicast multicast or broadcast addresses e Virtual Switch Support It may sometimes be desirable to construct a switch network of less than eight ports That is again for security or traffic load management reasons it may be desirable to group switch ports so that no traffic including broadcasts flows between the ports within the group and any other switch ports outside the group This capability may sometimes
195. dapters and Support 33 Application PC3270 EMU DOS LAN REQUESTER AS 400 PS SUPPORT STN MGR TCP IP APP LAN SUPPORT PROGRAM SOCKET LAN Support Program Interrupt Arbitrator NETBIOS Intertaces NETBIOS TO 802 2 Interfaces Native PPC Network IEEE 802 2 Protocol Driver Token Ring Support IEEE 802 5 Support f I f IEEE 802 3 and Tnterfacel Ethernet DIX Version 2 0 Support NDIS Interface LLC Token Ring PC Network Ethernet Token Ring FDDI OEM Deep Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Figure 7 DOS Transport for IBM LAN Adapters 1 8 7 IBM Local Area Network Support Program LSP Version 1 3 4 The Local Area Network LAN Support Program Version 1 3 4 for DOS PTF UR39824 has been extended in conjunction with the previous release of LSP 1 3 3 to support the following adapters e IBM LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter IBM FDDI Fiber Base Adapter A e IBM FDDI Copper Base Adapter A IBM FDDI Fiber Extender Adapter A e IBM FDDI Copper Extender Adapter A e IBM Token Ring Network 16 4 Adapter II e IBM Token Ring 16 4 Credit Card Adapter 34 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e IBM Credit Card Adapter for Ethernet e IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet IBM LAN Adapter A for Ethernet e IBM 3278 3279 Emulation Adapter with peer communication e IBM 3270 Connectio
196. dapters functions in a variety of environments Figure 4 on page 27 explains the most common environments in which the adapters are used The diagram shows the following three DOS environments e Native Shared RAM Adapter Support This support is for the shared RAM token ring adapters that have the LLC 802 2 protocol support resident on the adapter The adapter handler code which is currently shipped with LAN Support Program DXMCOMOD SYS provides the 802 2 interface for the applications This interface is in the Command Control Block structure as defined in the LAN Technical Reference SC30 3383 3 For DOS examples of applications are NetBIOS DXMTOMOD SYS that LSP provides 3270 emulation and AS 400 PC Support 5250 emulation e NDIS Support NDIS support is used for shallow adapter environments with all adapter types except for the PC Network which is not supported in a DOS NDIS environment The appropriate NDIS MAC drivers support various NDIS protocol stacks An example of an NDIS protocol stack is the IEEE 802 2 support provided by LSP DXMEOMOD SYS This protocol also provides a CCB interface as did the DXMCOMOD SYS module in the shared RAM environment Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 25 e Novell ODI Requester For the DOS Novell requester environment the ODI MAC driver supports the ODI protocol IPXODI COM along with the LSL module that is not shown in the picture The IPX protocol provides support for the NetWare request
197. dapters supported 34 IBM LAN Client 36 memory overview 42 Novell Requester support 38 MAC addresses 205 MAC daughter cards 181 mail icon 144 maintenance facility program Management Buses 170 Management LAN MLAN 170 Serial Control Interface SCI 170 Management Information Base 144 FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent components 158 IBM FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent 157 MIB 2 support 258 subtrees supported by FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent 160 Management LAN MLAN 136 140 142 143 170 178 Manchester encoding scheme 221 mapping 179 master port 138 MAU Multistation Access Unit 101 media speed 212 MF see also maintenance facility program 142 MIB 148 144 Micro Channel description 4 microcode diskette 144 MLAN Management LAN 170 Mobitex 233 module switching 171 monitoring port 211 multi mode fiber 150 multi mode optical fiber 138 multipath fading 240 multiple wired LAN cells 236 multiport bridge 212 Multiprotocol Interconnect Module 163 191 backplane interface module BIM 192 bridging functions 193 DECnet Phase IV routing 195 filtering database 194 front view 192 IP routing 194 IPX routing 195 management facilities 192 OSPF implementation 195 processor 192 RIP implementation 194 Router Engine Module REM 192 routing functions 194 SNMP support 192 software download 192 source route transparent bridging 193 translational bridging 193 transparent bridging 193 Multistation Access Unit MAU 101 N Nakagami 240 NAP Network
198. data on that port lf an unauthorized user is detected on a port the E SEC card may be configured to perform one or more of the following Report the time and port on which the intrusion took place along with the MAC address of the intruder Jam the intruder s port so that the intruder is not able to exchange data with the other stations on the network Disable the port to which the intruder is connected Authorized users on each port are known to the E SEC card via the network security address table The contents of this table can be created and or modified using manual and or auto learning procedures Each entry in the network security address table contains the 8260 slot and port number as well as the MAC address of the station authorized to transmit data on that port You may configure the E SEC card to either check only the MAC address of the sending adapter or both the MAC address and the port to which the sending station is attached Eavesdropping protection This feature prevents unauthorized users from examining the contents of packets destined for another port by preventing all the nodes except the intended recipient from receiving the packets transmitted on the network Eavesdropping and intrusion protection functions can be enabled or disabled separately for each port Various ports on a single network may have different security settings 2 11 8 2 Token Ring Modules The 8260 token ring modules can only be
199. datory to operate the machine but you ought to have at least one module installed If you have an 8260 with only ATM functions ATM switch control point module and ATM concentration modules you do not need to have a DMM because all the ATM configuration and management is done through the ATM switch control point module However installing a DMM is desirable when you need to monitor chassis components such as power supplies or temperature Also a DMM is required if you want to run the Hub Manager Program for AIX V2 and display the hub view with module face plates If you want to manage the 8260 ATM modules and the ATM network from NetView for AIX you need the IBM ATM Campus Manager for AIX This program provides you with topology display resources configuration statistics display and other value add functions for management of ATM networks The Hub Manager Program for AIX is not required for that purpose 5 5 1 1 Out of Band Download In case of code update of the ATM switch control point module through the local console port out of band download the 8260 Universal Code Download kit should be ordered This kit is not needed when performing in band file transfer 5 5 2 Electronic Customer Support IBM offers you the capability for remote service support You need to provide a communication line and an AT COMMAND V32 compatible modem such as the IBM 7855 or equivalent to allow remote maintenance and service This will provide you w
200. de The LCD display normally shows the module operating state Chapter 2 Hubs 179 180 Console and Auxiliary Ports There are two DB 9 ports on the face plate of the DMM The upper port is called the console port and is used for attaching a terminal locally or via a modem to the DMM This terminal is used to provide out of band management capability for the 8260 Three types of users can be used to access DMM e User This type of user can view the configuration of the 8260 and all the installed modules and daughter cards Additionally this user can obtain statistics about the various components of the network Administrator This type of user can perform all the user functions Additionally this user can modify the configuration of the hub and all the installed modules and daughter cards e Superuser This type of user can perform all the functions of the administrator Additionally this user can create new users and perform maintenance functions such as down loading new software to the DMM and other modules 2 11 7 2 The EC DMM Ethernet Carrier Distributed Management Module The EC DMM is a single slot management module that has the mounting ability to carry up to 6 Ethernet MAC daughter cards The EC DMM has 1 module status LED a 4 character display with a display control toggle switch 24 Ethernet network status LEDs and 2 serial port connectors Figure 93 on page 181 shows the layout of the DMM front panel L
201. done via an attached DOS station Access to the 8244 is through the serial port which is located on the back panel Concentrator management is made possible via the imbedded SNMP agent This agent will maintain the concentrator s FDDI MIB II parameters for use by NetView for AIX or any original equipment manufacturer OEM SNMP based network management system Network management is further enhanced by using the included FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent This proxy agent will convert SMT to SNMP protocols and allow LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM NetView for AIX or any other OEM SNMP based network management system to manage all stations SMT level 6 2 or 7 3 connected to the FDDI segment The Proxy Agent is an OS 2 application and can reside and operate in any OS 2 workstation that runs on the same FDDI segment as the 8244 It is not separately orderable The Proxy Agent and system diskette are available through the IBM support organization 2 10 5 1 IBM FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent FDDI includes a station management SMT protocol supported by each device attaching to the FDDI ring A management station on the FDDI ring can use the SMT protocol to monitor and control the FDDI devices residing on that ring However since the SMT protocol cannot be sent across bridges or routers it cannot be used directly to provide off ring management of FDDI devices The Proxy Agent supports these SMT flows to monitor and control each device attach
202. dows NT and Windows 95 The PCI Ethernet Adapter provides support for symmetrical multiprocessors SMP and all personal computers with PCI slots in addition to EISA ISA or Micro Channel slots The IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter meets FCC Class A criteria when configured with cabling that meets IBM specifications and operates on all PCI bus computers that comply with PCI specifications The IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter operates with the following operating systems and network environments e IBM or MS DOS 3 3 4 0 and 5 0 MS DOS 6 0 IBM PC DOS 6 1 and later IBM LAN Support Program 1 33 and later LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM DOS NDIS device drivers included on the diskette packaged with the IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter DOS transport modules for DOS 802 2 and NetBIOS applications e IBM OS 2 Standard Edition OS 2 SE 1 30 IBM OS 2 Extended Edition OS 2 EE 1 30 2 IBM OS 2 2 0 and later or IBM OS 2 Warp 3 0 IBM OS 2 Extended Services 1 0 IBM OS 2 LAN Server 3 0 and 4 0 IBM OS 2 Communications Manager 2 OS 2 and DOS NDIS device drivers included on the diskette packaged with the IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter Note The use of Communications Manager 2 on a LAN requires the LAN Adapter and Protocol Support LAPS function Communications Manager 2 1 1 includes IBM Network Transport Services 2 NTS 2 which provides the LAPS function Communications Manager 2 1 0 does not include NTS 2 and does n
203. drives the CBC and optionally a TIC3 that connects up to 500 active PUs Maximum Four in combination with the ESCON Processors 5500 3745 Token Ring Coupler Type 3 TIC3 5601 This feature provides attachment to one 16 4 Mbps IBM Token Ring LAN The TIC3 provides the MAC support of the token ring adapter In a 3745 Model 41A or 61A with two active ACF NCPs a TIC3 can be activated by one of the two ACF NCPs and the second TIC3 associated with the same TRP can be activated by the second ACF NCP Maximum Two per Token Ring Processor 5600 one Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 53 for the TRP position H SC 9604 of a 3746 Model 900 attached to a 3745 Model 41A or 61A In this case the TIC3 is in coupler position H SC 8627 1 13 AS 400 LAN Adapters 54 This section explains the features and functions currently available that allow the AS 400 to participate in a LAN environment The AS 400 provides token ring Ethernet and FDDI attachment AS 400 16 4 Mbps Token Ring Network Adapter HP 2619 The 16 4 Mbps Token Ring Network Adapter HP feature provides a single attachment to either a 16 Mbps or a 4 Mbps IBM token ring network The feature consists of an adapter card internal code which supplies IEEE 802 5 media access control MAC and IEEE 802 2 logical link control LLC functions and an external 2 5 meter 8 foot cable The standard IBM cabling system patch cables can increase the length where necessary OS 400 co
204. dule 162 172 installation consideration 140 Ethernet modules 163 184 maintenance facility program 142 hardware description 162 ring attachment module 138 intelligent cooling subsystem 175 status code 141 intelligent power management subsystem 174 8244 Management and Controller Modules 190 cabling 146 150 management daughter cards 163 cascading mode 151 management modules 163 class A station 151 154 MIB installation 260 class B station 150 151 152 Modules and Daughter Cards 184 compared with other IBM hubs 64 optional features 163 configuration 148 payload area 171 configuration editor 149 payload modules 161 customizing the 148 positioning with 8222 75 DEE COM program 148 positioning with 8244 161 dual attachment concentrator DAC 150 rack mounting kit 162 dual homing mode 153 standard components 162 FDDI concepts 145 token ring modules 163 188 FDDI workgroup concentrator 145 TR Ethernet ATM LAN Bridge Module 254 fiber connections 154 UTOPIA 1 ATM Carrier Modules 256 front view 146 8260 Model 010 164 installing the 148 8260 Backplane 164 keyed fiber connectors 155 8260 Model 017 164 LED general 147 8271 LED port 147 8271 individual port LEDs 206 management 156 address filters 207 Model 06 146 BOOTP TFTP support 209 Model 12 146 compatibility 207 models 201 EtherPipe support 208 number of ports 146 full duplex 206 operating modes 150 individual port LEDs 206 positioning 161 microcode 207 resetting the 149 status LEDs 206 SNMP agent 15
205. dware to the external AUI transceiver are not provided by IBM To support Ethernet coaxial cable a BNC T connector is required to connect to the 10Base2 coax connector on the adapter Limitations F C 2245 is not supported with F C 3000 or 3010 Field installable Yes Maximum 4 FDDI Adapter F C 2300 This adapter provides attachment to a 100 Mbps FDDI local area network LAN that conforms to the American National Standard Institute X3T9 5 ANSI and the International Standards Organization 9314 ISO architectures Two feature slots are required to implement the dual ring station that is supported in the 3172 003 Two multimode 62 5 125 micron FDDI jumper cables are required to connect the adapter into the FDDI ring These jumper cables are not provided with this feature and must be ordered separately Refer to the IBM Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide GA27 3943 and IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3892 for more information about the jumper cables planning design and installation of optical fiber cabling systems Jumper cables are the responsibility of the customer and may be ordered from your local authorized IBM cabling distributor or by calling 1 800 IBM 2468 in the United States and 1 800 465 1234 in Canada For EMEA customers cables are available from Montpellier through CE offerings The prerequisites are Rack Mount Assembly F C 2500 is mandatory as well as installation in an
206. e IBM Nways 8222 hubs fully comply with the IEEE 802 3 repeater specification including the repeater segment partition and jabber lockup functions 2 3 1 Technical Description The IBM Nways 8222 is designed as a customer setup CSU product It consists of logic circuit board s and an internal modular power supply mounted in a protective metal enclosure The unit is connected to the power source via a standard detachable three conductor power attachment cord The 8222 has the following features e Cascadable for large networks through AUI BNC or 10Base T ports e Port auto partitioning capability The IBM Nways 8222 will partition disable a port AUI BNC or 10Base T from further transmissions to the network if either of the following conditions occur 32 consecutive collision causing frames are received Collision conditions existing continuously for a time between 1024 and 2048 bit times While the port is disabled transmissions from the network to that device are maintained The port is re enabled when a clean non colliding transmission is received from or sent to that port e Jabber protection The IBM Nways 8222 disables transmission when a node transmits continuously for 65 5 milliseconds 65536 bit times Transmission is re enabled and normal operation resumes after 96 bit times e Automatic polarity reversal detection and correction on 10Base T ports hub receive pair only e Status information LEDs
207. e T Module The 8260 Ethernet 24 Port 10Base T Module is a 24 port IEEE 802 3 repeater module that complies with the 10Base T standard and supports backbone and to the desk connectivity over unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling This module provides two 50 pin Telco type connectors Each Telco connector can be connected to an external 12 port harmonica Each port on the harmonica provides an RJ 45 connector for attaching 10Base T compliant devices using UTP cabling for distances of up to 100 m All 24 ports are internally crossed over which allows you to connect them directly to 10Base T transceivers without using external crossover adapters The module can also be used to provide a UTP backbone connection between the 8260 and other 10Base T compliant hubs such as another 8260 8250 or 8224 The module provides the following features e Per port switching Each port can be connected to one of the eight segments on the backplane Also the module provides eight isolated segments to which the individual ports on the module can be attached e Support for 1 E MAC This module provides the mounting for one E MAC The E MAC can be assigned to any of the Ethernet segments on the backplane or any of the isolated segments on this module Note that the E MAC mounted on this module cannot collect per port or per module statistics about the 8250 modules e Support for 1 Ethernet Security Card e Support for port redundancy You can set up redundancy
208. e address table aging parameters for each switch port in addition to the global aging parameters used in the Model 001 SNMP management of the IBM 8271 Model 108 is supported using IEEE 802 3 frames in addition to Ethernet Version 2 frames as was required on the Model 001 Full duplex operation can be set remotely was front panel only The configuration can be made remotely using BOOTP Telnet The 8271 now supports BOOTP TFTP for remote loading in RFC 951 compliant environments 3 2 212 IBM 8272 LANStreamer Switch The 8272 switch provides the ability to forward token ring frames among up to eight shared token ring segments via token ring twisted pair UTP STP media using RJ 45 connectors Similar in function to a multiport bridge the 8272 forwards token ring frames from one of the eight ports to another and it is able to forward token ring frames at media speeds With a highly parallel internal design optimized for performance the 8272 is able to maintain media speed frame transfer between each of the possible four distinct pairs of ports simultaneously This feature allows the 8272 to provide an aggregate bandwidth of up to 64 Mbps switching among eight half duplex ports Networks with traffic patterns able to take full advantage of the 8272 could sustain throughput equivalent to four 16 Mbps token rings Figure 101 on page 213 shows the IBM 8272 LANStreamer Switch LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and A
209. e bandwidth of up to 128 Mbps performance not often found in products in this price range Each port on the 8272 is configured for full duplex token ring operation via the console or SNMP management facilities Full duplex token ring LAN stations are directly connected to the IBM 8272 without the need for an intervening concentrator using a common token ring cable Full duplex token ring requires a full duplex capable token ring adapter such as the IBM Auto LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter IBM Dual LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter or the IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapter While existing servers may not be currently equipped with adapters capable of full duplex token ring upgrading to adapters capable of full duplex token ring may be the most cost effective way to double network access bandwidth given server slot constraints and the re usability of non full duplex adapters elsewhere in the user s network The IBM LANStreamer Switch Provide a cost effective alternative for addressing customers requirements for interconnecting token ring LAN segments and for improving the performance of token ring networks Transport token ring frames among up to eight token ring LAN segments each connected to either a shared or dedicated LAN segment Bandwidth to the single LAN station on a dedicated LAN segment can be doubled from the usual 16 Mbps to up to 32 Mbps by using the full duplex capabilities of the IBM LANStreamer Switch and full duplex token ring adapt
210. e based on the LANStreamer chip set a token ring implementation developed by IBM This chip set provides unparalleled performance approaching the theoretical maximum capabilities of 16 Mbps token ring as well as several important new features Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 7 8 32 Bit Bus Master Interface The LANStreamer adapters provide a 32 bit bus master interface to the Micro Channel supporting both 32 bit addressing and 32 bit data moves LAN Streamer s bus mastering capabilities free the system CPU from having to move data between the LAN adapter and system memory LANStreamer handles this task freeing the system CPU for other work and resulting in significantly lower system CPU utilization than shared RAM adapters such as Shorty With 32 bit addressing the adapter is able to directly address 4 GB system memory As the amount of data kept on servers has increased the size of the file cache needed on the server has also increased Today servers often require more than the 16 megabytes of system memory which can be directly accessed by 16 bit bus master adapters which have 24 bit addressing LANStreamer 32 s 32 bit addressing allows it to support these servers as well as other applications which have hefty system memory requirements LANStreamer s adapters are capable of moving data across the Micro Channel over four times as fast as competitive 16 bit bus master adapters This high transfer rate is achieved through two impro
211. e customer provided The Ethernet adapter has a BNC connector for attachment to the 10Base2 network A BNC T connector is also provided The cable to attach to the 10Base2 network is customer provided The Ethernet adapter has an RJ 45 connector for attachment to the 10Base T network The cable to attach to the 10Base T network is customer provided The Ethernet adapter and properly configured Configuration Support C Release 4 0 Licensed Internal Code may be used for three different functions 1 alternate IML configuration 2 SNA gateway 3 additional TCP IP host access Note Configuration Support C Release 4 is intended only for 3174s with Ethernet capability that is feature code 3045 is installed or the 3174 is a Model 14R 24R or 64R Configuration Support C Release 3 provides the same functions as Release 4 for 3174s without Ethernet capability Release 4 is not available for 3174s that do not have Ethernet capability 1 When used for the Alternate IML function 3174 models 11L 11R 12L 12R 13R 21H 21L 21R 22L 22R EMEA only 23R 61R 62R or 63R can operate in an alternate configuration as can models 14R 24R or 64R Dependent 3270 CUT and ASCII terminals can access multiple hosts TCP IP Telnet 3270 SNA via the Ethernet LAN 2 When used for the SNA gateway SNA traffic is passed between local and remote SNA hosts and Ethernet LAN attached terminals for example 3174 DSPU attached workstations and intelligent
212. e manuals It is therefore assumed that the reader will refer to these sources for more in depth information if required These documents are intended for customers IBM technical professionals services specialists marketing specialists and marketing representatives working in networking and in particular the local area network environments Details on installation and performance of particular products will not be included in these books as this information is available from other sources Some knowledge of local area networks as well as an awareness of the rapidly changing intelligent workstation environment is assumed How This Redbook Is Organized The redbook is organized as follows e Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support This chapter describes LAN adapters for PCs and other IBM equipment as well as LAN support programs and LAN driver information e Chapter 2 Hubs This chapter describes hubs and their functions in the LAN environment e Chapter 3 Switches This chapter describes switches and their functions in the LAN environment e Chapter 4 Wireless This chapter describes wireless technology and products avaliable in the LAN environment e Chapter 5 ATM Products This chapter describes ATM products and their functions in the LAN environment O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 ix The Team That Wrote This Redbook This redbook was produced by a team of specialists from around the world worki
213. e of the installed cabling does not match that for UTP or FTP for FDDI that is 100 ohms 2 10 4 1 8244 Cabling Examples The 8244 can be used in different ways in an FDDI network as shown in the following sections Standard Mode Figure 78 on page 151 shows how the 8244 can be used to integrate up to ten class B stations to the FDDI ring converting it into a tree structure This operating mode uses two different port types LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Ports A and B are used to connect the concentrator to the FDDI dual ring the concentrator operates as a class A station in the ring Up to ten M ports connect the concentrator master to stations slaves FDDI Ring 10 Stations Maxim um Figure 78 8244 Standard Mode Integrating Single Attachment Stations Cascading Mode Figure 79 on page 152 shows how the 8244 concentrator supports the use of cascaded concentrators with up to eleven class B ports per concentrator By using cascaded concentrators you can configure extensive tree structures of up to 500 stations depending on the standard Chapter 2 Hubs 151 FDDI Ring a pa Figure 79 8244 Cascading Mode Using Cascaded Concentrators To use the cascading mode you must reconfigure the 8244 as described in 2 10 3 2 Customizing the 8244 Concentrator on page 148 Stand Alone Mode Figure 80 on page 153 shows how the 8244 concentrator can be used in stand alone mode to
214. e of the resources called a token ring path There are 15 token ring paths on the Enhanced TriChannel Each token ring path utilizes four pins on the Enhanced TriChannel When you assign an 8250 token ring module to one of the token ring networks on the Enhanced TriChannel the 8260 will automatically allocate one of the available token ring paths to this module The number of token ring paths used by a single token ring network on the Enhanced TriChannel equals the number of token ring modules on that network On the ShuntBus in addition to the two dedicated Ethernet segments there are ten token ring segments Unlike the Enhanced TriChannel there is no concept of token ring paths on the ShuntBus Instead there are ten physical rings on the backplane Each of these rings is a set of six pins which is routed from slot to slot on the backplane and is completed across each slot via a self shorting connector At the end of the backplane the signal path is returned from slot 17 to slot 1 In this manner a ring is formed When a module is inserted into the backplane the self shorting connector opens and the signal is routed onto the module Therefore any installed token ring module on the ShuntBus has access to any of the ten token ring segments on the backplane This design allows the implementation of per port switching for the token ring modules so that individual ports on a module can be assigned to different rings on the backplane Each toke
215. e receptacles as described in FCC Rules 68 5 Subpart J non keyed 3 AUI Port A 15 pin D Shell socket connector is as specified in IEC 807 2 4 BNC Port A standard BNC connector as specified in IEC 169 8 2 3 2 Configuration Installation of the 8222 Hub requires the following steps 1 Preparation Read the information in Chapter 1 of the 8222 Nways Ethernet Workgroup Hubs Installation and Planning Guide GA27 4079 e Collect the necessary cables In most cases only straight through cables will be needed e Review documentation of the network topology to become familiar with the hub s position in the network 2 Connect devices such as personal computers to the hub by following the instructions in Connecting Devices to the Nways Workgroup Hub on page 2 4 of the 8222 Nways Ethernet Workgroup Hubs Installation and Planning Guide GA27 4079 3 If the hub will be connected to another Nways workgroup hub or another type of 10Base T hub follow the instructions under Connecting the Nways Workgroup Hub to Another 10Base T Hub on page 2 8 of the 8222 Nways Ethernet Workgroup Hubs Installation and Planning Guide GA27 4079 70 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 3 3 Cabling Examples and Specifications The IBM Nways 8222 10Base T ports support the IEEE standard drive distances for transmission of IEEE 802 3 10Base T signals over UTP STP and FTP cabling The 8222 supports the following drive distan
216. e the 8272 is not architecturally limited in any way as is the case with source routing bridges to a maximum of seven bridge hops The 8272 LANStreamer Switch Model 108 also supports a transparent spanning tree implementation that is fully compliant with IEEE 802 1d allowing the 8272 to effectively participate in complex configurations This provides the capability of having several 8272s interconnected with redundant paths without having to administer source routing bridge and ring numbers Auto Sense Auto Configure The 8272 Model 108 also provides several additional usability features that contribute to reducing customers costs of installing operating and generally owning their switched token ring networks With its adaptive cut through capabilities described earlier the 8272 can be self healing and LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 16 Mbps Server 16 Mbps Server full duplex 32 Mbps half duplex 16 Mbps self optimizing when media quality problems arise affecting overall network reliability and performance Additionally the 8272 will automatically sense what type of token ring connection is being employed on each of its ports whether they be a connection Toa shared media segment via a token ring concentrator Toa dedicated media segment directly to a token ring LAN station Operating in half duplex or full duplex mode Operating at 4 Mbps or at 16 Mbps To another IBM 8
217. e which allows you to fully manage and control the 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub and all the 8250 8260 modules The DMM provides you with flexibility in handling the management of network segments with different protocols and media modules via a single management module using a single slot in the 8260 payload area There are two different versions of DMM LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM A Distributed Management Module with Ethernet Carrier DMM with Ethernet Carrier The DMM with Ethernet carrier module is a management module which is capable of housing up to 6 Ethernet MAC daughter cards e A Stand Alone Distributed Management Module Stand Alone DMM The stand alone DDM module is a management module which is not capable of housing any Ethernet MAC daughter cards 8260 Fault Tolerant Controller Module The 8260 Fault Tolerant Controller Module synchronizes the operations of all installed media and management modules by providing clocking and timing to the 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub backplane The controller module is also responsible for managing the power and cooling subsystems Ethernet Media Access Daughter Card E MAC The E MAC daughter card allows you to gather statistics for the network to which it is attached It can be physically mounted to either an 8260 Ethernet media module or the 8260 EC DMM 8260 Token Ring Media Access Daughter Card T MAC The T MAC daughter card allows you to gather stat
218. ection Summary 287 Appendix E Special Notices 291 vi LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Appendix F Related Publications 295 F 1 International Technical Support Organization Publications 295 E2 Other Publications vita e eA he A ae ed EE ed 295 How To Get ITSO Redbooks 2 002050 297 How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks 297 How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks 298 IBM Redbook Order Form 2 2 2 2 299 Index nn teste ta ee ek Se ee A ERS ER Sle 2S yea 301 Contents Vii viii LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Preface Local Area Network Concepts and Products is a set of four reference books for those looking for conceptual and product specific information in the LAN environment They provide a technical introduction to the various types of IBM local area network architectures and product capabilities The four volumes are as follows e SG24 4753 00 LAN Architecture e SG24 4754 00 LAN Adapters Hubs and ATM e SG24 4755 00 Routers and Gateways e SG24 4756 00 LAN Operating Systems and Management To obtain all four books order the set SK2T 1306 These redbooks complement the reference material available for the products discussed Much of the information detailed in these books is available through current redbooks and IBM sales and referenc
219. ed on the media modules that use the same protocol That is T MACs can be installed on token ring media modules and E MACs can be installed on Ethernet media modules Each token ring or Ethernet media module can accommodate installation of one MAC daughter card Ethernet 40 port module allows the installation of two MAC daughter cards Additionally the E MACs can be installed on the EC DMM Each EC DMM can accommodate the installation of up to 6 E MACs Regardless of where the MAC daughter cards are installed they can be assigned to any of the backplane segments However to assign a MAC daughter card to an isolated segment on a media module the MAC daughter card must be installed on that media module Ethernet MAC Daughter Card E MAC E MAC is a MAC daughter card which can be installed on an EC DMM or Ethernet media modules Figure 94 shows how you can install up to 6 E MACs on a single EC DMM A EMMA w 2 a EA Aa ol le Sosa a o A y A AAA Beau a A AA Ba A 2 ar AA AN A Wa Ba A Y u al S AAA A gt Figure 94 EC DMM with Up to 6 E MACs 182 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM In addition to the DMM with an interface to the network E MAC allows you to collect statistics about the Ethernet segment to which it is attac
220. ed to the ring To provide off ring management the Proxy Agent supports SNMP to communicate to a remote Manager such as NetView for AIX Management information bases MIBs are included with the Proxy Agent program which allow the SNMP manager to monitor and control the FDDI ring The Proxy Agent provides unsolicited notification of problems occurring on the ring through the use of SNMP traps The Proxy Agent runs as an O 2 application and can coexist with other OS 2 applications The user interface for managing the ring is located at the SNMP manager Figure 84 on page 158 shows an example of the Proxy Agent in a network environment Chapter 2 Hubs 157 NetView for AIX SNMP over TCPIP EEE Seah a p oem of oxy Agen FDDI Ring SMT F rames SMT Frames SMT Frames SMT Frames ceca 0 A0000 00000D Ha as Dual Attach Station Dual Attach Station Figure 84 FDDI Proxy Agent in a Network Environment Note The AIX for NetView workstation can be located on the local FDDI ring or on a remote token ring or Ethernet network The proxy agent provides a comprehensive MIB definition consisting of the following components e RFC 1285 and RFC 1512 MIBs e IBM extensions for ring configuration e IBM extensions for comprehensive PMF management e IBM extensions for IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator The proxy agent is designed to work with any SNMP manager However the SNMP manager referred to in this docu
221. ee ee 235 4 1 5 IBM Wireless LAN Entry and IBM Wireless LAN Similar but Different ceras ek 236 4 2 Wireless LAN Performance 0 e 238 42A Pat EOSS aa a ta ee RE A ad 238 4 2 2 Multipath Fading beicon E A E 240 4 2 3 Interference 24 054 dec ee er a ee bande a od 241 4 2 4 Delay Spread a N e S pla g D pede E e E e h 243 4 2 5 Cell Arrangement e 243 4 2 6 Trouble Shooting List aaa o 244 Chapter 5 ATM Products 000000002 ae 247 5 1 IBM 8260 ATM Subsystem Mode of Operations 247 Slew Classical IP cara edo rn dl del daak Bie A 247 6 12 LAN Emulation e oia ti a A A a da 248 StS Native ATM eta aoe A AA A Se ee 249 5 2 ATM Subsystem Traffic Management 249 5 3 The IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub 250 5 3 1 The 8260 ATM Backplane 0 2000000004 251 5 3 2 The ATM Switch Control Point Module 252 5 3 3 4 port 100 Mbps ATM Concentration Modules 253 5 3 4 Nways 8260 ATM 155 Mbps Concentration Module 254 5 3 5 The Nways 8260 TR Ethernet ATM LAN Bridge Module 254 5 3 6 8260 UTOPIA 1 ATM Carrier Modules 256 5 4 Systems Management 0 000 2 ee 256 5 4 1 Network Reliability 2 0 0 0 0000 256 5 4 2 ATM Power with LAN Simplicity 257 5 4 3 Multinetworking with ATM 2 0 2 0
222. el 3 control unit serves as the host for all optional features providing intelligence status displays power one token ring MAC function PO and appropriate interfaces for all installable options The RI RO modules provide the main ring path connection to the controlled access unit while the port lobe insertion units LlUs provide from two to four connections for network devices The lobe attachment modules LAMs allow up to 20 passive STP or UTP station attachments LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 7 1 Technical Description The following subsections describe highlights of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit Model 3 Granularity Granularity and modularity down to zero ports purely repeater and up to more than 100 port configurations allow for a more tailored approach to upgrading as requirements arise Also the MAC daughter card which is not required in a single 8230 no RI RO configuration has been made an optional feature to provide a lower entry price Management The option of management via either SNMP or CMOL SNMP agent support has been available for the 8230 Model 3 since its general availability date Any MIB browser that conforms to industry standards can be used to manage read monitor and update MIB variables inside an 8230 003 thus providing management functions A more effective approach is to use tailored SNMP applications that provide a graphical interface The 8230 Device Management for
223. electable pair reversal for easy cascading without the need for crossover cables e Uplink switch When set to the equals symbol this switch reverses the internal crossover of the receive and transmit signal pairs in port 16 of every hub allowing standard straight through 10Base T cables to be used for cascading through those ports Chapter 2 Hubs 77 Communications Port This is a standard DB 9 connector for an EIA 232 C interface The following functions are provided Out of Band Management SNMP over SLIP Configuration via XMODEM Microcode Upgrade via XMODEM or via TFTP over SLIP e Hub Expansion Port HEP This port connects individual units into a stack that acts as a single repeater It contains an Ethernet bus and bi directional serial control bus and uses standard 4 pair UTP cable category 3 minimum with RJ 45 connectors The hub expansion port allows up to 76 2 meters 250 feet end to end distance between units in the stack 2 4 1 2 Display Features The IBM 8224 provides LED indicators for comprehensive machine and port status These are detailed below 10Base T Port LED Indications Link OK Activity Auto Partitioned Management Disabled e Media Expansion Port LED Indications Link OK Fiber Only Activity Auto Partitioned Management Disabled e Unit Status Indications Power On Diagnostics Complete Management Agent Present Coll
224. ements Implementing shared RAM on this adapter card enables you to reclaim client workstations processing power that other adapters use for communications management The auto 16 4 token ring adapters incorporate 64 KB of shared RAM that is mapped to an unused block of the workstation system s upper memory This is above the 640 KB that DOS can normally address 1 5 2 IBM LANStreamer Adapters The following text describes IBM s LANStreamer adapter products as well as their features IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapter The IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapter is ideally suited for both clients and servers The high performance and low CPU utilization advantage of IBM s LANStreamer technology is well known for servers and OS 2 workstations Now with IBM s LAN client code even memory constrained DOS and Windows workstations can realize these benefits IBM Auto LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter The IBM Auto LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter is suited for servers and OS 2 or Windows 95 clients IBM Triple LANStreamer PCI Adapter The IBM Triple LANStreamer PCI Adapter is ideal for servers with multiple LAN connections and limited open slots The triple LANStreamer is a three port PCl bus adapter IBM Dual LANStreamer Adapter The IBM Dual LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter is also ideal for servers with multiple LAN connections and limited open slots The dual LANStreamer MC is a two port MC bus adapter 1 5 2 1 LANStreamer Features The LANStreamer adapters ar
225. emote Initial Program Load 268 AY BUS TYPE corvina E Pes dt eed ee ae A Se es ee 268 A 1 10 Data Address Lines 2 0022004 268 A 1 11 Announcement Number aoaaa aaa 268 Avlsl2Gard Length arde at a p oS a aod Bak OA 268 A A AI A Tar Ere a p in 269 A 2 Field Descriptions for Bus Master DMA Adapters 271 A 2 1 Microcode Level MCODE 0 040 271 A 2 2 Transmit Receive xmit rcv BUFFER RAM 271 Appendix B Microcode Level Tables 273 Bite Adapter Name wi ea fae hoes a a Sa be Des 273 B 1 2 Field Replaceable Unit Number 273 B 1 8 EPROM Part Numbers 00 273 B 1 4 Microcode Level 2 2 200020 05000 273 Appendix C ISA Adapter Switch Settings 277 C 1 Original Adapter and Adapter ll Feature Codes 3391 and 5063 o 277 C 1 1 Switch Block Number One 2 277 C 1 2 Switch Block Number Two 2 2 0 2 0 2 277 C 2 Adapter Il Feature Code 9858 aaa aaa aa 278 C 3 16 4 Adapter Feature Code 7367 0 0 280 C 4 16 4 Adapter Il Feature Codes 5120 and 0255 282 C 5 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter Feature Code 7462 2 2 284 C 5 1 Switch Block Number One 284 C 5 2 Switch Block Number Two a ahaaa aaa 284 C 5 3 Jumper Setting e 285 Appendix D LAN Adapter Sel
226. ent Switching Hub The IBM 8260 Models A10 and A17 are modular hubs that combine within the same chassis the functions of shared media intelligent hub plus those of a modular ATM switch Models A10 A17 are very similar to Models 010 017 and have 10 slots and 17 slots respectively The difference is the presence of the ATM backplane For general information about the IBM 8260 and the non ATM functions see the general IBM 8260 description in this book 2 11 IBM Nways 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub on page 161 The ATM functions in the IBM 8260 also called the ATM subsystem are built with the following components e An ATM backplane serving the slots of the IBM 8260 for interconnection of the ATM modules e A two slot switch control point module S CPM that provides stand alone ATM cell switching functions and network control functions such as call setup processing topology discovery and route selection These network control functions are grouped under the name of control point 250 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM The module also serves as a point of monitoring and control for various ATM modules through either in band or out of band management ATM concentration modules A 1 slot 4 port ATM concentration module with FSD the FDDI MIC connectors offering 100 Mbps TAXI ATM Forum compliant interfaces over multimode fiber A 1 slot 4 port ATM concentration module with SC connec
227. ent is an important part of the installation and assists the operators to handle the equipment The design of the 8260 provides built in support for this 5 4 1 Network Reliability 256 The switched nature of ATM technology requires network control functions to perform all the tasks to select the best route in complex topologies and to manage the connection of ATM circuits One possible implementation was to put these functions in a specific server connected to the network of switches However these functions are very critical for the continuous operations of the ATM networks IBM has therefore chosen to have them integrated with the 8260 switching element thus leading to a distribution of the control system in every switching node The consequences are e An added availability for two main reasons Physically every module in the IBM 8260 benefits from the fault tolerant design of the IBM 8260 chassis Logically the ATM network benefits from distributed control that eliminates single point of failure e An improved network performance because of distribution of network control load This gives you a faster network startup and connection setup and avoids network bottlenecks LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 5 4 2 ATM Power with LAN Simplicity The rich set of functions of the 8260 ATM subsystem are designed to make your installation and exploitation of ATM networks very simple Installation of an 8260 A
228. ented This example shows a stack of five hubs Each hub has been segmented out of the network with an SNMP command to the IBM 8224 MIB Thus there are five segments and five collision domains now in the stack Chapter 2 Hubs 87 vo tio DPoOc0oDo0o0o0o0o0o0o0o0o00005 Ei oT H Hub Isolated MEP g i Upik MENTE Hub 2 Isolated MER a gt Upirk CTE Mast Hub 3 Isolated MEP a ee Oo Segment 1 ian mi o Hub 4 Isolated MEP a Upirk ooonmnnnn0nnnnananononnd ml o Pr Hub amp Isolated MEP i E es Uplink Ehe ALEA o EA A y Furl Hub Hebe MEP a o ITITI TIITTIT T TT ME Segment 2 CEE E A A ee ee H pr Hub Wain Bus MER 5 OLII 11 oo W EM consccoscooscons ly wE Huba Main Bus w E Co OS E CBM za o ounsscosoooscooo y YE Hub 9 Main Bus ve rr dE Ba Hub1 0 Main Bus LTT ae Sean cyt el cl ed reer A Figure 31 A Stack of Ten IBM 8224 Hubs Configured for Three Segments Using Cascading This example shows a stack of ten 8224 hubs separated into three network segments 88 Explanation for Figure 31 Hubs 1 through 6 have each been segmented isolated out of t
229. er code in the DOS workstation The OS 2 environment shows the following two configurations e NDIS Support The OS 2 NDIS support is similar to the DOS NDIS with the exception that the module names are different and the OS 2 environment provides a ring 3 and ring O interface for the protocol stacks ODI Support This also is very similar to the DOS structure but once again the modules are different for this OS and are loaded as entries in the CONFIG SYS file NetWare Support The support for Novell NetWare requires a separate ODI device driver For NetWare 4 0 the HSM portion of the driver is loaded at the server as a separate module For NetWare 3 11 servers the HSM is linked with the MSM and TSM AIX Support The support for AIX is shipped with the AIX product and not with the specific adapter The drivers to support the LAN adapters are actually part of the AIX kernel Only a subset of the Micro Channel LAN adapters sold by IBM are supported by the RS 6000 product 26 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM OS amp DRIVER ENVIRON NATIVE SHARED RAM ADAPTER SUPPORT ENTS NDIS SUPPORT ODI SUPPORT NOVELL CCB I F CCB I F _ REQUESTER DOS ADAPTER PROTOCOL PROTOCOL HANDLER STACK STACK DEMCOMOD SYS DEMEOMOD SYS TEXODT NDIS ODI ADAPTER LLC TASR nos M S com ADAPTER ADAPTER NDIS SUPPORT ODI SUPPORT
230. er must procure the AUI cable which connects feature 2625 and the Ethernet IEEE 802 3 transceiver This feature offers the customer a direct connection to Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LANs which support communications with both IBM and non IBM products Concurrent sessions with both Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802 3 stations are possible These two CSMA CD protocols are able to coexist on the same LAN but they cannot communicate with each other This concurrent session capability of feature 2625 allows the AS 400 system to support a customer s staged migration from Ethernet Version 2 to the newer IEEE 802 3 LAN I O Card Slots Used One Maximum For Models D35 D80 E35 E70 and F35 F70 Four For Models E80 E95 and F80 F95 Six Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart in Table 5 Table 5 Page 1 of 2 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart feefee Nig olle F F F S S F F F S S S F F F S S S F F F S S S F F F S S S F F F F S S F F F S S S F F F F S S F F F S S S F NA ESO SES PE a E 56 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 5 Page 2 of 2 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart 2619 2626 2636 6240 6242 2617 2625 6250 mim mim nin nin mim mim n n ojn EA O A CA O AA A s e The maximum number of LANs for each system model reflects the total of all LAN features which can be installed on that model F Available as an orderable feature on these system
231. ers These includes the IBM Auto LANStreamer MC32 Adapter or the IBM Dual LANStreamer MC32 Adapter Include an SNMP agent that will allow the IBM LANStreamer Switch to be managed from a central SNMP management station A separate network management application that provides an easy to use graphical interface will also be provided for the IBM LANStreamer Switch IBM LANStreamer MC 16 Adapter IBM 16 4 Bus Master EISA Adapter IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring ISA Adapter IBM Auto LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e IBM Dual LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter e IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapter e IBM 8226 Token Ring RJ45 Connection Multistation Access Unit e IBM 8228 Token Ring Network Multistation Access Unit e IBM 8230 Token Ring Network Controlled Access Unit e IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub e IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub 3 2 2 Full Duplex Token Ring Operation The following section discusses the operation of a full duplex token ring In September 1993 IBM introduced the concept of dedicated half duplex and full duplex token ring to the IEEE 802 5 More detailed proposals followed in November 1993 and January 1994 meetings In March 1994 formal standardization work began The token ring MAC protocol is usually executed within a token ring adapter When operating in standard token ring mode an adapter normally transmits a frame or receives a frame but not both simultaneously
232. ers and associated Line Interface Coupler LIC s or voice server extensions e AC or DC power input must be the same as the Model 500 base unit The following optional components can be installed on the shelf e Up to six low speed or high speed adapters or voice server adapters e Up to six Line Interface Coupler LIC s or voice server extensions e A second switch re drive card Required if the Model 500 base unit has a backup switch e One or two clock re drive cards Must be the same number as the number of clock cards in the Model 500 base unit A second power supply Required if the Model 500 base unit has a second power supply 3 4 1 5 Software Requirements In order to operate and manage the 2220 Nways Switch the following IBM Licensed Program Products are required IBM Nways BroadBand Switch Control Program 5622 388 Operates the 2220 Nways Switch node implementing the BroadBand Networking Services architecture Includes the node configurator program IBM Nways BroadBand Switch Manager 5765 320 Consists of several applications to manage individual 2220 Nways Switch nodes as well as the overall network The Nways Switch Manager runs under NetView 6000 One per IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch network is required If several are installed each of them manages a subset of the network AIX SystemView NetView 6000 5696 362 lts latest current release is a prerequisite for Nways Switch Manager NetView Distribution Manager
233. es appear with zero value e When you browse over SMT 6 2 MIB for the stations implementing only SMT 7 3 the variables appear with zero value This approach was taken so the sequencing of the browser would not be disrupted For more detailed information about the traps defined and sent by the SNMP FDDI Proxy Agent and the traps defined and sent by the SNMP agent of the 8244 concentrator refer to FDDI Concepts and Products GG24 3865 2 10 5 7 Using LAN Network Manager for AIX to Manage the 8244 LAN Network Manager LNM for AIX works with the FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent and NetView for AIX to pass instructions from LNM for AIX to the managed FDDI segment and to obtain status and change information pertaining to the FDDI resources Using LNM for AIX you can perform FDDI network management tasks by selecting an FDDI resource such as the 8244 from a topological view of your network and using menu choices to perform a specific task LNM for AIX uses the FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent program as its proxy agent in FDDI networks The Proxy Agent passes requests from LNM for AIX to the managed FDDI segment and obtains status and change information pertaining to LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM the FDDI devices on the segment by means of status reporting frames SRFs from the FDDI segment These are converted into SNMP traps and passed to LNM for AIX For instructions on how to define parameters for LNM for AIX to establish and maintain
234. es of token ring adapters that are available The chart gives the adapter name the form and part number along with information of the bus type memory and location of the the 802 2 LLC support If the 802 2 support is in the host this means that the code is executed on the PC processor and is normally supplied by a software package such as LAN Support Program LSP or Network Transport Systems 2 NTS 2 If the 802 2 support is executed on the adapter the adapter is generally termed to be a deep adapter If the 802 2 is executed in the host engine the adapter is termed a shallow adapter Table 1 Token Ring Adapters Summary Adapter Name Bus Type Data Path Memory 802 2 Support IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring ISA Adapter Shared RAM 64 KB On Card IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring MCA Adapter Shared RAM 64 KB On Card IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapter IBM Auto LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter IBM Triple LANStreamer PCI Adapter BUS MASTER Shallow In Host BUS MASTER Shallow In Host BUS MASTER Shallow In Host IBM Dual LANStreamer MC 32 Adapter BUS MASTER Shallow In Host IBM Token Ring 16 4 Credit Card PCMCIA Adapter Shared RAM 64 KB On Card 1 6 Ethernet Adapters for the PC This section covers the Ethernet family of adapters from IBM This will include Micro Channel ISA PCI and PCMCIA adapters 1 6 1 IBM MCA Ethernet Adapters The following are the two Ethernet adapters for the Micro Channel P
235. es where small Ethernet LANs are useful include classrooms small businesses grocery stores travel agencies doctors offices etc branch offices of savings and loans banks and insurance companies and departmental workgroups The IBM Nways 8222 has an unusually rich set of features which puts it in the highest tier of these small workgroup hubs These are 1 Integral auto ranging power supply e Supports world wide voltage frequency needs e No external brick power transformer 2 Provides both AUI and 10Base2 BNC ports On the 16 port version these can be used concurrently making it an 18 port hub 3 A separate MDI port wired in parallel with the last 10Base T port Makes cascading between hubs easy No need for special crossover cables 4 Clean operator interface LEDs and 10Base T ports are both on front side 5 Full complement of LED indicators for all ports including AUI and BNC ports The IBM Nways 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hubs can be used to connect department or workgroup LANs to corporate enterprise networks For those customers desiring to connect a larger number of workstations to the Ethernet network or for those customers that desire more extensive network management capability the IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub or the IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub should be used for Ethernet concentration The IBM Nways 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hubs can be used with the IBM 8260 or 8250 hu
236. etwork management system is upgraded in order to support workstations at SMT 6 2 and 7 3 levels on the same FDDI ring The Remote Program Update RPU function which is used to upgrade the IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator microcode from a PS 2 workstation is available with the proxy agent The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator is upgraded to the current level SMT 7 3 of the FDDI standard of station management The IBM FDDI adapters also provide access to a wide range of new applications for which FDDI performance is critical such as multimedia computer aided design CAD simulations modeling and graphics The new IBM FDDI MC adapters and IBM FDDI ISA adapters are available to attach PS 2 PS ValuePoint or other Micro Channel and ISA compatible workstations to FDDI networks through optical fiber and copper cabling The IBM FDDI EISA adapters are also available to attach non IBM EISA workstations to FDDI networks allowing most workstations to access applications requiring the performance of FDDI networks Multiple group address MGA provides a simplified means to update a group of information for example time of day stock quotes or locate control entities for example network management bridges servers This function is treated as a broadcast function but only those stations recognizing this configured address will receive and process the data Up to 16 group addresses can be configured The IBM FDDI MC adapters provide both data and addressing sup
237. evices on an Ethernet LAN by using an IBM Wireless LAN Access Point as a transparent bridge between the radio and LAN interfaces The cell then becomes known as an Ethernet connected cell In this configuration there is the option of having the workstations continue to communicate directly with each other on a point to point basis or indirectly via the IBM Wireless LAN Access Point Communicating via the IBM Wireless LAN Access Point has the effect of extending the range of communication as the signal is effectively boosted on retransmission The trade off is that the performance may be reduced but overall delivery is more reliable In an open environment the distance between workstations communicating via the IBM Wireless LAN Access Point can be up to 360 meters In an Ethernet connected cell the IBM Wireless LAN Access Point performs the tasks of allocating the channel frequencies for the cell and handles the authentication and authorization function It also manages frame filtering for the workstations in its cell The maximum number of workstations in an Ethernet connected cell is 32 4 1 3 3 The Network of Ethernet Connected Cells Workstations can communicate with workstations in other cells providing that all cells are Ethernet connected to the same LAN Each cell must be connected to the LAN by its own IBM Wireless LAN Access Point Any number of cells can be connected on the LAN or on multiple Ethernet LANs bridged together Individual
238. f this writing The following are the supported bus types form factors e PC Bus 8 bit e AT ISA Bus 16 bit e Micro Channel 16 and 32 bit e PCMCIA Version 2 e EISA 32 bit A 1 10 Data Address Lines This field gives the number of data and address lines present on the card A 1 11 Announcement Number This is simply the number of the original IBM document announcing the adapter The announcements are an excellent source of reference material for the individual adapters they represent ltems such as supported machine types and supported software can be found in these documents A 1 12 Card Length The primary reason for the card length field is to help customers identify which adapter they are using Most adapters do not carry distinguishing part numbers Being able to identify the adapter is sometimes critical when trying to troubleshoot problems concerning IBM token ring adapters 268 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM A 1 13 RJ 45 This field indicates the presence of an RJ 45 connector on the card in addition to the standard female D shell 9 pin connector Cards equipped with RJ 45 connectors also have built in media filters suitable for use on 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps LANs Appendix A Adapter Tables 269 6 0 8 0 Se Wal WOd ajqe rene jpueJimo ase yolym siajdepe ay SoJeoIpul 13 0N SHA 89 EEZ 6 4 0z 91 VSI et ay v9 ay 8 v 91 8v0ZDE
239. features These hubs are usually more expensive on a cost per port basis than workgroup hubs Workgroup Hubs Workgroup hubs on the other hand usually provide single protocol support for a smaller number of users They are also easier to set up and support However workgroup hubs do not necessarily have less capabilities than multiprotocol hubs Many of the hubs described in this book can for example perform error detection and recovery and provide flexible configuration options The latest interconnection strategies incorporate the intelligent wiring closet concept which extends the reach of network management down to the port level Each vendor supports its own proprietary network management system to control and monitor these hubs from the network control center In addition most hub products support the SNMP standard originally designed to support Copyright IBM Corp 1996 63 TCP IP networks which allows them to be controlled by an SNMP central network management system 2 2 IBM s Workgroup Hubs 64 The focus of this book as indicated by its title is on workgroup hubs and switches The following chapters will describe in detail IBM s offerings in workgroup hubs and switches At the time of writing the following workgroup hubs are available from or announced by IBM e 8222 Nways Ethernet Workgroup Hub e 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub e 8226 Token Ring RJ 45 Connection 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit
240. female Model 003 013 only Shipping Group Controlled Access Unit Base Model 001 002 Base unit Labels Service guide Maintenance Facility on 3 5 diskette Maintenance Facility User s Guide Customer Setup CSU instructions Wrap Plug German RFI statement Warranty information sheet Controlled Access Unit Base Model 003 013 Base unit Cable guides CSU instructions Service guide Service Facility User s Guide 200 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 12 6 8244 Models Instructions German RFI sheet Three diskettes 1 Service Facility 2 Device Management for Windows required NetView for Windows 3 Online publication for Device Management for Windows Power cord Lobe Attachment Module ICS Base ICS LAM CSU instructions Four number labels Two cable brackets Warranty information sheet Lobe Attachment Module RJ 45 RJ 45 Lobe Attachment Module CSU instructions Four number labels Warranty statement 16 4 Unshielded Media LAM Lobe Attachment Module CSU instructions Four number labels Warranty statement Graphical Management Applications Available 8230 PSM for NetView for Windows LAN Network Manager for OS 2 LAN Network Manager for AIX 006 and 012 Physical Specifications Width 443 0 mm 17 4 inches Depth 69 0 mm 2 70 inches Height 232 0 mm 9 11 inches Weight 6 3 kg 12 6 Ibs fully configured Inst
241. fiber ring path This will allow connections to token ring segments up to two kilometers away and be able to interconnect and switch LAN segments that are physically distant from the 8272 Multiport 100VG Token Ring This card provides multiple 100VG token ring ports for connection to 100VG segments or stations Chapter 3 Switches 215 216 4 Port Token Ring UTP STP Card The 4 port card provides four token ring ports that supports token ring twisted pair UTP STP media via RJ 45 connectors It effectively expands the port capacity of the 8272 from 8 to 12 Any of these four ports can be configured similary to any of the eight fixed token ring ports to provide either shared half duplex 4 or 16 Mbps token ring connections or dedicated full duplex 32 Mbps connections 2 Port Token Ring Fiber Card The 2 Port Token Ring Fiber Card provides two token ring multimode fiber connections via ST connectors Similar in capability to the 8272 s token ring UTP STP ports each port on this card are switch ports that can each be connected to either a shared token ring segment via a fiber ring in RI or ring out RO port on a token ring concentrator or hub that forms the segment or a token ring fiber port on another 8272 Source Route Switching The IBM 8272 LANStreamer Switch Model 108 is a source routing switch This technology is optimized to take advantage of the inherent benefits of source routing without forcing the user to
242. five minutes until a valid IP address is received Using the IBM 8224 MIB this process can be disabled where it is not desired for example in an IPX network See your BOOTP or RARP server s documentation for specific instructions 3 Using SNMP over IP and IPX Once one of the hubs in the stack has a valid IP address the IP addresses of the remaining hubs in the stack can be set using SNMP over IP requests An SNMP network manager can set update the IP address and other configuration parameters for each of the hubs in a stack by modifying the ibm8224StackTable MIB object Chapter 2 Hubs 95 96 SNMP over IPX can be used to set the IP address of each hub in the stack even if none of the hubs has a valid IP address Refer to the documentation included with your management program for complete instructions 2 4 4 3 Preparing for SNMP Management In order to perform any of the management actions you must run an SNMP management application such as IBM StackWatch for Windows or IBM StackWatch for NMS on your workstation In addition the stack you plan to manage must contain an 8224 Model 002 SNMP commands are sent over IP or IPX networks If you plan to use SNMP over an IP network you will first need to set the IP addresses of the hubs in your stack begin with Getting Started SNMP over IP If you plan to use SNMP over an IPX network go to Special Considerations for SNMP Over IPX 2 4 4 4 Getting Started SNMP o
243. for NetView for AIX Chapter 2 Hubs 197 2 12 3 8226 Model 001 Physical Specifications Width 263 mm 10 4 inches Depth 141 mm 5 5 inches Height 54 mm 2 1 inches Weight 0 975 kg 2 15 Ibs Installation Tabletop Power Selection Auto sensing Cabling Types Category 4 or 5 UTP or FTP and STP for both lobe and main ring paths Connector Types RJ 45 Shipping Group 8226 Base Unit IBM 8226 Token Ring RJ45 Connection Model 001 Planning and Installation Guide Safety manual Two RJ 45 wrap plugs Graphical Management Applications Available None The 8226 is not a manageable hub 2 12 4 8228 Model 001 198 Physical Specifications approx Width 46 9 mm 18 5 inches Depth 17 3 mm 6 8 inches Height 6 6 mm 2 6 inches Installation Wall mount separate bracket required Rack mount Power Selection Not applicable the 8228 does not use power to operate Cabling Types STP Type 1 UTP category 3 4 5 Connector Types IBM Cabling System ICS Shipping Group 8228 MAU LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Lobe port initialization tool Cable management bracket e Graphical Management Applications Available None The 8228 is not a manageable hub 2 12 5 8230 Models 001 002 003 and 013 e Physical Specifications Base Unit Model 001 Width 483 mm 19 0 inches Depth 362 mm 14 25 inches front of unit to rear of unit with
244. for the primary path which is the connection between the B port of the station and the concentrator will be lit and the LED for the alternate path will blink green When the primary path fails the LED for this path goes off and the LED for the alternate path will switch to a steady lit state 2 9 4 Problem Determination The IBM 8240 is designed to be installed by the customer and repaired by the customer or by a customer engineer CE All modules the CC module the RA module and the DA modules are customer replaceable units CRUs and can be ordered separately Field replaceable units FRUs are the housing the power supply the fan assembly and the backplane FRUs are replaced by the CE On the concentrator control module the 4 digit hexadecimal display presents the different status and error codes of the IBM 8240 The status codes are only displayed for approximately 60 seconds then the display goes blank The error code stays on the display 2 9 4 1 Status and Error Codes The codes are grouped in the following four categories e Status Codes e Power On Self Test POST Codes e Remote Program Update RPU Codes e Error Codes Status Codes 0000 to 07FF The codes provide information on the cabling configuration and the number and the type of the installed DA modules copper or fiber Also displayed is the status of the RA module and other internal setup parameters Power On Self Test POST Codes 8000 to
245. g voice data and video Local area networks are part of this emerging technology 2 1 What Are Hubs Hubs are the central elements of LANs where the physical cabling infrastructure is concentrated hence the name hub or concentrator Hubs can support one or several LAN types such as Ethernet token ring FDDI ATM and the newer 100Base T and 100VG AnyLAN technologies Typically the hub acts as a multiport repeater with the total bandwidth being limited by the transport protocol Ethernet at 10 Mbps token ring at 4 and 16 Mbps FDDI at 100 Mbps and ATM at 25 52 100 and 155 Mbps Hubs interface with universal cabling systems which offer a blend of flexibility and reliability for today s growing interconnection needs Support is generally provided for all types of cabling including thin and thick coaxial optical fiber shielded twisted pair STP and unshielded twisted pair UTP Intelligent hubs provide network management information allowing operators to monitor and control every port on the hub from a single network control center This is a significant advantage over older non intelligent hubs Many communications equipment vendors offer hub distribution systems which fall into two major categories multiprotocol hubs and workgroup hubs Multiprotocol Hubs Multiprotocol hubs usually accommodate extra features like built in fault tolerance internal bridging and routing support power management and sophisticated management
246. gure the 8260 Multiprotocol Interconnect Module you must use the Local Management Systems LMS accessed via the local or remote console Chapter 2 Hubs 195 2 12 IBM Workgroup Hubs at a Glance This section provides at a glance details for each hub which have not necessarily been included in the preceding sections 2 12 1 8222 Models 008 and 016 e Physical Specifications Width 225 7 mm 8 90 inches Depth 168 7 mm 6 70 inches Height 51 7 mm 2 0 inches Weight 1 24 kg 2 8 Ibs Model 008 Weight 1 35 kg 3 0 Ibs Model 016 Installation Tabletop Wall mount e Power Selection Auto ranging 100 to 240 Volts 50 or 60 Hertz e Cabling Types 10Base T ports 100 ohm UTP category 3 4 or 5 100 or 120 ohm FTP category 5 or 150 ohm IBM STP type 1 6 9 1A 6A or 9A AUI port thick Ethernet cable 10Base5 or AUI transceiver BNC port standard thin coaxial cable 10Base2 e Connector Types 10Base T ports RJ 45 STP cables must use baluns to convert to RJ 45 connectors AUI port DB 15 connector BNC port BNC connector e Shipping Group 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hub BNC T connector Power cord Safety manual Wall mount bracket Warranty and support information 8222 Nways Ethernet Workgroup Hubs Installation and Planning Guide e Graphical Management Applications Available None The 8222 Nways hubs are not manageable 196 LAN Concepts
247. h between any two devices in the collision domain 2 4 3 2 Maximum Segment Lengths An Ethernet segment is the total length of cable between either two repeaters or between a repeater and an attached device The different types of Ethernet supported by the 8224 place different limitations on segment lengths LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 9 Maximum 8224 Segment Lengths for the Supported Ethernet Types Ethernet Type Maximum Segment Length 10Base T 100 meters 328 feet 10Base2 185 meters 607 feet AUI 50 meters 164 feet FOIRL 1000 meters 3281 feet 10Base FL 2000 meters 6562 feet Note The 8224 does not support 10Base FB lt is therefore incompatible with the existing 8250 and 8260 Ethernet 10Base FB modules f c 1110 1210 and 1310 and cannot be connected to them without the use of a 10Base FL FOIRL to 10Base FB converter The 8224 will connect directly to the 10Base FL modules f c 5895 5896 and 5897 and FOIRL modules f c 3814 3815 and 3816 that can be used in the 8250 and 8260 chassis For additional information on maximum distance limits equivalent distance for signals passing through an 8224 and power loss budgeting refer to pages 1 10 to 1 14 of the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Installation and Users Guide GA27 4024 2 4 3 3 Cabling Requirements for the 8224 Cable and connector requirements differ depending on the port to which each cable connects Cabling
248. h forwards Ethernet frames from one of the eight ports to another based on Ethernet MAC addresses The 8271 is able to forward Ethernet frames at media speeds With a highly parallel internal design optimized for performance the 8271 is able to maintain media speed frame transfer between each of the possible four distinct pairs of ports simultaneously This feature allows the 8271 to provide an aggregate bandwidth of up to 40 Mbps Networks with traffic patterns able to take full advantage of the 8271 could sustain throughput equivalent to four 10 Mbps Ethernet Additionally the 8271 uses a switching technique sometimes referred to as on the fly switching which provides for extremely low latency or delay less than 50 microseconds as frames traverse the switch Figure 97 shows the 8271 model 108 Figure 97 IBM 8271 Model 108 The operation of the 8271 is very similar to the operation of a transparent bridge Like a bridge the 8271 has filter forward tables Each 8271 is able to support 6000 MAC addresses This is the limit of the master address table Each port can support up to 1700 addresses The 8271 can be mounted in a standard 19 inch rack or to a wall or similar surface The 8271 can also be placed on a flat surface such as a desk or tabletop O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 205 The 8271 has the following categories of LEDs e Status LEDs e Individual port LEDs The status LEDs indicate the activity of the switch whe
249. h hub either Model 001 or Model 002 has an SNMP agent and an IP address and therefore is managed directly The agent in the 8224 001 is viable only when it is in the same stack as an 8224 002 The 8224 002 enables the management capability in each of the 8224 001s connected to it through the serial bus on the hub expansion cable This means that in a stack containing at least one 8224 002 management is distributed throughout the stack Thus the relationship between the 8224 Model 002 and the attached 8224 Model 001s is a community of peers rather than the traditional master slave hierarchical relationship of its competitors Setting IP Addresses This can be done in the following three ways 1 XMODEM Text Configuration File The 8224 hub IP address the net mask the IP default gateway and the write community string can be set by downloading a text configuration file using the XMODEM protocol This requires a PC with a serial port a text editor to change the parameters an XMODEM file transfer program and either a null modem cable for local configuration or a pair of modems for remote configuration 2 BOOTP Server or Reverse ARP Server A BOOTP server can be used to set the 8224 hub configuration parameters Each time that the 8224 completes the power on self test it will make two BOOTP requests and then two Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP requests These contain the MAC address of the 8224 This process will be repeated every
250. h installed module e Power up and power down individual slots housing 8260 modules using DMM commands e Display the number and status of power supplies installed in the 8260 e Display the available power budget in your 8260 e Operate the 8260 in fault tolerant or non fault tolerant mode e Display the operational mode fault tolerant or non fault tolerant of your 8260 e Automatically power down the lower class priority 8260 modules if the failure of one or more power supply results in the power requirement of the currently installed modules to exceed the power capacity of the currently operational power supplies e Ensure that the newly installed 8260 modules will be powered up only if there is enough available power in the 8260 to operate them 2 11 5 1 Power Class Power class can be considered as a power priority which ranges from 1 to 10 10 is the highest priority and 1 is the lowest priority In the event of failure of one or more power supplies which results in power deficit that is the available power is less than the power requirements by all the currently installed modules the controller module will power down a number of 8260 media modules with the lowest power class to bring down the level of power consumption to the level of available power supplied by the remaining operational power supply components 2 11 6 8260 Intelligent Cooling Subsystem The 8260 intelligent cooling subsystem is made up of the following c
251. h interface can attach to DCEs that provide either an Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 59 60 ElA RS 422 RS 449 or a CCITT X 21 physical interface with a continuous clock Except for the types of DCE physical interfaces supported the Multi Interface Serial Adapter is identical in function to the 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter Note The RS 422 RS 449 interface provided by the Multi Interface Serial Adapter does not provide the Request To Send signal nor does it monitor the Clear To Send signal This may cause problems when using DCEs that require a valid Request To Send signal These problems can usually be solved by providing a valid Request To Send signal via some other means In countries where T1 common carrier services are available a DSU CSU Data Services Unit Channel Services Unit is normally used as the DCE The DSU CSU must generate the additional framing bits needed to utilize the 1 544 Mbps interface used with T1 services while providing a continuous clock to the IBM 6611 Network Processor at 1 536 Mbps Both interfaces of the Multi Interface Serial Adapter can be used concurrently at such speeds as the aggregate speed across both interfaces does not exceed 3 072 Mbps 2 x 1 536 Mbps In some countries where E1 common carrier services are available IBM has announced the IBM 6629 RS449 G 703 2 048 Mbps Interface Converter which can be used as the DCE It provides conversion between a CCITT G 703 clear c
252. hannel inter face used with the E1 service and the EIA RS 422 RS 449 interface that can be used by the IBM 6611 Network Processor If one interface of the Multi Interface Serial Adapter is used at 2 048 Mbps the other interface must be used at a lower speed so that the aggregate speed across both interfaces does not exceed 3 072 Mbps Each interface of the Multi Interface Serial Adapter can support one of three data link protocols e PPP Point to Point Protocol Frame Relay permanent virtual circuits only e The protocol implemented by the IBM Token Ring Network Bridge Program Version 2 2 when used as one half of a remote bridge Each Multi Interface Serial Adapter requires up to two DCE interface cables appropriate to the type of DCE interface in use The available DCE interface cables are 6611 Serial Adapter Cable feature 2645 EIA RS 422 RS 449 DCE Interface 6611 SDLC Adapter CCITT X 21 Cable feature 2729 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter 2650 The 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter provides two independent synchronous serial communication interfaces These interfaces are supported at speeds between 19 2 Kbps and 2 048 Mbps with a maximum aggregate speed of 3 072 Mbps across both interfaces Each interface can attach to DCEs that provide either a CCITT V 35 or a CCITT V 36 physical interface with a continuous clock Except for the types of DCE physical interfaces supported the 6611 2 Port V 35
253. hardware requirements 259 modules 163 software requirements 260 Workgroup Concentrator 263 ATM ISA TURBOWAYS 18 ATM MC Adapter TURBOWAYS 100 17 ATM MC Adapter TURBOWAYS 155 17 ATM MCA Adapters TURBOWAYS 25 18 ATM SBus Adapters TURBOWAYS 155 18 ATM SBus Adapters TURBOWAYS 25 18 attachment unit interface AUI 205 AUI attachment unit interface 61 205 auto polarity detection 185 auto sense auto configure 216 available bit rate ABR 249 average link error rate 143 backplane 164 backplane Ethernet segments 166 backplane FDDI segments 167 backplane interface module BIM 192 backplane token ring segments 167 bandwidth 206 212 base card 252 Base station 235 beacon 222 BER bit error rate 238 bibliography 295 bit error rate BER 238 BOOTP 92 BOOTP TFTP 209 bridging functions 193 adapters supported 60 61 BroadBand Networking Services 223 broadcast domains 208 Bus Architectures ISA Bus 5 MCA Bus 4 overview 4 Bus master DMA Adapters adapter positioning 287 adapter tables 270 description 3 C cables adapters 2 port serial 60 2 port V 35 V 36 compatible serial 61 4 port SDLC 61 Ethernet 61 token ring 61 X 25 62 feature codes 2645 60 2655 61 2657 61 2665 61 2723 61 2725 61 2727 61 2729 60 62 2975 62 2976 62 2977 62 2978 62 2987 62 2988 62 interfaces Ethernet 61 RS 232 61 62 RS 422 RS 449 60 token ring 61 V 24 61 62 V 35 61 62 V 36 61 X 21 60 62 cabling limitations 124 ca
254. he 16 Mbps rate is selected These controls allow the customer to easily migrate from a 4 to a 16 Mbps token ring network Feature 2626 is functionally equivalent to feature 2636 Feature 2626 is based on a faster microprocessor providing up to two times the throughput of feature 2636 A maximum frame size of up to 16 KB is supported I O Card Slots Used One LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Maximum For Models D35 D80 E35 E70 and F35 F70 Four Fpr Models E80 E95 and F80 F95 Six Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart in Table 5 on page 56 Cables One token ring network attachment 2 5 meter 8 foot cable AS 400 16 4 Mbps Token Ring Network Adapter 2636 The 16 4 Mbps Token Ring Network Adapter feature provides a single attachment to a 16 Mbps or a 4 Mbps IBM Token Ring network The feature consists of an adapter card internal code which supplies IEEE 802 5 media access control MAC and IEEE 802 2 logical link control LLC functions and an external 2 5 meter 8 foot cable The standard IBM cabling system can increase the length where necessary OS 400 configuration parameters are used to select either the 16 Mbps or 4 Mbps rate Early token release can be enabled or disabled when the 16 Mbps rate is selected These controls allow the customer to easily migrate from a 4 to a 16 Mbps token ring network Feature 2636 is based on the same microprocessor as feature 6240 The adapter 2636 supports
255. he Network Administrator Program NAP The NAP is provided as part of the IBM Wireless LAN product It performs the administration functions for the cell Such functions include workstation registration authentication and security control The NAP cannot be run from a wireless remote station lt can only be installed in a base station or other LAN attached station designated as a network manager Every cell must be managed by a NAP from somewhere In a stand alone cell the base station is that point In a wired LAN cell the NAP can be run from that cell s base station or it can be run from the base station of some other cell on the backbone lt may also be run from a dedicated management station somewhere on the backbone and which does not have to be part of any cell itself In this way the management of an entire group of up to 60 cells and the workstations in them can be concentrated in one management station The base stations communicate with each other and with the NAP station using TCP IP 4 1 4 4 Network Management This is a completely different function to and independent of the NAP The IBM Wireless LAN base station can act as an SNMP agent in much the same way as an IBM Wireless LAN Entry IBM Wireless LAN Access Point See 4 1 3 4 Network Management on page 234 4 1 5 IBM Wireless LAN Entry and IBM Wireless LAN Similar but Different IBM Wireless LAN Entry and IBM Wireless LAN are very similar products in many ways To
256. he Type 2 adapter already included in the base configuration is not used as a combined trunk and control point or an independent control point adapter The following optional components can be installed on the shelf Chapter 3 Switches 227 228 Up to three low speed or high speed adapters any type and associated Line Interface Coupler LIC s if the Type 2 adapter already included in the base configuration is used as a combined trunk and control point adapter or Up to four low speed or high speed adapters any type and associated Line Interface Coupler LIC s if the Type 2 adapter already included in the base configuration is installed as an independent control point adapter in one of the two slots reserved for them Up to two voice server adapters and optionally two voice server extensions A backup switch A second power supply A second control point Must be the same adapter type as the primary control point One or two clock cards 3 4 1 3 2220 Nways Switch Model 500 The 2220 Nways Switch Model 500 consists of the following base components Rack with shelf containing ten adapter slots Eight slots for port or trunk Type 1 or Type 2 adapters combined trunk and control point Type 2 adapters and voice server adapters and associated Line Interface Coupler LIC s or voice server extensions Two slots for independent control point Type 1 or Type 2 adapters Note These two slots do not allow for any Line Interface Coupler
257. he arbitration is the management of the control given to different software in the machine that uses the 5C interrupt For the native support the CO module is configured It provides the CCB interface that is used to access the IEEE 802 2 support that resides in the adapter microcode The user is given a choice to load the NetBIOS support TO module In most LSP cases this module does get loaded Shallow Adapter Support The shallow adapter support is similar for token ring Ethernet FDDI and OEM adapters It is an NDIS environment with the AO module once again being configured The EO module is then loaded and this provides the CCB interface for the IEEE 802 2 code and also the IEEE 802 2 code support itself Once again the NetBIOS support TO module is optional The particular NDIS MAC driver is not shipped with LSP but should be supplied with the LAN adapter High Performance NetBIOS If the user requires only the NetBIOS interface that is does not have IEEE 802 2 applications an option is given during the LSP install to just install the AO module and the JO module This configuration is only supported in the NDIS environment but it does provide a higher performing NetBIOS support than the AO E0 and TO configuration Note that the JO module does not provide an IEEE 802 2 interface for applications to use The DOS TCP IP support also provides a DOS transport for the IBM LAN adapters This support uses the NDIS Interface Chapter 1 LAN A
258. he available FDDI paths to this module The number of FDDI paths used by a single FDDI network on the Enhanced TriChannel equals the number of FDDI modules on that network The FDDI paths on the Enhanced TriChannel use the same pins on the backplane as are used by the Ethernet and or token ring segments On the ShuntBus in addition to the two dedicated Ethernet segments there can be up to four FDDI segments Unlike the Enhanced TriChannel there is no concept of FDDI paths on the ShuntBus 2 11 2 5 Network Allocations on the 8260 Backplane As we now have so many options of switching modules and ports between networks it is perhaps a good time to clarify the rules regarding those allocations e 8250 Ethernet ports or modules can be connected to parallel addressed segments ethernet_1 thru 3 on the Enhanced TriChannel only 8250 Ethernet ports or modules cannot be connected to serially addressed segments ethernet_4 thru 8 on either the TriChannel or ShuntBus e 8260 Ethernet ports or modules can be connected to any of the segments ethernet_1 thru 8 on the TriChannel or ShuntBus When connected to ethernet_1 thru 3 they use parallel addressing and when connected to ethernet_4 thru 8 they use serial addressing e 8250 token ring or FDDI modules can only be connected to the segments on the Enhanced TriChannel They cannot be connected to the segments on the ShuntBus e 8260 token ring or future 8260 FDDI modules cannot be con
259. he network by SNMP commands written to the IBM 8224 MIB in each of the six hubs This leaves hubs 7 through 10 still connected to one collision domain Segment 3 through the Ethernet bus in the Hub Expansion Ports and their associated cables Then using UTP cables between 10Base T ports hubs 1 2 and 3 have been cascaded together to form Segment 1 In the same manner hubs 4 5 and 6 have been cascaded together to form Segment 2 In this way three collision domains have been formed from the stack of ten hubs On hubs 1 2 4 and 5 the uplink switch has been set to This setting reverses the internal crossover of the receive and transmit signal pairs in port 16 of each of those hubs allowing standard straight through 10Base T cables to be used for cascading through those ports LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Ta csdsssrcssnassss Ea an E ee 4 8 CE a a e oS casa ME E nwe b 48 CICO e a MeL tub gt SEGMENT Jog obsessed seas esas C H ia MOIN BLS p Hub 4 ISOLATEO SEGMENT 2 Hub ISAATED p IBM 8274 EtherSitrearner Switch Figure 32 A Stack of IBM 8224 Hubs Configured for Two Segments Joined with an IBM 8271 Switch This example shows a segmented stack of 8224 hubs Connectivity between the two collision domains is provided by an IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch Explanation for Figure 32 Hubs 4 and 5 have both been
260. hed The statistics which are collected by E MAC are passed to DMM which allows you to display them locally or access them in band through an application such as RMonitor for AlX Note that the communication between DMM and the E MAC installed on the 8260 media modules is via MLAN The E MAC supports collection of a subset of the RMON statistics Token Ring MAC Daughter Card T MAC The T MAC must be mounted on an 8260 token ring media module This is because at this stage there is no token carrier DMM The T MAC performs the same functions for token ring as the E MAC does for Ethernet lt gathers network and port statistics and transmits them to the DMM via the MLAN Each token ring media module has the housing to install one T MAC In addition to providing DMM with the interface to the backplane segments T MAC allows you to collect statistics about the token ring segment to which it is attached The statistics which are collected by T MAC are passed to DMM over MLAN which allows you to access them locally or in band through an application such as RMonitor for AIX T MAC supports collection of a subset of RMON statistics 2 11 7 4 Overview of Management and Control Commands Commands used in the 8260 hub can be organized into hierarchical or layer like structures When you first log in to the 8260 hub with the system user ID commands in the first layer will be available Commands may have various parameters or options associated with the
261. highway of the future lt works equally well on local and wide area networks and is used in both private and public networks ATM is particularly well suited to applications requiring voice video and data traffic types While enabling new applications ATM extends current application solutions hindered by limited bandwidth Since most users will not migrate current LANs to ATM overnight IBM plans for ATM as a LAN technology to coexist for many years with current LANs token ring or Ethernet This is why IBM has implemented ATM in the IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub The IBM 8260 already supports connectivity to other LANs Ethernet token ring and FDDI Changing a workstation connection from current LAN to ATM is similar to changing it from Ethernet to token ring a matter of moving a connector in the wiring cabinet from a porton a LAN module to a port on an ATM module IBM participates in the ATM Forum and has in a statement declared that all IBM products are to be ATM Forum compliant as the standards are set 5 1 IBM 8260 ATM Subsystem Mode of Operations End systems workstations bridges concentrators connect to the IBM 8260 at 155 Mbps 100 Mbps and 25 Mbps End systems can use different modes for ATM operations e Classical IP LAN Emulation Native ATM 5 1 1 Classical IP In this mode the IP protocol runs just above the ATM application adaptation layer AAL The ATM addresses are used in the same way as
262. ht ports can be configured to operate in full duplex mode Full duplex Ethernet an emerging extension to the existing IEEE 802 3 standard provides for simultaneous two way transmission between the 8271 and the server Full duplex Ethernet provides two independent data paths between the 8271 and the LAN station on the dedicated LAN segment each with a bandwidth of 10 Mbps for a total of 20 Mbps per full duplex Ethernet switch port In fact these independent parallel full duplex paths are extended throughout the internal design of the 8271 so that each of the two 10 Mbps paths that are part of a full duplex Ethernet connection can be switched to different half duplex ports on the 8271 or can be switched to half duplex halves of other full duplex Ethernet connections on the 8271 When all of the ports on the 8271 are configured for full duplex operation the 8271 could achieve an aggregate bandwidth of up to 80 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Mbps performance not often found in products in this price range Each port on the 8271 is configured for full duplex Ethernet operation via switches on the front panel of the 8271 Note Full duplex communication is available between the 8271 and dedicated media LAN segments only single workstation Full duplex Ethernet requires a full duplex capable Ethernet adapter such as the IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter While existing servers may not be currently equipped with
263. ific MAC frames stations must not transmit these frames nor should LAN switches forward these frames when in full duplex mode The active monitor and standby monitor present MAC frames could be used to provide a periodic heartbeat between a station and a switch port on a full duplex link to indicate a logical presence to each other When in full duplex mode a switch port can learn the address of its attaching adapter during the activation protocol This is particularly applicable to mapping a station address to a physical port on an interconnect switch Beacon MAC frames are still applicable in full duplex mode to indicate temporary or permanent hard errors Report soft error MAC frames can also still be used but some of the error conditions that are reportable in half duplex token ring mode do not apply to full duplex mode Full duplex operation should be less sensitive to many of the disruptions that can occur in normal token ring operation For example errors associated with maintaining token flow are no longer a concern Also link errors no longer affect data on the entire ring but only on an isolated segment However there can still be situations where the first indication of a problem is the appearance of soft errors in data frames Errors in received frames may be indicative of a poor transmission link or of external electromagnetic interference These errors will normally appear as frame check sequence FCS errors Improperly for
264. ill refer to the Enhanced TriChannel segments as token_ring_1 thru 7 and to the ShuntBus segments as token_ring_1 thru 10 In other words some token ring segments on the Enhanced TriChannel have identical names to the token ring segments on the ShuntBus However the management module is programmed to realize that when you refer to a token_ring segment number when issuing a command for the 8250 module that segment is on the Enhanced TriChannel and when the command is issued for an 8260 module the referenced segment number is on the ShuntBus This is of course due to the fact that 8250 token ring modules can only be connected to the Enhanced TriChannel and the 8260 token ring modules can only be connected to the ShuntBus Using Figure 89 on page 170 you can see that if for example fddi_1 network on the ShuntBus is used it eliminates token_ring_1 token_ring_2 and token_ring_3 Also you can see that the use of Ethernet segments ethernet_7 and ethernet_8 have no affect on the availability of token ring and FDDI segments Chapter 2 Hubs 169 170 B260 SBALLOC Figure 89 ShuntBus Backplane Network Allocation In designing your network if possible it is recommended that you use the Enhanced TriChannel as well as the two dedicated Ethernet segments on the ShuntBus for the Ethernet segments only and use the ShuntBus for the token ring segments only 2 11 2 6 Management Buses As mentioned earlier pins on the TriChannel ba
265. in full duplex mode Full duplex token ring an emerging extension to the existing IEEE 802 5 standard provides for simultaneous two way transmission between the IBM 8272 and the server Full duplex token ring provides two independent data Chapter 3 Switches 217 3 2 1 Compatibility The 8272 LANStreamer Switch is compatible with and can forward frames between existing 4 or 16 Mbps token ring LAN segments whether the segments consist of IBM or non IBM machines whether the machines contain IBM or non IBM token ring adapters and whether the token ring LAN segment is formed using IBM or non IBM concentrators as long as these network components conform to the specifications listed in the IEEE 802 5 standard The 8272 is compatible with all current IBM token ring adapters and concentrators including 218 paths between the IBM 8272 and the LAN station on the dedicated LAN segment each with a bandwidth of 16 Mbps for a total of 32 Mbps per full duplex token ring switch port In fact these independent parallel full duplex paths are extended throughout the internal design of the IBM 8272 so that each of the two 16 Mbps paths that are part of a full duplex token ring connection can be switched to different half duplex ports on the IBM 8272 or can be switched to half duplex halves of other full duplex token ring connections on the 8272 When all of the ports on the 8272 are configured for full duplex operation the 8272 may provide an aggregat
266. information base MIB extensions for ATM operations You may obtain the latest version of the 8260 MIB from a public Internet library Do as follows 1 FTP to venera isi edu or 128 9 0 32 2 Enter the login name anonymous and the password guest 3 Change to the MIB directory using the cd mib command 4 List the contents of the directory using the Is 1 command and use CTRL S to pause the display to view the available IBM entries 5 Copy the MIB file to your current directory with the command get ibm hub mib txt 6 Exit FTP with the quit command If you do not have access to the Internet contact IBM for assistance 5 6 IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge 260 The following figure shows the front panel of the 8281 ATM LAN Bridge LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Power Connector G Unit Number Machine Type LAN ATM and Serial Attachment Attachment Number Module Module Base RJ 45 Ethernet ATM SC MAC Connector AUI Connector Address Connector 240 02A Power Rating Label AIO aj l RA ct rT Taken Ring 7 basar Port Reference Port ElA 232 Number 1 Card Tray Number 2 Service Port Green Port Status LED Base Power LED Ethernet Activity LED Green Base OK Status LED Yellow Port Status LED Yellow Base Status LED Figure 114 The 8281 Front Panel The attachment modules are optional The ATM bridge provides
267. ing Network We could not find original boxes for the older adapters and did not have access to boxes for some of the newest adapters which means the names used may be slightly incorrect in certain cases A 1 2 Feature Code IBM Marketing forces use the feature code to identify adapters they wish to order for customers The feature code must always be accompanied by a machine type or ordering vehicle which is needed to identify what class of machines the individual feature code will function with In the case of token ring adapters there are three relevant ordering vehicles One is 8530 ZZZ which is used to order adapters which are used in PC bus or AT ISA bus PCs and PS 2s A second is 8550 ZZZ which is used to order adapters used in Micro Channel PS 2s and to order the PCMCIA Credit Card Adapter A third ordering vehicle is 7551 ZZZ which is used to order the EISA adapter and the 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter A 1 3 Part Number A part number serves the same purpose as the machine type feature code but tends to be used by IBM dealers as opposed to the direct sales force A 1 4 Field Replaceable Unit Number FRU numbers are used by IBM customer engineers to order replacement adapters for those units which fail In most cases the FRU number is a different number than the Part Number The reason for this is that a Part Number will include an adapter a set of installation instructions a diagnostic diskette and a pretty box A FRU number will
268. integrated ATM Forum compliant LES will be available in 1996 5 1 3 Native ATM Native ATM operates in conformance with ATM UNI 3 0 ILMI registration Q93B call setup 5 2 ATM Subsystem Traffic Management High speed ATM networks will support a great diversity of applications with different traffic and quality of service QOS requirements For example certain applications will require guaranteed levels of delay and throughput multimedia and time critical data applications while others can tolerate variations in delay and throughput LAN traffic Such diversity will require different congestion management methods The IBM 8260 ATM subsystem supports two types of traffic e The ATM reserved bandwidth RB service e The available bit rate ABR service or best effort In the ATM reserved bandwidth RB service an application needs to establish a traffic contract with the network before transmitting data The traffic contract will include specification of a desired QOS class and a set of traffic descriptors The network through resource allocation will provide the desired QOS for the ATM connection or will refuse the call This method will require the source to be modelled accurately and to be able to describe its traffic pattern precisely The allocated bandwidth will be usually less than the peak rate in order to benefit from statistical multiplexing gains which may cause congestion A source policing scheme will make sure th
269. ion Editor m5 Hardware Diagnostics After 5 seconds the module SMT Code will be started automatically Please select module Figure 75 FDDI Concentrator Boot Code Main Menu 5 Select Configuration Editor by typing m4 and pressing Enter within five seconds The Configuration Editor menu is displayed as shown in Figure 76 Note If you do not enter a selection within five seconds the SMT module is automatically started In order to exit from the SMT module and return to the main menu type reset and press Enter Configuration Editor Main Menu 0 Exit 1 Edit Configuration 2 Save Configuration 3 Cancel All Changes Please select function 0 Figure 76 FDDI Concentrator Boot Code Main Menu 6 Select Edit Configuration by typing 1 and pressing Enter The Edit Configuration menu is displayed as in Figure 77 Edit Configuration Menu 0 Exit 1 Edit SMT Configuration 2 Edit Port Configuration 3 Edit IP Configuration 4 Edit SNMP Configuration 5 Display MAC Address Please select function 0 Figure 77 FDDI Concentrator Boot Code Main Menu Chapter 2 Hubs 149 Use the Edit Configuration menu to customize the 8244 and change preconfigured settings for new options For detailed information on editing SMT Parameters Port Configuration Parameters IP Parameters SNMP Parameters and displaying MAC Addresses refer to the IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator User s Guide GA33 0339
270. irect sequence as a transmission protocol Mobile devices are portable transaction computers PTCs that appear to the AS 400 host as 5250 terminals This allows the PTCs access to applications and functions residing on the AS 400 Note IBM provides both the software and the wireless LAN adapters 2 The following are wide area network products a RadioPAC 400 It uses the AS 400 as a communications hub It supports public and private radio frequency data networks It provides two way wireless communication between radio enabled devices such as laptop and notebook computers b PagerPAC 400 It uses the AS 400 as a communications hub It provides a one way paging function via a public or private paging service 232 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM c ARTour e It supports TCP IP applications over a WAN using a carrier network e It supports GSM RD LAP Motorola Mobitex Ericsson and Inmarsat satellite communication radio interfaces Note A 3270 5250 emulation application is available for access to host based applications Note IBM provides the software IBM also provides wireless LAN adapters to support the Mobitex and RD LAP interfaces 4 1 2 PC Wireless LAN Product Overview IBM now supports a number of products that cater to the expanding wireless LAN market Although some of these products share common functions and features there are differences in capability which makes each suitable to
271. irements 229 switch 223 IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch 2220 Nways Switch 223 IBM 6629 60 IBM 8226 Token Ring RJ 45 connection 99 IBM 8228 Multistation Access Unit MAU 101 IBM 8240 136 IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator 145 IBM 8260 Model 010 164 IBM 8260 Model 017 164 IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring Adapters IBM cabling system 138 IBM FDDI adapters IBM FDDI EISA Adapter 18 IBM FDDI ISA Adapter 18 IBM FDDI MCA Adapter 18 IBM FDDI UTP 5 Adapters 20 IBM InfraRed LAN Adapter 22 IBM MCA Ethernet adapters IBM Dual EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter 12 IBM ISA Etherjet adapters 14 IBM ISA Ethernet adapters 13 IBM LAN Adapter A for Ethernet 12 IBM PCI Ethernet Adapters 14 Index 305 IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub 131 IBM Nways BroadBand Switch Control Program 229 IBM PCMCIA II RF Adapter Wireless LAN Entry 22 IBM Token Ring 16 4 Credit Card Adapter 11 IBM TURBOWAYS 100 ATM MC Adapter 17 IBM TURBOWAYS 155 ATM MC Adapter 17 IBM TURBOWAYS 155 ATM SBus Adapters 18 IBM TURBOWAYS 25 ATM ISA 18 IBM TURBOWAYS 25 ATM MCA Adapters 18 IBM TURBOWAYS 25 ATM SBus Adapters 18 IBM Wireless ISA MCA and PCMCIA II RF Adapters 23 IBM Wireless LAN 235 IBM Wireless LAN Access Point 231 IBM Wireless LAN Entry 233 IBM wireless products 231 IEEE 802 3 61 illegal connection 144 impulse noise 242 243 INATMARP 248 industrial scientific and medical ISM frequency band 235 InfraRed LAN Adapter 22 Inmarsat 233 installation IBM 8240 140 installation
272. ision 2 4 1 3 Inter 8224 Communications in Managed Stacks In a stack with one or more 8224 Model 002s an inter hub control bus is activated inside the hub expansion cables in addition to the Ethernet bus The control bus is used to pass stack control information from 8224 to 8224 Figure 24 on page 79 gives a logical view of the inside of the hub expansion cable for a managed stack 78 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Terminator _T g o la o os Co Tabac III II IA e seno coto bobo co a a A y ee Physical View jele Je e Logical View Inter hub Command Bus External Ethernet Bus Figure 24 A Managed Stack of 8224s Using an SNMP based management application you can get the following information about all 8224s in a stack while attached to any 8224 in a stack Model number and media expansion port module type MAC address IP address IP subnet mask IP default gateway Whether the 8224 is segmented from the external Ethernet bus Using an SNMP based network manager you can perform any of the following actions on any 8224 in a stack while attached to any 8224 in a stack Set the IP address Set the IP subnet mask Set the IP default gateway Segment the 8224 from the external Ethernet bus or rejoin the 8224 to the bus Set the write community name Enable or disable write protect Reset
273. istics for the network to which it is assigned It can be mounted on any 8260 token ring media module 2 11 8 4 8260 Multiprotocol Interconnect Module The 8260 Multiprotocol Interconnect Module is a one or two slot module for the 8260 which allows you to interconnect Ethernet 802 3 and token ring networks using bridging and or routing functions These modules provide 6 ports for backplane attachments to the Ethernet segments on the ShuntBus or TriChannel Additionally the two slot module provides you with the capability to install two additional I O cards for providing connection to external token ring and or Ethernet networks These additional I O cards will provide the seventh and eighth port on the module At the time of writing this book the following I O cards are available e Token ring 4 16 I O card e Ethernet 10Base T I O card e Ethernet 10Base2 I O card e Ethernet 10Base5 I O card Note that the I O cards for the two slot module only provide attachment capability to the external networks For example installation of the token ring I O card does not provide the ability to connect the module to the token ring segments on the backplane The one slot module can perform the following functions e Transparent bridging between Ethernet 802 3 segments e IP routing between Ethernet 802 3 segments e IPX routing between Ethernet 802 3 segments e DECnet Phase IV routing between Ethernet 802 3 segments The two slot module can perform
274. it or switch port that does not support full duplex operation A station cannot physically determine whether it is attached to a half duplex token ring concentrator or to a full duplex switch This determination must be accomplished via a logical protocol during the activation procedure Figure 107 shows one example activation sequence for an adapter to a switch or concentrator port In state S2 the normal token ring insertion procedure of internal diagnostics and lobe media test is executed State S3 advertises for example via a MAC frame the capability of the adapter to operate in full duplex mode lf the port is capable of full duplex operation transition is made to state S6 full duplex operation otherwise transition is made to state S5 normal token ring operation Off Inactive Internal diagnostics and lobe test Advertise full duplex capability Wait for response Normal H Full duplex Token Ring operation pperation 31785011 Figure 107 Example Activation Sequence Following activation for full duplex mode of operation the token access protocols can be suspended while other functions such as those used to detect and report errors continue to be active When in full duplex mode each station or switch port must transmit using the local crystal within that station since there is no longer an active monitor providing clocking The existing differential Manchester encoding scheme is maintained Stations will re
275. ith an enhanced service level and increased system availability As an alternative you may provide IBM service personnel with either an ASCII terminal or a PC PS with VT100 emulation In normal operation mode the IBM 8260 does not need the ASCII terminal If you have a TCP IP terminal available in the LAN this can handle the function Chapter 5 ATM Products 259 Instead of the above remote access to the 8260 remote access to a RISC System 6000 in the network with the programs described in 5 5 3 Software Requirements on page 260 provides the enhanced serviceability to the IBM 8260 Hub 5 5 3 Software Requirements You do not need any mandatory software to operate the 8260 hub However we recommend that you install the last versions for the distributed management module DMM and for the ATM switch control point module to have all the latest 8260 products announced recognized by the code With the 8260 Automatic Update Service AUS the updates are automatically sent to you The configurators for the Nways 8281 TR Ethernet ATM LAN Bridge Module and the Nways 8282 ATM Concentrator Module are both designed to run under IBM DOS 5 0 or later and with IBM TCP IP for DOS 2 1 or later or equivalent The configurators are shipped with the modules 5 5 4 8260 MIB Installation To manage your 8260 from an SNMP management station you have to install the 8260 MIB It gives you the full benefit from the 8260 SNMP compliant management
276. k monitoring function to daughter cards that can be mounted on EC DMM E MAC only or media modules so they do not use any valuable payload slots This also means you only need one DMM to manage the entire 8260 If your network grows and you need to invest in more network monitoring function you can install additional daughter card s matching the protocol of your new network s by just mounting them on the existing media module or EC DMM E MAC only The MAC daughter cards will be assigned to the token ring or Ethernet backplane using DMM commands Once assigned to a backplane segment they will be able to monitor the traffic on that segment and pass the collected information to the DMM Note that the MAC daughter cards installed on the media modules will communicate with the DMM or EC DMM using the MLAN as shown in Figure 92 The E MACs installed on the EC DMM however will use the on board circuitry of the EC DMM to communicate with DMM i i i sel i Segment 1 I Segment 2 Segmantn Controller Network Distributed Network Network Media Module Moniture Mgmt Monitor Monitor Module Card Module Card Card E MAG E MAG E MAG The Controller Module The DMM uses The Network Monitor Media Modules manage exchanges information the SCI te send Cards monitor traffic data on LAN segments with all modules via commands to on LAN segments and and receive co
277. k switch beside it to straight through This action permits the use of a straight through cable for connections that usually require crossover cables Note If you are connecting port 16 on one 8224 hub to port 16 on another 8224 only one of these ports need to be set to when using a straight through cable If you find that you need a crossover cable you can make one yourself from a straight through cable Pinout diagrams are given in Crossover 10Base T Cables on page B 2 of the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Installation and User s Guide GA27 4024 Cabling Requirements for Media Expansion Ports Cable and connector requirements differ depending on the media expansion port module you use AUI Port Module The AUI port is a standard DB 15 female connector You can connect either an AUI cable or a transceiver to it 10Base2 Port Module Use standard thin coaxial cable with a BNC connector FOIRL 10Base FL Port Module Use either 62 5 125 micron 50 125 micron or 100 140 micron optical fiber cable with ST connectors Cabling Requirements for Hub Expansion Ports HEPs Use standard four pair cables such as UTP category 3 4 or 5 to interconnect 8224s through their HEPs All HEP cables must have RJ 45 connectors One 152 4 millimeter 6 inch hub expansion cable is shipped with every 8224 If you need longer cables to interconnect your 8224s remember that the total cable length from the first 8224 to the
278. ken ring attached PU T2 0 devices is supported by this feature e 3174 Models 13R 23R or 63R e System 36 with the LAN Attachment Feature and using 3270 emulation or APPC as a PU 2 0 node supported at 4 Mbps only e IBM PS 2 or PC using IBM Operating System 2 Extended Edition Version 1 1 or later e IBM PS 2 PC or 3270 PC using 3270 Workstation Program Version 1 1 with maintenance Release 1 1 2 or later e IBM PS 2 or PC using IBM 3270 Emulation Version 3 with maintenance Release 3 04 or later e IBM PS 2 or PC using APPC PC as a PU 2 0 node at 4 Mbps only e IBM 9370 using DPPX 370 as a PU 2 0 node e AS 400 3270 DE Mode or APPC as a PU 2 0 node Type 3A Dual Speed 16 4 Alternate IML Gateway 3044 Models 11L 11R 12L 12R 14R 21H 21L 21R 22R EMEA 22L 24R 61R 62R 64R This feature provides a Type 3A Dual Speed Communication Adapter and a 2 4 m 8 ft communication cable for attachment to an IBM Token Ring network operating at either 16 or 4 Mbps This feature may be used for two different functions 1 Alternate IML configuration 2 IBM 16 4 Mbps Token Ring gateway when using Configuration Support B or Configuration Support C 1 When used for the alternate IML function this feature and the appropriately configured Licensed Internal Code allows the 3174 Models 11L 11R 12L 12R 14R 21H 21L 21R 22R EMEA 22L 24R 61R 62R or 64R to operate in an alternate configuration on an IBM Token Ring as a model
279. l commands including segment or unsegment commands pass through the interhub serial bus and are unaffected by segmentation Thus they do not require bridges switches or router presence e Back up Ports Within any single unit in a managed stack up to eight primary backup port pairs can be designated via the IBM 8224 MIB By writing to the iom8224BkUpPortBackupPort object in the IBM 8224 MIB any IBM 8224 hub can be configured to provide up to eight sets of primary backup port pairs This feature is useful in applications such as file servers where redundant connections are required to help assure reliable network connections Examples of this topology are shown in Figure 36 on page 94 and Figure 37 on page 94 Chapter 2 Hubs 93 ETHE MET STACRIELE HR Ehem a caro a GUT Hub 4 5 u File Server Po NER 2 Hub 2 GTHE FHETT STC WIE Gi O eee Aah PP PPP aaa AAA mr a a Hub O Figure 36 An IBM 8224 Stack With Backup Port Enabled Server Application This example shows a hub stack connected to a server with 2 NICs Port 1 is the primary connection Port 2 is the secondary connection or backup port The server must be rebooted after the transfer to the backup port to reset to the new node address in the backup server NIC Stack 1 Hub 4 Hub 2 Hub 3 Uplink Hub 4 Uplink A od ate eed A S458 84a 0 e MF o 5 Hub 2 E XTTTTTTT
280. le profile It is also possible to take the values from the MIB of an IBM 8240 and change them to the chosen values View MIB Attributes This function provides all the MIB attributes for a selected IBM 8240 Some of the attributes can be changed others are for display only Remote Program Update The IBM 8240 is shipped with microcode already installed but the microcode diskette is also provided with the shipment The Remote Program Update function is needed to update the IBM 8240 with a new release of the microcode The function is also used by a remote concentrator to request a new copy of the microcode in case a microcode checksum error has occurred This situation is reported to the MF and a load of the 8240 microcode can be started automatically LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM The function can be activated for multiple concentrators at the same time if required After the transmission an automatic configuration with the previously stored configuration files can be started SMT Frame Builder This function is unique for a LAN maintenance tool It enables a user to issue any kind of SMT frame Only an experienced network operator or maintenance personnel should use this function The FDDI SMT Draft Standard publication or any other documentation which provides detailed information is required to use this function There is no checking or verification done for the frames built This allows a user to test the behavior
281. lso collected via this MIB e MIB support for topology and route computation management allowing the display from the central management station of the topology of the 8260 network and the set of attached ATM stations e IBM specific extensions Box specific switch modules and ports for greater manageability of system resources Enhanced PVC management automatic route computation and recovery Signalling Q 2931 and SAAL configurations and statistics ATM statistics to monitor activity on the network number of cells errors policy violations etc Services for local and remote administration LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM When you use it in combination with the IBM ATM Campus Manager for AlX the management of ATM networks is greatly simplified through a graphical application 5 5 Requirements To get an ATM system running certain hardware and software functions must be available 5 5 1 Hardware Requirements The minimum system you need for running ATM operations consists of an IBM 8260 Model A17 or A10 an ATM switch control point module and an ATM concentration module to connect workstations or other switches You need an ASCII type terminal for initial configuration of the ATM subsystem This terminal is not needed subsequently To monitor the power supplies and temperature you need to have at least one power supply installed and powered up A management module is not man
282. ly the cells and workstations in them operate in exactly the same manner as in an Ethernet connected cell 4 1 3 4 Network Management The IBM Wireless LAN Access Point can be configured to act as an SNMP agent and has a set of standard MIBs management information base descriptors that define generic information about SNMP capable devices on a network It also has a set of device specific MIBs which describe the information specific to bridges Finally it has an IBM specific MIB which describes information unique to a wireless bridge device LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM As an SNMP agent the IBM Wireless LAN Access Point can collect and send this information to a management station running NetView for AIX or a similar monitoring application somewhere on the network 4 1 3 5 Frame Filtering The IBM Wireless LAN Access Point can also be configured to act as a frame filter This function can be used to prevent broadcast or multicast frames originating on the Ethernet LAN from reaching the workstations NetBlOS frames addressed to cell members will be permitted while all others will be rejected 4 1 4 IBM Wireless LAN IBM Wireless LAN operates in the 2 4 GHz industrial scientific and medical ISM frequency band It uses the spread spectrum frequency hopping technique of TDMA Time Division Multiple Access as its transmission protocol TDMA divides the transmission time on a particular channel into a series of time slo
283. ly to an FDDI primary ring of 100 Mbps via an FDDI 100 Mbps concentrator The concentrator option offers additional protection by isolating the network from routine on off activity and individual workstation failures Characteristics e Supports single ring FDDI attachment at 100 Mbps e Requires one Micro Channel slot e Maximum of six FDDI single ring adapters supported on each RISC System 6000 machine depending upon slot availability on each machine type e Fiber optic cable is required for adapter connectivity and is the responsibility of the customer FDDI STP Single Ring Adapter 2725 Single attaching stations SAS using the RISC System 6000 FDDI STP Single Ring Adapter will allow customers to attach the workstation directly to an FDDI primary ring of 100 Mbps via an FDDI 100 Mbps concentrator The concentrator option offers additional protection by isolating the network from routine on off activity and individual workstation failures Characteristics e Supports single ring FDDI attachment at 100 Mbps e Requires one Micro Channel slot e Maximum of six FDDI STP single ring adapters supported on each RISC System 6000 machine depending upon slot availability per machine type LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Shielded twisted pair wire is required for adapter connectivity and is the responsibility of the customer FDDI STP Dual Ring Upgrade 2726 Dual attaching stations DAS using the RISC Syste
284. m For example in Figure 95 on page 184 all commands in the second layer are the available options associated with the set command Default_gateway ip address and subnet_mask are the possible options associated with the ip option and the set command in the second and first layers in respectively Chapter 2 Hubs 183 clear copy download logout maintain monitor ping resent revert save set show telnet First Layer M alert active default_gateway clock default_gateway community ip_address device subnet_mask group 7 host access ip 3 _ administrator login _ password module super_user network User port power rmon schedule script security terminal tftp tr_surrogate trunk Second Layer Third Layer NONGYAQ NONO1 Figure 95 A Sample of Hierarchical Structure Command In the remainder of this book the DMM commands will be covered as we discuss various components of the 8260 2 11 8 8260 Modules and Daughter Cards This section will give an overview of currently available 8260 modules and daughter cards and a brief description of them 2 11 8 1 Ethernet Modules Note that you can install and use any 8250 Ethernet module in the 8260 8260 Ethernet 36 Port Bank Switching Module This is a single slot connector switching module that Supports Telco 50 pin connector based 10Base T wiring Enables users to assign a backplane segment at the connector level of the module
285. m 6000 FDDI STP Single Ring Adapter and FDDI STP Dual Ring Upgrade will allow customers to attach to both the primary and secondary FDDI rings In the event of a failure this type of attachment allows the wrapping of the primary and the secondary rings for high network availability and problem isolation The dual ring upgrade can also attach to concentrator ports as a single attached station or a dual homing station A dual homing station attaches to two different concentrators with the second concentrator acting as a backup or a standby for the station in the event of a concentrator or port failure Characteristics e Supports dual ring FDDI attachment at 100 Mbps e Requires two Micro Channel slots including the single slot required for the FDDI STP single ring adapter e Maximum of three FDDI STP dual ring adapters supported on each RISC System 6000 machine depending upon slot availability per machine type e Shielded twisted pair wiring is required for adapter connectivity and is the responsibility of the customer 1 10 3172 LAN Adapters This section details the features and functions available to the 3172 for LAN connectivity Auto LANStreamer MC 32 F C 2235 This adapter attaches to a 16 or 4 Mbps token ring network that conforms to the IEEE 802 5 architecture This adapter has one RJ 45 connector The adapter is shipped with a conversion cable RJ 45 to shielded twisted pair cable that plugs into the RJ 45 connector on the
286. manually configure ring and bridge numbers for each and every port on the token ring switch The 8272 Model 108 functions similar to a multiport bridge forwarding frames among its eight ports Like a multiport source routing bridge the 8272 can forward frames based on the token ring routing information field RIF thus allowing redundant active paths in the network as well as duplicate addresses A key advantage of being a source routing switch is that all ports appear to be on the same logical ring The 8272 forwards frames based on destination MAC address for locally attached stations those part of token ring segments directly attached to the 8272 and based on the routing information field within the token ring frame for nonlocally attached stations With all of the ports on the 8272 having the same ring number duplicate addresses cannot be connected directly to adjacent ports However duplicate addresses and redundant paths can easily be supported by use of external source routing bridges for each redundant path Since a source routing switch does not require any ring and bridge numbering the 8272 substantially reduces the configuration burden on the network administrator for both initial setup as well as to support ongoing network changes In fact the 8272 is self configuring An additional benefit of the absence of unique bridge and ring numbers is that the network span of configurations consisting of source routing switches lik
287. manufactured today The main disadvantages of this architecture besides the slower bus speed is the lack of provisions for automatically configuring adapters and resolving resource conflicts among adapters and the lack of bus master fairness and arbitration The extended industry standard bus architecture EISA is a 32 bit superset of the ISA bus providing improved functionality and greater data rates while maintaining backward compatibility with the many ISA products already available The main advancements of the EISA bus are 32 bit addressing and 16 or 32 bit data transfers for DMA and bus master devices The EISA bus is synchronized by a 8 33 MHz bus clock and can achieve data transfer rates of up to 33 Mbps A bus arbitration scheme is also provided which allows efficient sharing of multiple EISA bus devices EISA systems can also automatically configure systems and adapters The EISA specification is published by BCPR Services Inc The peripheral component interconnect PCI bus is a new bus architecture for high performance throughput originally introduced by Intel The architecture is now controlled by an industry standards group The bus has 32 or 64 bits of address and data is processor independent and capable of speeds over 50 MHz Eight and 16 bit devices are not supported The 64 bit data bus width in combination with clock speeds over 50 Mhz can result in data transfer rates of several hundred megabytes per second an order of magnit
288. matted or incomplete frames must also be handled A frame that exceeds the maximum allowed frame size for a full duplex link could be handled as an improperly formatted frame In general the receiving station is responsible for detecting frame errors Frames that exceed the maximum frame length can be detected via the activation of a valid frame timer for example 2 25 milliseconds for a 4500 byte frame limit at 16 Mbps at the beginning of frame reception lf a valid end delimiter is not detected before the timer expires the frame reception is terminated The detection of an abort delimiter during the forwarding of a frame can also immediately terminate frame forwarding 3 3 IBM Ethernet Quad PeerMaster Server Adapters 222 IBM Ethernet Quad PeerMaster Server Adapters are available in two versions The Quad BT PeerMaster is equipped with four ports with RJ 45 connectors for attaching four independent 10Base T network segments via unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling of Category 3 or better The Quad B2 PeerMaster provides four ports with BNC connectors for attaching four independent 10Base2 network segments through thin coaxial shielded twisted pair STP media On both adapters the LAN segments can support any number of nodes For maximum flexibility with your existing wiring schemes you can mix and match any combination of Quad BT or Quad B2 adapters up to the maximum of six per LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM server
289. me with a positive shift and some with a negative shift depending upon the arrival angle e Doppler effect with a single scatterer If a signal is reflected by a perfect scatterer the signal received will present nulls proportional to the velocity of the transceiver e Doppler effect with multi scatterers in the vicinity of a mobile station In this case the resultant received signal is the sum of all scattered waves from different angles However it has been shown that it is the frequency modulation resulting from the highest direct Doppler frequency for a given velocity that is the most probable cause of a Doppler shift in a mobile receiver For in building transmissions there will be a lot of scatterers Some of them will be highly attenuated due to the beamwidth of the receive antenna Due to the relatively low velocity of roaming mobile stations the effect of a Doppler shift should not be of concerns at WLAN data rates When both transceivers bBase and mobile are stationary motion of people and equipment around the antennae result in multipath disturbances and fading effects 4 2 3 Interference Free space used by wireless LANs is sometimes noisy and occupied by various potential and actual sources of interference Signal interference or radio frequency noise is an environmental signal that is not readily detected and therefore not always considered Nevertheless if signal interference is present in your environment then this RF noi
290. ment is IBM s NetView for AIX NetView for AIX provides the capability of loading the Proxy Agent MIB displaying MIB information using the MIB Browser capability displaying trap information and converting traps to generic alerts to be forwarded to NetView 2 10 5 2 Things to Check Before Installing the FDDI Proxy Agent For detailed procedures on how to perform the following refer to FDDI Concepts and Products GG24 3865 1 Verify the OS 2 NDIS device driver level You will need to replace it if the level is prior to the prerequisite level of V2 01 If you have a level higher than V2 01 you do not need to modify your current installation 2 Install and customize TCP IP components to support the Proxy Agent 158 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Setting up SNMP e Modifying the CONFIG SYS file e Defining trap managers e Creating a community name file 3 Starting the SNMP daemons Starting SNMPREQD e Starting SNMPD 2 10 5 3 Installing Starting and Running the Proxy Agent For detailed procedures on how to perform the following refer to FDDI Concepts and Products GG24 3865 Proxy Agent Modes of Operation You can operate the Proxy Agent in three modes Customer Administrator Engineer The customer mode is the default operation mode and is set whenever the 8244 is started In this mode of operation you cannot perform any of the actions listed under the Actions pull down menu except Exit Yo
291. minimum segment size is one hub as a single hub cannot be segmented e Supports cascading through its media expansion ports or 10Base T ports e Provides centralized management of remote sites and branch offices through its out of band management support via the SLIP protocol IS managers can dial up a remote site or branch office and receive the management information from the 8224 at that site e Supports MIB II RFC 1213 the hub repeater MIB RFC 1516 and the Novell Repeater MIB through the SNMP agent These MIBs are open and can be managed by most DOS or AIX network management applications including NetView for AIX e Supports SNMP over IP and IPX The 8224 can be managed by an SNMP network management station running in a TCP IP network or via Novell s NetWare Management Station e Provides for redundant links between 10Base T port pairs via the IBM MIB extensions e Provides for redundant management units Model 002s in the stack 2 4 1 Technical Description 76 This section provides a technical overview of the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Figure 22 on page 77 shows the front panel of both 8224 models The hardware features include an operator panel indicating the following e Sixteen 10Base T Ports e Media Expansion Port e Communications Port Hub Expansion Port e Port and Machine status LEDs e Uplink Switch e Power On Off Switch LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM MAC Address Power
292. mmands the SCI all hub modules report the data to the from the DMM via the SCI and the MLAN to DMM via the MLAN collect info from Network Monitor Cards Figure 92 Management Schematic 178 The DMM and daughter cards provide management and control facilities in the following areas Configuration The DMM networks modules and port settings can be configured through the DMM using DMM commands The DMM can be used to configure 8250 as well as 8260 modules Statistics and fault reporting E MAC and T MAC provide support for collecting an extensive range of statistics based on RMON Out of band and in band down loading LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM The DMM provides both in band and out of band download features for down loading new software to DMM media modules and daughter cards Trivial file transfer protocol TFTP is used for in band downloads Out of band downloads allow you to download software using the Xmodem protocol from a local or modem attached PC with ASCII emulation software attached to the RS 232 port on the front panel of the DMM SNMP support In a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managed environment the DMM acts as the SNMP agent responding to SNMP requests and generating SNMP traps Telnet support Using Telnet you can log in remotely to any DMM on the network and manage it from the remote station You can also use Telnet from the terminal at
293. mmunication between LAN stations throughout the ATM network Support of source routing protocol SR for token ring and transparent bridging for Ethernet The ATM LAN bridge allows you to consolidate your LAN and ATM networks within the same chassis The ATM LAN bridge module characteristics are 2 slot width module 4 port RJ 45 or two port AUI connectors Attaches four token ring or four Ethernet segments The ATM port on the ATM backplane Supports LAN to LAN over the ATM network Supports local bridging between LANs Supports bridging LAN to ATM for ATM attached workstation and servers Discovers ATM partners and establishes a connection on an as needed basis self learning Provides filtering on token ring and Ethernet LANs Support SNMP network management Provides a RS232C front end port for configuration management The values of integrated 8281 are You may keep existing hubs for token ring and Ethernet and just modify your backbone On token ring both pairs are active but the ring wraps in case of a link failure In Ethernet one pair is primary the other is secondary The integrated 8281 has more bandwidth because of the ATM port on backplane no sharing with other station internal ATM backplane speed No need for additional ATM concentration port This is a true savings when both ports of the 100 Mbps module are used for SSI connections In this case the two remaining ports are unavailable for UNI connection
294. models e S Supported not an orderable feature on this system model but may be brought along if upgrading from a previous model e All of the token ring network features for the AS 400 system use the same 2 5 meter cable for connection to the token ring The standard IBM cabling system patch cables can increase the length where necessary e The High Performance Token Ring Adapter 2619 should be ordered where 9406 system LAN bandwidth demand is expected to exceed 1 4 Mbps This range assumes a random transaction mix consisting of both short interactive exchanges and large file transfers The low end of the range applies when short exchanges represent most of the LAN traffic Below these thresholds feature 2626 should offer acceptable performance at a lower price The high performance Ethernet adapter 2617 should be ordered when 9406 system LAN bandwidth demand is expected to exceed 3 1 Mbps This range assumes a random transaction mix consisting of both short interactive exchanges and large file transfers The low end of the range applies when short exchanges represent most of the LAN traffic Below these thresholds feature 2625 should offer acceptable performance ata lower price AS 400 Fiber Distributed Data Interface Adapter 2618 This feature provides one interface to connect an AS 400 system to an FDDI LAN which complies with ANSI X3T9 5 and ISO 9314 standards Feature 2618 consists of a card a wrap connector and Licensed
295. module and hot pluggable 5 4 4 1 Security The ATM switch control point module has these security features e Access to the module commands is protected by two levels of passwords user and administrator e An inactivity timer that terminates a session with the module when the inactivity time expires 5 4 5 ATM Network Management 258 The 8260 switch control point module implements an SNMP ATM agent that includes objects defined by the standard bodies as well as IBM specific extensions This gives you superior manageability of your ATM networks from the network management station This SNMP agent features the following functions e Full SNMP support get get next set and traps allowing complete control and monitoring through SNMP commands e Support of IP over ATM RFC 1577 for node management and service Network management stations can therefore contact the switch control point module agent either through direct connection to the ATM network using IP over ATM or connected to a traditional LAN that is routed to the ATM subnetwork e MIB 2 support e Full ILMI ATM Forum V3 0 support at UNI and from network management station This allows the network administrator to get the information that was registered by the end systems e IETF AToMIB allowing the network administrator to display the status and configuration of 8260 ATM interfaces including active VPCs and VCCs Statistics on ATM interfaces are a
296. mulation 248 This mode of operation provides a migration path from current LANs to ATM with no impact on the upper layer protocol The LAN emulation server LES implemented in a workstation is in charge of resolving the LAN addresses and performing broadcasts The LAN emulation client LEC ATM workstations and ATM LAN link connected to the ATM network register their LAN address and ATM address to the LES The LES and the set of registered LECs make up a virtual LAN segment A virtual LAN can also be seen as a logical broadcast domain that is decorellated from physical network structure When an LEC wants to send frames to a destination LAN address it performs the following steps the example assumes that the LECs have registered to the LES 1 Transmit the explorer frame to the LES Note that broadcast frames are always sent to the LES which performs broadcasting using point to multipoint connections 2 The LES updates the origin LEC with the ATM address of the destination LEC if it can find the destination LAN address in its LAN address ATM address table 3 The LES forwards the frame to the destination LEC 4 The origin LEC sets up an SVC to the destination LEC Subsequent frames will flow on this direct connection between the origin and the destination LEC Since the LAN emulation operates at the MAC layer it is not sensitive to the upper layer protocols Stations attached to ATM and stations attached to current
297. n 8228 is that an 8226 can provide the phantom current It enables an 8226 to be used as a splitter for all token ring MAUs hubs and concentrators not just from lobe insertion unit LIU ports of an 8230 003 013 like the 8228 requires LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM One lobe cable only Existing token ring network formed using any hub or MAU O 8226 Extending to a small workgroup a m using the splitter function meng As Seet Hs HE Figure 39 8226 Splitter Mode Instead of attaching to a workstation the lobe cable can go into the RI port of an 8226 set in splitter mode You then have eight ports to tie a small workgroup to the main ring See 2 7 IBM 8230 Token Ring Controlled Access Unit on page 102 for more information about using the 8226 as a splitter 2 6 IBM 8228 Multistation Access Unit MAU The IBM 8228 is a passive concentrator hub very easy to use and with a good cost benefit price It permits the interconnection of multiple 8228 access units via ring in ring out ports 2 6 1 Technical Description The IBM 8228 is an unintelligent unpowered token ring Multistation Access Unit MAU It can attach up to eight devices in a 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps token ring network Using IBM Cabling System Connectors ICS cables from the workstations or devices are simply plugged into the unit The IBM 8228 supports STP cabling as well
298. n Card with peer communication As LSP 1 3 4 is basically a PTF the major enhancements described below are for LSP 1 3 3 Basically there are two changes associated with 1 3 4 as follows 1 DXMJOMOD SYS and DXMEOMOD SYS are now supported in some environments However you still can t use these two modules if you want to use a NetBlOS application and an 802 2 application at the same time You must use DXMEOMOD SYS and DXMTOMOD SYS when both interfaces are required DXMJOMOD SYS amd DXMEOMOD SYS are supported in the following configurations 80386 and higher microprocessors Both protocol stacks supporting only one adapter Note More memory is required if you use DXMEOMOD SYS with DXMJOMOD SYS 2 The LSP Installation Utility has been changed to support installation of DXMJOMOD SYS with DXMEOMOD SYS as well as some improved usability enhancements Support of the multiple group address function has been added for IBM FDDI adapters Ethernet adapters and any other NDIS adapters that support multiple group addresses Up to 256 multiple group addresses can be set using the direct command DIR SET MULT GROUP ADDRESS Network Driver Interface Specification NDIS adapters can use the new protocol driver DXMJOMOD SYS to provide the NetBIOS interface The use of DXMJOMOD SYS may result in improved performance as compared with the use of DXMEOMOD SYS and DXMTOMOD SYS However DXMJOMOD SYS cannot be used if 802 2 support is required be
299. n of the new module Finally the controller module informs the DMM of the VPD of the newly inserted module Via the DMM command you can also display information about the power supplies installed and the amount of power used by the existing modules 2 11 4 1 The Controller Module Front Panel Figure 90 on page 173 shows the front view of the controller module LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Power Supply Status Fan Status Current Active Temperature Controller Status LED Test Button Initiates LED Test Hub Reset Resets Hub and Modules S NS Figure 90 Front View of the Controller Module Besides the hub reset and the LED test buttons the controller module has ten LEDs covering the four power supplies three fans active or standby mode and temperature on the front panel which indicate the state of the system environment Hub Reset Button Pressing this button which is active on the active controller module only resets all installed modules including both active and standby controller modules If you issue the reset hub command at the 8260 console it will give you the same result as using the hub reset button Chapter 2 Hubs 173 Prior to resetting a hub ensure that all parameters are saved otherwise you will have to re enter them Also remember that when the hub is reset the network operation is disrupted LED Test Button The LED test button is used to verify L
300. n ring interface on the ShuntBus connector uses three Shunt pairs to form one token ring network on the backplane The three Shunt pairs carry a clock and two data signals Note that regardless of the number of token ring modules used in a segment you always have the ability to set up ten separate token ring segments on the ShuntBus The same pins that are used for token ring segments on the ShuntBus are designed to be used for FDDI segments as well Therefore if you have a mixture of token ring and FDDI segments on the ShuntBus the maximum number of token ring segments would be lower depending on the number of FDDI segments 2 11 2 4 FDDI Segments on the Backplane The 8260 allows you to set up a maximum of four FDDI segments on the Enhanced TriChannel using the 8250 modules Also it is possible to set up a maximum of four FDDI segments on the ShuntBus using the 8260 FDDI modules However as there are no 8260 FDDI modules available yet if you are planning to have FDDI segments on the 8260 you must use the 8250 FDDI modules to set up FDDI segments on the Enhanced TriChannel only Each FDDI module which is assigned to one of the four FDDI networks on the Enhanced TriChannel uses one of the resources called FDDI path There are eight FDDI paths on the Enhanced TriChannel Chapter 2 Hubs 167 168 When you assign an FDDI module to one of the four FDDI networks on the Enhanced TriChannel the 8260 will automatically allocate one of t
301. nce with the high traffic stations off their segment The maximum number of Ethernet segments available per stack LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM of 8224s is the number of hubs in the stack In addition if communication between isolated segments is required a bridge switch or router is required to connect each segmented collision domain of the stack Usage Notes for Segmentation 1 The first step in 8224 stack segmentation is to issue an SNMP command to write to the IBM 8224 MIB ibm8224BkpINum object in each hub in the stack to be segmented Cascading can then be used to form larger collision domains out of the individually segmented hubs This cascading is only required when it is necessary to join more than one hub in a second segment within the stack If the segments in the stack are connected via bridges or routers full management capability can be maintained over the entire stack through any port in the stack The 8224 Model 001s remain manageable after segmentation because they can still send and receive stack control information to from one or more 8224 Model 002s via the inter hub serial bus in the hub expansion cabling Because management applications must communicate individually to the SNMP agents in each hub any management tool must have network connectivity to all hubs that are to be managed With the use of the Uplink switch the need for special crossover cables to connect the hubs t
302. ncepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM There are LED pairs green and amber at the front of the module to indicate the status one pair for the the DA module and one pair for each of the four master ports The DA modules are installed after the RA module The IBM 8240 has six slots available for these modules Any combination of the DA modules can be installed Figure 72 shows the DA module for optical fiber connections and Figure 73 shows the DA module for copper connections Module Port 1 Port LEDS Part LEDS Number N Af 4 gt E x 7 on O S oe o ole sle o olo o 1 Port 1 Address Label Latches Figure 72 IBM 8240 Device Attachment Module for Optical Fiber Module Port 1 Port LEDs Part LEDs Number Ml NAO LAAT p p 1 on jj ojo Sloe Slee 1 2 3 4 Port 1 Address Label Latches Figure 73 IBM 8240 Device Attachment Module for Copper 2 9 2 Ordering Consideration The IBM 8240 can be ordered by the following part numbers e 02F9799 Concentrator world trade countries e 02F9899 Concentrator US non Federal Government e 02F9700 Concentrator US Federal Government only e 02F9764 Concentrator Control Module The module does not have to be ordered separatel
303. nd a BOOTP request to the network manager and the network manager will provide the configuration information to the hub The 8224 supports SNMP over IP and IPX Thus the 8224 can be managed by an SNMP network management station running in a TCP IP network or via Novell s NetWare Management System LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 4 4 1 Management Features The SNMP hardware assist circuitry utilized in the IBM 8224 allows management access to the SNMP agent and the associated MIBs even with full bandwidth utilization With at least one IBM 8224 Model 002 in the stack the following management capabilities are provided e Full SNMP Management In Band and Out of Band via SLIP Over IP and IPX Protocols e Novell NMS HMI Compliant Supports Novell HUBNVLE MIB and IPX Autodiscovery Management Frame Formats Supported IP Ethernet Version 2 IPX Ethernet Version 2 IEEE 802 3 e MIBs Supported MIB II RFC 1213 Ethernet Repeater MIB RFC 1516 Novell Repeater MIB HUBNVLE IBM 8224 MIB e Segmentation Each unit can be segmented out of the network by setting IBM 8224 MIB variables Segmentation only affects the connection of a hub to the Ethernet bus in the hub expansion port cabling The interhub serial bus is unaffected To maintain intersegment Ethernet communication including SNMP management flows segments must be connected by bridges routers or switches All stack contro
304. nd change the preconfigured settings in the 8244 or set other options to satisfy your network requirements The following 8244 parameters can be specified Station management SMT e Port configuration e Internet Protocol IP e SNMP e MAC address Using the DEE COM program stored on the 8244 s System diskette is one way to customize the 8244 s parameters The DEE COM program requires e DOS version 2 0 or higher e Any graphic adapter e 256 KB RAM e Serial line interface com1 or com2 You can also use other V 24 terminal emulation programs such as the Windows and OS 2 Terminal that are preconfigured as follows e Serial line interface com1 e 9600 baud e 8 bit data transfer e 1 stop bit e No parity Note The 8244 does not support Telnet To display the Configuration Menu perform the following steps 1 Connect the 8244 to the com port of your workstation 2 Insert the System diskette that comes with the 8244 into drive A of the workstation 3 At the system prompt type DEE LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM and press Enter 4 Restart the 8244 by doing one of the following e Switch the 8244 OFF and ON again or Type reset and press Enter The main menu of the concentrator is displayed as shown in Figure 75 FDDI Concentrator Boot Code Main Menu The following modules are available m1 Software Update Loader m2 Configuration File Loader m3 SMT Code m4 Configurat
305. nd control cables need to be UTP category 5 with a 100 meter length limit e Lobe ports from RLAMs conform to usual cabling rules e Active RLAMs accept 150 ohm STP in addition to 100 120 ohm UTP FTP Be Independent Remote LAMs can work independently if no connection is made to the base unit They then become active or passive non manageable 16 port token ring hubs ol o o O ors eee E ESSE IEA A 1234567891911 1213141515 Figure 56 Front View Remote LAM Note that the magnified symbol in the diagram of a piece twisted wire appears only on the active RLAM 2 7 1 3 Dual Ring Redundancy Feature f c 2029 The Dual Ring Redundancy feature sometimes referred to as the MAC daughter card for the 8230 003 is a field installable feature Customer engineers perform the installation lt provides dual ring error recovery for the IBM 8230 003 013 when other devices are attached to the segment via ring in and ring out and is co requisite for any of the five RI RO modules Without the MAC daughter card the 8230 Model 3 has only one MAC appearance PO adapter on the ring path With only the PO adapter to monitor a single point on the main ring path you will be able to recover only internal beacon scenarios With this optional card you get two more MAC presences the Pl and S adapters These three adapters PO Pl and S monitor ring signals on different points of the main and backup ring
306. ndle Figure 53 Front View RJ 45 Lobe Attachment Module LAM Chapter 2 Hubs 113 LAM LEDs Number RJ 45 Handle Recess Connector Handle Figure 54 Front View Shielded RJ 45 Lobe Attachment Module LAM Shielded and Unshielded RJ 45 LAM Note that these two LAMs are very similar in appearance except that the shielded one has silvery metal around the RJ 45 sockets while the unshielded ones are surrounded with black plastic Connector Connector Figure 55 Rear View Lobe Attachment Module LAM Remote LAM A remote LAM is a separate rack mountable device that has 16 ports for workstation attachment It is connected to an 8230 base unit with a remote LIU via two category 5 UTP cables that provide signals and data flow Two models 1 Active RLAM f c 8225 2 Passive RLAM f c 8710 e When attached to the 8230 base unit workstations on the RLAM join the same segment as other workstations attached to the 8230 via different modules LIUs or LAMs 114 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Active RLAMs can drive category 3 cables for 16 Mbps ring speed Data a
307. nected to any segment on the Enhanced TriChannel They can only be connected to the segments on the ShuntBus e Any module can plug into any slot and all allocation of modules to networks or channels regardless of whether they are TriChannel or ShuntBus is done by electronic switching via DIP switches on the modules or management module commands Figure 88 on page 169 shows the Enhanced TriChannel network allocation and how the mixing of various network types affect the availability of the others LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Ethernet 1 Ethernet 4 Ethernet 2 Ethernet 5 Ethernet 3 Ethernet 6 Figure 88 TriChannel Backplane Network Allocation Using Figure 88 you can see that if for example tr_path_8250_3 path is used it eliminates ethernet_path_1 ethernet_path_4 fddi_path_8250_1 and fddi_path_8250 2 If ethernet_path_5 is used it eliminates tr_path_8250_11 tr_path_8250_2 and fddi_path_8250_ 6 Figure 89 on page 170 illustrates the possible combinations of the network segments on the ShuntBus In this diagram we have shown the token ring networks as TR 16 thru 25 and FDDI networks as FDDI9 thru 12 This is to provide a distinction between the segments on the Enhanced TriChannel and the ShuntBus for our discussion in this book However when you use the management module commands to assign the token ring modules to the token ring segments on the backplane you w
308. nfiguration parameters are used to select either the 16 or 4 Mbps rate Early token release can be enabled or disabled when the 16 Mbps rate is selected These controls allow the customer to easily migrate from a 4 to a 16 Mbps token ring network Feature 2619 is functionally equivalent to feature 2626 Feature 2619 is based on a faster microprocessor providing up to three times the throughput of feature 2626 A maximum frame size of up to 16 KB is supported Support of OS 400 Version 2 Release 2 is required I O Card Slots Used One Maximum Four per system on all supported models except the Models E80 E90 E95 F80 F90 and F95 which have a maximum of six Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart in Table 5 on page 56 Cables One token ring network attachment 2 5 meter 8 foot cable is included with each token ring adapter AS 400 16 4 Mbps Token Ring Network Adapter A 2626 The 16 4 Mbps Token Ring Network Adapter A feature provides a single attachment to either a 16 Mbps or a 4 Mbps IBM Token Ring network The feature consists of an adapter card internal code which supplies IEEE 802 5 media access control MAC and IEEE 802 2 logical link control LLC functions and an external 2 5 meter 8 foot cable The standard IBM cabling system patch cables can increase the length where necessary OS 400 configuration parameters are used to select either the 16 or 4 Mbps rate Early token release can be enabled or disabled when t
309. ng at the International Technical Support Organization Raleigh Center The advisors for this project were Ricardo Haragutchi International Technical Support Organization Raleigh John Parker International Technical Support Organization Raleigh The authors of this document were Edmilson Barbosa IBM Brazil Ingvar Hyleborg IBM Sweden Jefferson da Silva IBM GSI Brazil Klaus Wichmann ITSO Raleigh Marcello Belloni Gomes IBM Brazil Thanks to the following people for their invaluable advice and guidance provided in the production of this document Toshi Shimizu International Technical Support Organization Austin Aroldo Yai Barry Nusbaum Donna Fox Fergus Stewart Jose Boo Juan Rodriguez Mark DeCain Mohammad Shabani Robert Macgregor Stephen Breese Volkert Kreuk International Technical Support Organization Raleigh Alan Millard Arthur Bond Bert Wendle Carol Carson Dean Stockwell Erik Dixon H Parrish X LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Paul Carter IBM Research Triangle Park Raleigh NC Comments Welcome We want our redbooks to be as helpful as possible Should you have any comments about this or other redbooks please send us a note at the following address redbook vnet ibm com Your comments are important to us Preface Xi Xii LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support This chapter discusses the most recently available
310. ng networks are implemented with a large number of 8228s and network management capability becomes a requirement but investment has to be kept to a minimum e If yes consider 8230 003 013 using 8228s as splitters e If no consider 8250 60 4 8230s and 8250 60s can be complementary to each other e Use 8250 60s in central sites where multiple protocols and segmentation are most common e Use 8230s in satellite sites where token ring is the single topology used e Add fiber copper RI RO modules in the 8230s Add repeater modules fiber or copper in the 8250 60s 5 Will the features and advantages of remote LAMs bring major benefit to the network implementation e If yes consider 8230 003 013 If no consider 8250 60 130 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 7 5 3 Summary Table 16 summarizes IBM token ring hubs currently available and their major characteristics Table 16 Hub Comparison Product Connector Number of Can use RI RO Management types ports 8228s as Protocols without splitters splitters 8228 001 ICS 8 N A Copper None 8226 001 Copper None 8230 001 ICS RJ 45 Copper CMOL passive and or Fiber 8230 002 ICS RJ 45 Copper CMOL passive and or RJ 45 Fiber active 8230 003 ICS RJ 45 Copper CMOL or 013 passive and or SNMP RJ 45 Fiber active 2 8 IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub The IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub is an affordable token ring
311. ng traffic statistics The silver level delivers error and performance monitoring on a per port basis user defined thresholds and 8 out of 13 of the following groups of remote monitoring RMON specification TR statistics host ring station ring station order ring station configuration source routing event and alarm groups For the most complete suite of network management information managed base Models AG1 and PG1 Active Gold 1 and Passive Gold 1 support all 13 RMON groups as well as event logging The additional RMON groups are host top N matrix history filter and packet capture Upgrades from one level to another can be done via in band downloads Using the Code Download kit in combination with your network management workstation an entire network can be upgraded from your office The 8238 reduces the cost of keeping your network up to date to an absolute minimum In addition the 8238 allows you to keep crucial information such as its serial number the revision level date of installation and service dates in the hub s memory This information which is accessible from the management workstation can save hours of record keeping and allows for an efficient centralized inventory Figure 68 Example of a Corporate Network Chapter 2 Hubs 133 2 8 1 4 Future Proofing Your Token Ring Installations The 8238 gives you the flexibility to grow and manage your token ring LANs wherever they are with a minim
312. nments To manage an 8230 003 013 in an SNMP environment the agent that talks to LNM for AIX runs inside the 8230 This means you do not need a separate workstation to run additional programs On the other hand if the Model 3 13 is set to run in CMOL mode you need LNM for OS 2 running on a separate PC to act as the agent For detailed information on LNM for AIX usage refer to Using LAN Network Manager for AIX SC31 7110 2 7 4 4 CMOL When an 8230 003 is set to CMOL mode with the SNMP CMOL switch you can manage it with e LAN Network Manager LNM for OS 2 V2 e LNM for AIX with the LNM for OS 2 proxy agent running on a separate PC workstation At the time of writing the code for CMOL is not available When the code is available you need to do the following 1 Upload the new code to the 8230 using the RS 232 program 2 Apply PTFs to LNM for OS 2 V2 The PTF number is not available yet but will be announced with the 8230 CMOL code Procedures to manage 8230 003 013 in CMOL mode with either LNM for OS 2 or LNM for AIX should be the same as what we are doing today to manage 8230 001 002 See another ITSO redbook LNM for OS 2 LNM for AIX and MSM Integration and Scenarios SG24 2504 and the user manual Using LNM for OS 2 V2 0 SC31 7105 for reference 2 7 5 Positioning This topic will position the 8230 with other IBM products Chapter 2 Hubs 129 2 7 5 1 The 8230 Family The 8230 003 013 are new members to the IBM 8230
313. nments particularly in OS 2 LAN Server and NetWare server environments and for IBM Industrial Computers complying with the Micro Channel architecture The 32 bit bus master interface coupled with high frame throughput capacity and low latency enables the adapters to achieve significant performance increases The new adapter total throughput capacity is up to twice that of the older IBM FDDI Workstation Adapters P N 93F0345 0346 0347 0348 features 0345 6 7 8 in a NetWare 3 11 environment using industry standard benchmarks IBM FDDI ISA ADAPTERS These adapters should be used for Personal System ValuePoint systems PS 2 systems the IBM 7537 Industrial Computers and non IBM systems that implement ISA particularly in DOS and NetWare client environments Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 19 20 IBM FDDI EISA ADAPTERS These adapters should be used for non IBM workstations implementing the EISA bus These new standards based ANSI X3T9 5 and ISO 9314 workstation adapters provide e An easy migration of networks from Ethernet and token ring to FDDI as business needs require An IBM FDDI solution for all the user s workstations IBM FDDI UTP 5 Adapters The IBM FDDI UTP 5 adapters are based on ANSI X3T9 5 and ISO 9314 standards and support unshielded twisted pair category Type 5 U in the UTP 5 EIA TIA TSB 36 and TSB 40 and FTP EIA TIA 568 standards the distance between FDDI stations is limited to 100 meters in this case
314. nt or Cell Leader No No Yes Cell Leader Only Yes IBM Wireless LAN Yes TDMA CSMA Hybrid French Protocol No Via Base Station Base Station Source Routing Bridge Yes Yes IP and IPX Yeso Yes Up to 1 Mbps By NAP By NAP Yes Yes Yes RSSI Yes 4 1 5 1 Reasons for Selecting IBM Wireless LAN Entry Moderate throughput Low cost adapters Low cost dedicated access point unit Built in Ethernet support Remote boot RPL from server Roaming capability High mobility Directional 8227 only or omni directional antenna 4 1 5 2 Reasons for Selecting IBM Wireless LAN High throughput Support for token ring Ethernet IP IPX routing capability Centralized multiple cell management Non dedicated base station SNA gateway support in base station Chapter 4 Wireless 237 4 2 Wireless LAN Performance 4 2 1 Path Loss For wireless LANs well defined areas simply do not exist As radio wave propagation characteristics are dynamic and unpredictable small changes in position or direction can result in drastic differences in signal strength In fact propagation patterns will change dynamically as stations people and objects in the environment move Generally we refer to areas of coverage when talking about wireless LANs However a more appropriate term would be to use the term volume For convenience reasons we will use the term area as this concept is more familiar and therefore easier to work with
315. nts on the ShuntBus or one of the 11 isolated segments on the module Simultaneous UTP and STP cabling is supported on the lobe ports attached to the same or different segments e Support for beacon recovery on both lobe and trunk ports using the recovery ASIC which is implemented on the module e Support for address to port mapping using the recovery ASIC e Support for fan out devices and splitters for attaching up to eight stations to each port e Support for connection of MAC less stations such as token ring tracing tools to all the lobe ports e Automatic speed detection of the attached stations to the lobe ports so that only the stations with the correct ring speed settings can attach to the network e Simultaneous support of 4 and 16 Mbps token ring networks on the lobe and trunk ports e Compliant with the 802 5C dual ring recovery on the trunk ports e Support for installation of one T MAC e Support for installation of two Jitter Attenuator daughter cards 8260 Jitter Attenuator Daughter Card The 8260 Jitter Attenuator daughter card allows you to filter excessive amounts of jitter that may have accumulated in other equipment before passing the signal to the 8260 backplane The Jitter Attenuator daughter card can be mounted on any 8260 token ring media module 2 11 8 3 Management and Controller Modules 8260 Distributed Management Module DMM The distributed management module is an independent management modul
316. o a LAN station equipped with a 100Base T Ethernet adapter Multiport 10Base T Ethernet This card is for customers that require more than the eight 10Base T ports that are available with the base product but want to use the IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch Model 108 in a small to medium size network that does not contain a backbone network Multiport 10Base FL Ethernet LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM This card will provide you multiple 10Base FL Ethernet ports with the capability to connect Ethernet segments to the IBM 8271 Model 108 up to two kilometers away You will be able to interconnect and switch LAN segments that are physically distant from the IBM 8271 Model 108 Multiport 100VG Ethernet This card will provide multiple 100VG Ethernet ports for connection to 100VG segments or stations 100Base TX Card The 100Base TX Card provides one 100Base TX MMIDI X port with a RJ 45 connector suitable for connection to either a shared 100 Mbps Ethernet segment via a compatible 100 Mbps repeater or a dedicated connection directly to a compatible 100 Mbps Ethernet adapter such as the IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter 4 Port 10Base T Card The 4 Port 10Base T card provides four 10Base T MDI X ports with RJ 45 connectors It expands the port capacity of the model 108 from 8 to 12 Any of these four ports can be configured similarly to any of the eight fixed 10Base T ports to provide either shared h
317. oday s leading operating systems including IBM OS 2 LAN Server Novell NetWare Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 95 The 16 bit IBM Etherjet ISA Adapter and IBM Etherjet 10Base T ISA Adapter provide support for symmetrical multiprocessors SMP and all personal computers with ISA slots in addition to EISA Micro Channel MCA and PCI slots The 16 bit IBM Etherjet ISA Adapter and IBM Etherjet 10Base T ISA Adapter are supported by a lifetime warranty and IBM s PC Company HelpCenter which offers 24 hours a day 7 days a week support Both adapters are certified FCC Class B 1 6 4 IBM PCI Ethernet Adapters 14 The following IBM PCI Ethernet adapters are suitable for high performance servers clients and gateways e IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapters IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter The PCI Ethernet Adapter is a high performance Ethernet LAN adapter that operates in peripheral component interconnect PCI bus computers It is a 32 bit bus master adapter that supports operation at 10 Mbps over unshielded twisted pair UTP or attachment unit interface AUI media It is recommended for use in server or client applications and comes with an attractive client price The PCI Ethernet Adapter can be easily installed by using IBM s LANAID application available September 1995 and is plug and play enabled Device drivers are included for many of today s leading operating systems including OS 2 LAN Server NetWare Win
318. oduction and Planning Guide GA27 3677 05 or above and the 8230 003 Supplement to the Token Ring Network Introduction and Planning Guide GD21 0055 shipped with 8230 hardware are recommended 2 7 2 1 Configuration Scenarios In each of the following scenarios we will point out what the most simple configuration procedures are if any are required at all Single 8230 Without RI RO LIU No configuration is required Simply plug and play LAM LIE LLL L workstation workstation Figure 62 Single 8230 Configuration Multiple 8230s With RI RO Module Installed No configuration is required Again plug and play Pay attention to drive distance limitation Chapter 2 Hubs 121 LIU LIU LIU LIU RIRO LAM SEIE E E OUI LIU LIU LIU LIU RIRO 2 A LAM AS s L workstation workstation Figure 63 Multiple 8230 Configuration 122 Using Fan Out Devices The splitter can be an IBM 8228 or an IBM 8226 MAUs that are fully compatible with the 8228 or 8226 may also be used but note that the 8230 is designed to manage up to eight MAC addresses at every fan out lobe port Do not attach more than eight workstations to a 10 port OEM
319. odule All ports of the 100 Mbps concentration module can be configured as UNI user network interface NNI network to network connection or SSI 8260 to 8260 connection The following combinations on a given 100 Mbps concentration module are allowed e Four ports configured as UNI NNI interfaces Chapter 5 ATM Products 253 e Three ports configured as UNI NNI interfaces plus one port configure as SSI e Two ports configured as SSI 5 3 4 Nways 8260 ATM 155 Mbps Concentration Module This module called ATMFlex is a single slot two port 155 Mbps concentration module with a modular structure It is composed of a base card and up to two feature I O cards The ATMFlex module is personalized by you and you can install the I O cards yourself e One port multidmode fiber I O card with SC connector e One port single mode fiber I O card with SC connector e I O card for UTP5 and STP planned The I O cards are dynamically sensed and vital product data VPD is automatically reported to the management modules The module is equipped with the traffic management ASICs and cell buffers that deal with various ATM classes of service that perform distributed functions such as cell swapping rate control and reshaping of the traffic in case of bursty LAN transmissions The 155 Mbps module supports various cabling types You can use unshielded twisted pair category 5 or shielded twisted pair mainly for connecting ATM devices at distances
320. of MF 143 intelligent cooling subsystem 175 intelligent power subsystem 174 intrusion protection 188 reporting intruders 188 inventory 179 IP routing 194 IPX 8224 management over 93 routing 195 ISA adapter switch settings 277 description 5 ISA MCA Adapter 23 ISM industrial scientific and medical frequency band 235 ISM band 233 J jitter attenuator daughter card 190 L LAN Adapters adapter positioning 287 adapter tables 267 270 InfraRed 22 ISA adapter switch settings 277 microcode level tables 273 LAN components 1 LAN Emulation 248 306 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM LAN emulation client LEC 248 LAN emulation server LES 248 262 LAN Network Manager LNM managing 8230 129 LAN segments on the backplane 164 LAN Support Program LSP 1 23 45 LAN VDD support 31 LANStreamer Ethernet adapters 12 switch 212 LAPS 30 latency 205 LEC LAN emulation client 248 LED 137 138 141 left boundary adapter 171 LER 144 LER alarm generation threshold 143 LES LAN emulation server 248 262 light emitting diodes 137 Line Interface Coupler LIC 225 226 link quality 143 link rate 143 lobe media test 221 local area network products 231 local area products AS 400 Wireless LAN 232 IBM Infrared Wireless LAN 232 IBM Wireless LAN 232 IBM Wireless LAN Entry 231 log file 144 log manager 144 Log normal 240 logical ring 216 Low Speed Adapter 225 LSA 226 LSP LAN Support Program 1 23 1 3 4 34 a
321. of installing the ATM backplane in addition to the media backplane current LANs which is always present in an IBM 8260 chassis You install the ATM backplane from the rear without the need to remove existing modules or cables This reduces potential errors and the time to perform the upgrade The 8260 controller module will automatically sense the presence of the ATM backplane and identify the machine as the right model and pass the information to the network administrator via the distributed management module DMM 5 3 2 The ATM Switch Control Point Module 252 The switch control point module S CPM is a double slot module and contains two full size cards e A base card with the main function to switch cells from a port on a concentration module to another port on the same or another concentration module This is done by the switch integrated circuit also used in the Nways Broadband Switch This single chip is a non blocking 16 by 16 times 8 bit parallel switch with an aggregate throughput that exceeds 8 Gbps e A control point card with a high speed processor where the control point resides The card incorporates FLASH memory that contains the code which is loaded into the control point This allows the code to be updated in the field for future extensions and enhancements The 8260 control point gives you a complete set of functions to control your ATM campus network and to interconnect your local ATM networks over ATM wide area
322. of up to 100 meters To link either workstations bridge routers or switches with distances up to two kilometers you can use multimode fiber wiring You may span large geographical areas with distances up to 20 kilometers with single mode fiber connections which eliminates the need for external converters 5 3 4 1 Port Configurations of 155 Mbps Module All ports of the 155 Mbps concentration module can be configured as UNI user network interface NNI network to network connection or SSI 8260 to 8260 connection The following combinations on a given 155 Mbps concentration module are allowed e Two ports configured as UNI NNI interfaces e One port configured as UNI NNI interfaces and one port configured as SSI e Two ports configured as SSI 5 3 5 The Nways 8260 TR Ethernet ATM LAN Bridge Module 254 The ATM bridge allows you to bridge between token ring or Ethernet and your ATM networks The function is available both as an 8260 module and as a separate unit the IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge and offers you the same network functions For a more detailed description see 5 6 IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge on page 260 The main differences are in the area of network management and control The value of the LAN bridge resides in its e Ability to perform local LAN bridging LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Implementation of LAN emulation which allows communication between LAN stations and ATM stations as well as co
323. offices Chapter 2 Hubs 131 Figure 67 IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub 132 2 8 1 1 Fault Tolerance through Improved Technology The IBM 8238 delivers state of the art fault tolerance at an affordable price Our instant beaconing recovery distributes the beaconing recovery to each hub so that beaconing fault detection and recovery occur within moments When physical changes are required in the stack of an 8238 either to add an additional component or replace a faulty one the 8238 s design permits hot swapping So components can be added or removed without powering down the stack and without interfering with ring activity Finally the 8238 s automatic speed detection feature makes sure that every station entering the ring is operating at the same speed as the ring Any station that attempts to enter the ring while operating at the wrong speed is prevented from entering and disrupting the operation of the ring 2 8 1 2 Making the Infrastructure Work for You A solution that causes you to recable all of your facilities raises the cost of network ownership So IBM has done all it can to support the most common standards recognized building cabling in the design of the 8238 Our phase locked loop PLL technology is one of the most advanced and reliable features of the 8238 Each lobe port of the active media models is retimed and repeated The result is that reliable operation is achieved at 16 Mbps on 100 ohm Category
324. ogether for cascading is avoided When cascading each hub layer adds an additional repeater hop The total distance between the first and last units in the stack may be as much as 76 2 meters 250 feet If the combined length of all of the hub expansion cables within a segment exceeds 45 7 meters 150 feet then the hub stack for that segment must be considered as 1 5 repeater hops for the purposes planning the network topology The Hub Expansion Port in a Segmented Stack Figure 28 on page 86 illustrates the interconnection within an IBM 8224 hub stack with one hub segmented Chapter 2 Hubs 85 EM sect BELATED REPEAT ER BUS HUB 4 STACK CONTROL MEP 10BASE T PORTS e CEM sees eo REPEATER BUS HUB pee m EXPANSION MEP IOBASET PORTS SEK SONTROL CABLES Lestat CEM ma Minato REPEATER BUS HUB 3 1OBASE T PORTS INTER HUB SERIAL BUS i ETHERNET BLS Figure 28 IBM 8224 Hub Expansion Port Interconnection This example shows a stack of three hubs one of which is segmented Hub 1 is isolated segmented from the Ethernet bus in the hub expansion port cables via an SNMP command Note that after segmentation the inter hub serial control bus remains connected to the stack control logic in each of the hubs 86 Figure 29 on page 87 Figure 30 on page 87 and Figure 31 on page 88 show examples of IBM 8224 hub stacks using the segmentation and
325. ol T MAC daughter card Ethernet Modules 8260 Ethernet 36 port 10Base T module 8260 Ethernet 24 port 10Base T module 8260 Ethernet 20 port 10Base T module 8260 Ethernet 40 port 10Base T module 8260 Ethernet 10 port 10Base FB module 8260 Ethernet Flexible Concentration Module 8260 2 port FB FL module 8260 4 port UTP module 8260 3 port BNC module 8260 3 port AUI module 8260 Multiprotocol Interconnect module 8260 Ethernet Security daughter card Token ring Modules 18 port active per port switching module 18 port active module switching module 20 port passive module switching module Dual fiber repeater module Jitter Attenuator daughter card Multiprotocol Interconnect Module ATM Modules Refer to 5 3 The IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub on page 250 The 8260 can be managed out of band using an ASCII console attached locally or via modem to the management module Additionally you may manage the 8260 via SNMP using the Hub Manager Program for AlX Chapter 2 Hubs 163 For a comprehensive description see 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub GG24 4370 2 11 1 8260 Model 017 and Model 010 The 8260 Model 017 is a 17 slot module and the Model 010 is a 10 slot module which allows you to install any combination of 8260 and 8250 modules except the 8250 Controller module to set up token ring Ethernet and or FDDI networks Additionally it can be upgraded with the ATM backplane to 8260 A
326. omponents The fans and sensors e The DMM distributed management module e The controller module e The SCI serial control interface These components work together to make up the intelligent cooling subsystem Each 8260 has three fan units that can be installed or removed while the 8260 hub is operating These fan units are accessible from the back of the 8260 Each of the three fan units cools an overlapped area in the hub covering eight slots These three areas have their own temperature sensors Also integrated into each fan unit is a sensor that detects a stopped or slow fan condition The controller module continually monitors all the sensors via the SCI This is the mechanics of the intelligent cooling subsystem e Each of the 8260 modules can be assigned a power class Chapter 2 Hubs 175 e 8250 modules cannot be assigned a power class e If an overheat condition is detected there is a one minute delay and then the DMM is notified e DMM will generate an SNMP alert as a result of receiving an over temperature notification e If the Over_Heat Power_Down is set to Enable default is Disable then the power subsystem is used to power down 8260 modules according to their power class and slot position within the affected cooling zone as shown in Figure 91 Overheat Management Areas Area 2 Area 1 Areal3 Power Down Affected Area s daa P Lowest rower ae Deere Class First e Highest Slot to Lowest
327. onfiguration tool for configuration management e Provides front connection with RJ 45 and SC connectors 5 6 1 Hardware Requirements The ATM bridge requires the LAN emulation server that is shipped with the TURBOWAYS 100 ATM Adapter The LAN emulation server allows current LAN applications transparent access to an ATM network These servers provide the MAC to ATM address resolution and broadcast capabilities to emulated LANs on the ATM networks The driver for the LAN emulation server supports either token ring or Ethernet and is selectively loaded into the LAN emulation server 5 6 2 Software Requirements 262 The ATM bridge configurator is designed to run under IBM DOS 5 0 or later and with IBM TCP IP for DOS 2 1 or later or equivalent The configurator is shipped with the ATM bridge The ATM bridge supports a maximum of 256 VCs See also 5 3 5 The Nways 8260 TR Ethernet ATM LAN Bridge Module on page 254 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 5 7 IBM TURBOWAYS 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator The following figure shows the front panel of the 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator AC Power Optional Workstation Attachment Switch Input Ports and Their LEDs Modules Port A CO O 1 E EEES LD OERUOUAKCOOOKAONNN NL OOOO sE sf ef SEA e 3 ef sf Status Reset Service Workstation Po
328. only include an adapter and a plain brown wrapper A 1 5 Adapter Speed This simply identifies the adapter as being either a 4 Mbps adapter or an adapter capable of running at 4 or 16 Mbps 16 4 O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 267 A 1 6 Shared ROM Size At this point in time all shared RAM adapters produced by IBM use 8 KB for shared ROM This 8 KB space is divided into two areas called the BIOS area and the MMIO area The BIOS area is 7 5 KB in size and the MMIO area is 5 KB in size The BIOS area contains remote IPL initialization code which is executed at power on if RIPL capability is present on the card and if IPL able disks are not present in the PC or PS 2 A shared RAM adapter will use the entire 8 K shared ROM area even if RIPL is not used The MMIO area is a collection of registers which contain information about the adapter such as the interrupt level that the adapter is using and the location of the shared RAM segment A 1 7 Shared RAM Size This field details the amount of available RAM on the card A 1 8 RIPL Remote Initial Program Load A 1 9 Bus Type The older token ring cards required that the customer buy a RIPL PROM to physically add to the card to enable RIPL The RIPL field gives the feature code of the RIPL PROM for the specific adapter The newer cards have RIPL built in which negates the need to buy an additional feature IBM manufactures adapters for five bus types and or form factors as of the date o
329. orks IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet Provides connections to 10Base T 10Base2 Attachment Unit Interface AUI thick coaxial or fiber media All IBM ISA Ethernet adapters are NE2000 compatible and work in either 8 bit or 16 bit slots When adapters are NE2000 compatible NetWare users from IBM or Novell can download the adapter device drivers directly from the NetWire main menu on CompuServ IBM 100 10 ISA Ethernet Adapter The IBM 100 10 ISA Ethernet Adapter can operate at speeds of 100 or 10 Mbps in Industry Standard Architeture ISA bus computers This adapter can operate in full duplex mode at either speed providing up to 200 Mbps of bandwith The IBM 100 10 ISA Ethernet Adapter follows the fast Ethernet specification for 100 Mbps operation as is being defined by the IEEE 802 3 standards committee lt features full duplex operation and is enable for plug and play PnP hardware installation Device drives are included for many of today s leading operating systems including IBM OS 2 LAN Server Novell NetWare Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 95 In addition the adapter offers a single RJ 45 connector for attachment to 10Base T and 100Base TX networks The IBM 100 10 ISA Ethernet Adapter is an ISA adapter with 16 bit data bus attachment and is certified as FCC Class A and CISPR222 A It provides support for symmetrical multiprocessors SMP and for all personal computers with ISA slots When operating in full duplex mode the computer
330. orted 61 speeds supported 61 Security 258 segmentation 206 self learning 255 serial control interface SCI 171 serial interface cables 60 61 communication adapter features 59 60 interfaces supported 59 60 speeds supported 59 60 Shared RAM Adapters adapter positioning 287 adapter tables 267 address range 2 description 2 shielded twisted pair STP 63 138 150 shipment of IBM 8240 140 ShuntBus 164 166 LAN segments supported 166 SIF 144 single attached concentrator 138 single slot top filler 171 slot cover 140 slots 136 SMT station management SNA protocols SDLC 61 SNMP 163 179 234 8222 67 8224 93 8230 managing 128 8244 156 agent in 8224 76 IBM FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent 157 over IPX for 8224 management 96 SNMP management system 156 SNMP manager 157 traps for FDDI 157 160 145 148 160 Software Download in band 192 out of band 192 software requirement for MF 143 software requirements 229 SONET 210 215 source route switching 216 spanning tree 208 216 SRF 143 144 Stackable Hub Nways 8236 Token Ring 131 staging 179 stand alone cell 234 235 stand alone mode 152 standard mode 150 station attachment 136 station management SMT 148 8244 settings 148 8244 support 146 IBM FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent 157 MIB subtrees supported by FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent 160 statistics 178 status code 137 140 status codes 141 status report frame 143 144 store and forward 211 213 STP shielded twisted pair 63 SVC switched virt
331. os 2 16 4 Adapter II P gt 16MB Memory 16 4 EISA 16 4 Credit Card Clients R PR Busmaster Adapter F LANStreamer 16 03F0215 60G0989 59G8998 73G1515 63F0412 54G2327 0933462 2 A LANStreamer 32 Servers 16 4 Adapter II P gt 16MB Memory 16 4 EISA 16 4 Credit Card and E 92F8942 60G 1100 Busmaster R Adapter Gateways F LANStreamer 16 03F0215 60G0989 59G8998 73G1515 3F0412 54G2327 0933462 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter A LANStreamer 32 46 4 ISA 16 Adapter Bridaes E 92F8942 60G1100 g E LANStreamer 16 73G2032 73G2079 59G8998 73G1515 73G2092 73G2079 1 For applications using NDIS ODI device drivers the adapters recommendedfor O amp 2 clients will provide improved performance 2 Supports 16MB memory or less NOTE When 2 part numbers are given first is single pack second multtpack Trademark or registered trademark of Intemational Business Machines Corp Trademark of Microsoft Corp Figure 117 Token Ring Adapter Selection 288 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Figure 118 IBM ETHERNET ADAPTER HIGHLIGHTS ADAPTER NAME BUS DATA ADDRPL MEDIA PRIMARY USE Part Single Multi WIDTH LAN Adapter for 8 16 o Lowast cost solution for or Ethernet TP ISA NA Y 10BaselT customers with 10Base T 60G0605 60G61576 Ethernet networks LAN Adapter for 8 or 16 o Lowest cost solution for Ethernet CX ISA wa Y 1LOBase2 customers with 10Base 2 60G0615 60G1579 Ethernet networks LAN
332. ot provide the LAPS function but can utilize the LAPS component provided with one of several other products including the LAN Requester of the IBM LAN Server 2 0 the LAPS component shipped with the IBM LAN Server 3 0 and the Extended Services for OS 2 product If one of these products is not installed on the workstation the LAPS function can be acquired by installing the IBM NTS 2 product Novell NetWare 3 1X and 4 X e NetWare from IBM 3 1X and 4 X e Novell NetWare and open data link interface ODI device drivers included on the diskette packaged with the IBM PCI Ethernet Adapter IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter The IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter can operate at speeds of either 100 or 10 million Mbps in peripheral component interconnect PCI bus computers The IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter can operate at speeds of 100 or 10 Mbps in industry standard architecture ISA bus computers This adapter can operate in full duplex mode at either speed providing up to 200 Mbps of bandwidth The IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter follows the fast Ethernet specification for 100 Mbps operation as is being defined by the IEEE 802 3 standards committee It features full duplex operation and is enabled for plug and play PnP hardware installation Device drivers are included for many of today s leading operating systems including IBM OS 2 LAN Server Novell NetWare Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 95 In addition the adapter offers a single R
333. otocol Intelligent Hub and the IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub address the heterogeneous LAN environment that is FDDI token ring Ethernet and ATM attachment 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub The 8260 is an intelligent managed hub which provides the platform to build local area networks using various types of cabling systems such as STP UTP fiber and coax and different types of LAN protocols such as token ring Ethernet and FDDI Additionally the 8260 provides a platform for the implementation of high speed networks based on Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM technology The 8260 is a rack mountable hub and depending on the model it allows you to install up to 17 payload modules These modules can be a combination of media and management modules providing you with the flexibility to design networks addressing the individual needs of your organization Chapter 2 Hubs 161 53050 Py FERGET EI EFt Figure 85 IBM 8260 Model 017 The 8260 has the 4 slot 8250 feature and a second power supply installed 162 Media and management modules can be installed or removed from the 8260 while the hub is operational This allows you to modify the configuration of the network with minimal disruption to the users The 8260 provides the room to install up to two controller modules The second controller module will be used to provide backup for the primary controller mod
334. ough CE offerings For more information about the jumper cables planning design and installation of optical fiber cabling systems refer to the IBM publication BM Cabling System Optical Fiber Installation and Planning Guide GA27 3943 AS 400 Shielded Twisted Pair Distributed Data Interface Adapter 2665 This feature provides one interface to connect an AS 400 system to an FDDI LAN which is constructed of IBM cabling system Type 1 2 6 or 9 shielded twisted pair wiring Feature 2665 consists of a card a wrap connector and licensed internal code which supplies IEEE 802 2 logical link control LLC ANSI X3T9 5 ISO 9314 media access control MAC functions and ANSI X3T9 5 station management SMT functions draft Version 7 2 level which is compatible with Version 6 2 OS 400 configuration parameters are used to select whether the adapter operates as a single attaching station SAS a dual attaching station DAS or a dual homing station A maximum frame size of 4 KB bytes is supported OS 400 Version 2 Release 3 or later is required which provides support for SNA communications Refer to the IBM publication GA27 3892 IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3892 for an introduction to FDDI concepts descriptions of IBM FDDI components and information for planning and installing IBM FDDI networks on shielded twisted pair copper media 1 13 1 6611 Communication Adapter Features 58 The following are the six different t
335. oulder CO 80301 9191 USA Fax send orders to 1 800 445 9269 45 4814 2207 Toll free United States only Long distance charge to Denmark answered in English Long distance charge to Denmark answered in French Long distance charge to Denmark answered in German Long distance charge to Denmark answered in Italian Long distance charge to Denmark answered in Spanish IBM Direct Services Sortemosevej 21 DK 3450 Aller d Denmark Toll free United States only Long distance to Denmark 1 800 IBM 4FAX United States only ask for Index 4421 Abstracts of new redbooks Index 4422 IBM redbooks Index 4420 Redbooks for last six months e Direct Services Send note to softwareshop vnet ibm com Redbooks Home Page on the World Wide Web http www redbooks ibm com redbooks IBM Direct Publications Catalog on the http www elink ibmlink ibm com pbl Internet Listserver World Wide Web pb1 With an Internet E mail address anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an E mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note leave the subject line blank A category form and detailed instructions will be sent to you 298 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM IBM Redbook Order Form Please send me the following Title Order Number Quantity e Please put me on the mailing list for updated
336. path and report to the 8230 central microprocessor on error and recovery conditions they detect Internal code then gives commands to the circuits that open or close relays that wrap or unwrap RI RO ports in various manners All three adapters will reclock and retransmit data as any typical station on the token ring and therefore take away three counts from the maximum number of workstations allowed for any token ring cabling topology Wrong speed attempted insertion will be recovered as a function of the control unit and is not dependent on the presence of the MAC daughter card Chapter 2 Hubs 115 116 MAC Addresses The burned in UAA addresses for the adapters are in sequence starting with PO then PI then S This is true whether the daughter card comes pre installed Model 13 or as an option for Model 3 The following figures show the data flow physical electrical signal within an 8230 003 013 during normal condition and under various wrap states Note that Pl and S attach to RI and RO ports even under fault conditions to trigger an unwrap should signals become normal again LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Opt Copper R I Opt Copper RI RO Module RI RO Module o R gt _ _ v _ oa gt oO _ gt a ad yo lt f A gt mun E paa cn
337. peed data transfer capability provided by the token ring credit card adapter allows applications requiring this type of data transfer to be run on a portable system as well as on desktop or floor standing systems e The addition of the token ring credit card adapter to a portable computer system joins together and increases the value of two assets in which customers have already invested local area networking and portable systems e The LAN attachment capability brings the same data transfer capability to portable computing that has been available to desktop and floor standing systems in the past This removes the high speed data transfer inhibitor to running the same applications on portable systems e Adherence to IEEE 802 5 standards allow the adapter to be managed with IBM s network management tools Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 11 Compatibility The token ring credit card adapter is compatible with other IBM token ring adapters operating at the same speed 16 Mbps or 4 Mbps The cable furnished with the adapter provides attachment to the existing workstation cabling The operation of the token ring credit card adapter and standard size IBM token ring adapters in the same machine is not supported Remote initial program load RIPL is not supported A maximum of two token ring credit card adapters may be active simultaneously 1 5 4 Token Ring Adapters Summary The token ring adapter table is used to display the different typ
338. port for 16 32 bits of information to be passed across the bus thus providing greater throughput as well as addressing capabilities for the growing environments requiring addressing above the 16 MB range This plus the 32 Mbps streaming data capability make the IBM FDDI MC adapters ideal for high end workstations and servers Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 21 The IBM FDDI adapters are delivered with the following device drivers e DOS NDIS see note 2 02 device driver e OS 2 NDIS 2 02 device driver DOS ODI see note workstation device driver e OS 2 ODI workstation device driver e Novell NetWare 386 ODI server device driver e Windows NT device driver The following device drivers are two common types of industry device drivers that are offered for use with network adapters e Network driver interface specification NDIS jointly authored by 3Com and Microsoft Corporations For DOS and OS 2 operating systems Based on NDIS Version 2 01 IEEE 802 5 type Media Access Control MAC drivers that allow existing NDIS applications to operate on FDDI as they do on token ring e Open data link interface ODI from Novell Available for the NetWare operating systems as well as the DOS and OS 2 operating systems The IBM Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide GA27 3943 describes how to plan for and install optical fiber cabling for use with IBM products 1 7 1 IBM Wireless LAN Adapters IBM Infr
339. port mapping using the recovery ASIC Support for fan out devices and splitters for attaching up to eight stations to each port Support for connection of MAC less stations such as token ring tracing tools Software based speed detection so that only the stations with the correct ring speed settings can attach to the network Support for 4 or 16 Mbps token ring networks Support for installation of one T MAC Built in Jitter Attenuator daughter card Chapter 2 Hubs 189 190 8260 Dual Fiber Repeater Module This is a single slot module that supports ten active lobe ports and two sets of fully repeated fiber RI RO trunk ports This is a per port switching module which means that any of the lobe ports or and trunk port sets can be assigned to any of the backplane segments The following are the main features of this module e 10 lobe ports with shielded RJ 45 connectors e Each lobe port has its own DPLL which actively retimes and regenerates the signal on that port This provides longer lobe distances on both UTP and STP e Each lobe port can be connected to one of the 10 token ring segments on the ShuntBus or one of the 11 isolated segments on the module e Two sets of fully repeated fiber RI RO trunk ports with ST connectors e Each trunk port is fully repeated and supports multimode fiber connections for 62 5 125 fiber at distances up to 2 km e Each set of trunk ports can be assigned to one of the 10 token ring segme
340. ppendix shows the various switch settings for several token ring adapters C 1 Original Adapter and Adapter ll Feature Codes 3391 and 5063 Switch settings for the original and Adapter II token ring cards C 1 1 Switch Block Number One Table 30 Switch Block 1 ROM Addresses Switches 1 6 Switch ROM Address CC000 DC000 Table 31 Switch Block 1 Interrupt Levels Switches 7 8 Switch Interrupt Level C 1 2 Switch Block Number Two Table 32 Switch Block 2 Primary or Alternate Switch 2 Switch 2 Primary or Alternate Primary Alternate Table 33 Switch Block 2 Factory Settings Switches 1 3 8 Switch Factory Settings Adapter Adapter Il O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 277 C 2 Adapter Il Feature Code 9858 Table 34 ROM Addresses Switches 1 6 Switch ROM Address on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off Table 35 Interrupt Levels Switches 7 8 Switch Interrupt Level Table 36 Primary or Alternate Switch 9 Switch 9 Primary or Alternate Alternate on Table 37 Page 1 of 2 Shared RAM Size Switch 10 Switch 4 Shared RAM Size 10 8 KB on 278 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 3
341. process plug to protect the optical interfaces of the modules The IBM 8240 is shipped without the modules installed to ease the installation of the concentrator in a 19 inch equipment rack Note The concentrator must be installed with the rack mounting shelf or other equipment support rails After the concentrator frame is mounted in a rack the CC module is installed in the first slot The RA module is installed in the second slot directly below the CC module All other slots which are for the DA modules are covered by a slot cover front Only as many covers should be removed as DA modules are to be installed When all modules are installed a Power On Self Test POST is performed The test starts automatically when the IBM 8240 is switched on The green and amber LEDs blink alternately and the 4 digit hexadecimal display on the CC Module presents a series of status codes see 2 9 4 Problem Determination on page 141 After the test has finished successfully the status code will display 0000 for approximately 60 seconds before it goes blank The green status LEDs of all modules will be lit and all port LEDs will be turned off LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM After a successful Power on Self Test the FDDI stations can be connected to the ports of the DA Module When a station opens its FDDI adapter the green LED at the IBM 8240 will be lit If the FDDI station is a dual homing station the LED
342. processing of routing and bridging functions is distributed between potentially many RISC processors The remaining two communication adapter features 2720 2730 are shallow adapters which require interaction with the system processor for most functions This is consistent with the relatively low speed up to 64 Kbps communication interfaces provided by these adapters Multiple instances of each type of communication adapter feature can be used up to the maximums listed in Table 6 However the total number of communication adapter features all types cannot exceed four for the 6611 Network Processor Model 140 or seven for the 6611 Network Processor Model 170 Table 6 Maximum Communication Adapters and Interfaces by Type Adapter Type 6611 140 6611 170 Adapters Interfaces Adapters Interfaces Multi Interface Serial Adapter 14 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible 14 Serial Adapter IBM 6611 Token Ring Network 7 16 4 Adapter 6611 Ethernet Adapter 7 6611 X 25 Adapter 4 6611 4 Port SDLC Adapter 24 Each of the IBM 6611 Network Processor communication adapter features are described in more detail in the following sections Multi Interface Serial Adapter 2640 The Multi Interface Serial Adapter provides two independent synchronous serial communication interfaces These interfaces are supported at speeds between 19 2 Kbps and 2 048 Mbps with a maximum aggregate speed of 3 072 Mbps across both interfaces Eac
343. protocol stack provides the communication between the application and the NDIS MAC driver The actual NDIS interface is the interface between the NDIS MAC driver and the NDIS protocol stack The Protocol Manager helps manage the flow of data across the NDIS interface and reads configuration information and initialization information IBM typically develops NDIS DOS and OS 2 drivers for each LAN adapter it markets Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 23 NDIS INTERFACE NDIS NDIS PROTOCOL PROTOCOL PROTOCOLINI STACK 1 STACK 2 al CONFIGURATION IEEE 802 2 NETBIOS FILE SERA NDIS I F eee BIND NETBIND ADAPTER ADAPTER NDIS NDIS al MAC DRIVER MAC DRIVER PROTOCOL a ab ADAPTER IF MANAGER LAN LAN ADAPTER ADAPTER Figure 2 NDIS Specification 1 8 2 Open Data Link Interface ODI 24 The Open Data Link Interface is an interface that Novell has defined for the NetWare environment for adapter driver and protocol stack development The current ODI specification is Version 4 which is based on the NetWare 4 0 product Figure 3 on page 25 details the ODI structure ODI actually has three major parts the Protocol Stacks the Link Support Layer and the Multiple Link Interface Driver MAC driver Novell publishes a LAN driver developer s toolkit that helps with the development of ODI MAC drivers A separate toolkit is available fo
344. pter drivers and protocol stacks no longer require large amounts of DOS memory below 1 MB The tables in this section show how little memory is required for IBM LAN Client compared to existing implementations There is one table for ISA and Micro Channel adapters and one for the PCI adapter These tables show how much DOS conventional memory is used by IBM LAN Client for three popular communication protocols compared with current usage Table 3 Page 1 of 2 IBM Auto 16 4 and MC Adapters Memory Reduction Table Protocol Before IBM LAN Client With IBM LAN Client 5 KB 36 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 3 Page 2 of 2 IBM Auto 16 4 and MC Adapters Memory Reduction Table Protocol Before IBM LAN Client With IBM LAN Client IEEE 802 2 9 KB 4 KB NetBIOS 32 KB 29 KB Note The NetBIOS figure is correct for this release it will be considerably lower in a later release Table 4 IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapters Memory Reduction Table IPX 59 KB 5 KB IEEE 802 2 95 KB 4 KB NetBIOS 95 KB 29 KB Note The NetBIOS figure is correct for this release it will be considerably lower in a later release 1 8 8 3 Supported IBM LAN Adapters IBM LAN Client provides support for the following adapters e IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapter e IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring ISA Adapter e IBM Token Ring 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter e IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring MC Adapter e IBM Token Ring 16 4 Adapter
345. r 1 LAN Adapters and Support 5 be plugged into the slot Like the ISA bus the VL bus does not address the problem of device setup configuration and resource allocation This bus is used mostly for a fast video bus 1 4 6 PCMCIA LAN Adapter The PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association is an organization of companies that are developing the personal computer card PC card standards A PC card is a small form factor package for personal computer use Because of their shape and size PC cards are often called credit card adapters With the proliferation of notebook and hand held computer systems the search for smaller lighter and more portable tools for information is generating innovative developments in many aspects of the portable computer market This includes displays memory and overall computer design and size The credit card adapters are a key tool for adding memory storage and l O capabilities to these portable systems The physical dimensions electrical specifications and communication protocols are arranged between three types The first kind of credit card adapter is a Type PC Card Typically this is used for various types of memory enhancements including RAM flash one time programmable OTP and electronically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM The second kind of credit card adapter is a Type II PC Card It is used for I O features such as modem technology LANs serial communica
346. r A MC 16 NA Std Opt o PCs with gt 16M memory OR 74F 941 0 60G0985 o IBM T R Bridge Program support A o OS 2 clients low end servers and gateways OR LANStreamer MC 16 MC 16 24 Std y o Low end NetWare servers 59G8998 73G 1515 o LANStreamer T R Bridge o High performance servers gateways and clients OR LANStreamer MC 32 MC 32 32 Std y o PCs with gt 16M memory OR 92F8942 60G 1100 o LANStreamer T R Bridge 16 4 Busmaster EISA i i EISA N Y o High performance servers gateways and clients OR 63F0412 54G2327 32 32 o PCs with gt 16M memory Token Ring Credit PCM o Notebook computers and workstations Card Adapter CIA 16 NA N Opt with PCMCIA Type Il slots with 0933462 N A Card and Socket Services Release 2 Opt Optional feature UTP STD UTP shielding included Std Standard no extra cost no external filters needed 1 3270 emulation and AS 400 PC Support are examples of 802 2 applications Trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp Registered trademark of the Novell Inc Figure 116 Token Ring Adapter Summary O Copyright IBM Corp 1996 287 IBM 16 4 TOKEN RING ADAPTER RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS ISA MC EISA PCMCIA DOS or 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter 16 4 Adapter A 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter 16 4 Credit Card Windows 3 X Adapter Clients 73G2032 73G2079 74F9410 60G0985 7312032 73G2079 0933482 A LANStreamer 32
347. r Token Ring Network for different requirements of each LIU and LAM types Workstation Filters Nowadays most token ring adapters come with this filter built in for example IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring Adapter Otherwise for connection to any unshielded media add an external workstation filter Impedance Matching Use Table 15 to determine if impedance matching devices balun are required Table 15 Impedance Matching Device Requirements LIU LAM Type 150 ohm media 100 120 ohm media 3 Port 4 Port LIUs Passive RLAMs Required Not required 2 Port ICS LIUs ICS amp RJ 45 RI ROs Not required Required ICS LAMs Shielded Unshielded RJ 45 Not required See Not required See LAMs Note Note Active RLAM Not required Not required Note Only if one type of media either 150 ohm or 100 120 ohm is used within one LAM 2 7 4 Management The following are the four ways of managing an 8230 003 013 e Leave it unmanaged It works e Limited management function using the RS 232 management program CCMF e Manage it using TCP IP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e Manage it using OSI Common Management Information Protocol over LLC CMOL Chapter 2 Hubs 127 128 2 7 4 1 Unmanaged The 8230 003 013 can operate without any management software or settings Install the hardware and connect to it all the cables that you have planned for during your planning stage and it should work There are
348. r both stations 4 2 3 2 Impulse Noise In the 2 4 Ghz band a primary source of noise is the microwave oven The spectrum of noise generated by microwave ovens has a bandwidth greater than 30 MHz The noise bursts produced by the microwave oven have a duration 16 or 20 ms that is linked to the power source 50 Hz or 60 Hz AC with a duty cycle of 50 Most microwaves operate at a nominal frequency of 2 45 GHz although this drifts over many tens of MHz in a few seconds LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Other sources of interference include impulse noise produced by copiers elevator door switches and so forth Typically noise peaks are about 2 to 18 dB higher in the 900 MHz band than in the 2 4 GHz band The occurrence of noise is typically an order of magnitude lower at 2 4 GHz than it is at 900 MHz Impulse noise generated by a photocopier is significantly higher than that produced by elevator door switches The average impulse noise duration is less than 200 ns and the average between two pulses is in the range of 1 to 10 ms for the interference sources of particular interest in wireless LAN applications 4 2 4 Delay Spread Delay spread is a factor that impacts both reliability and the BER Delay spread is characterized by channel frequency selective fading This can occur anywhere but is of primary concern in very large warehouses atriums and facilities surrounded by metal walls As the distance between antennae incre
349. r development of ODI protocols The MAC driver is broken up into the following three portions e Media Support Module MSM to provide general driver functions e Topology Support Module TSM to provide specific frame type support A different TSM is used for token ring Ethernet FDDI and AppleTalk e Hardware Support Module HSM to provide the device driver support code that supports the specific adapter interface ODI actually has multiple interfaces MPI MLI and the internal interfaces of the MLID IBM typically develops ODI DOS ODI OS 2 and ODI NetWare drivers for each LAN adapter it markets LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM ODI INTERFACE PROTOCOL PROTOCOL PROTOCOL STACK 1 STACK 2 STACK 3 IPX TCP IP ATP A MULTIPLE PROTOCOL INTERFACE MPI LINK SUPPORT LAYER LSL MULTIPLE LINK INTERFACE MLI MEDIA MEDIA MEDIA SUPPORT SUPPORT SUPPORT MODULE MSM MODULE MSM MODULE MSM a TOPOLOGY TOPOLOGY TOPOLOGY 4 SUPPORT SUPPORT SUPPORT MODULE TSM MODULE TSM MODULE TSM HARDWARE HARDWARE HARDWARE SUPPORT SUPPORT SUPPORT MODULE HSM MODULE HSM MODULE HSM sy aos ts ADAPTER I F T LAN LAN LAN ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER Figure 3 ODI Specification 1 8 3 Operating System and Driver Environments The IBM set of LAN a
350. r even the most demanding of your users Your normal end users require high bandwidth for short periods so you do not need to install a high speed ATM adapter and dedicate a high speed ATM switch port for each end user The ATM workgroup concentrator helps you to optimize your solution by allowing you to install cost effective full duplex 25 Mbps ATM adapters in end user workstations and share a full duplex 100 Mbps port on the ATM switch Open Enterprise ATM UNI Specification V3 0 RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1577 For SNMP Support Chapter 5 ATM Products 263 LAN Emulation Only Workstations using the IBM TURBOWAYS 25 adapters with its supplied device drivers can only communicate over ATM with other devices that also participate in LAN emulation Participation in the emulated LAN can be by an ATM adapter itself or via an 8281 ATM LAN Bridge 5 8 ATM Adapters IBM supplies ATM adapters for various products and interfaces IBM has also expressed the intention to support implementation of ATM on new products For products not yet available this information represents IBM s current intent and can be subject to change or withdrawal and represents only goals and objectives 5 8 1 Workstations and Tabletop The following adapters are available e ATM 155 Mbps for PS 2 RS 6000 and Sun e ATM 100 Mbps for PS 2 and RS 6000 ATM 25 Mbps for PS 2 PC ISA and Sun 5 8 2 3172 003 ATM Adapter The IBM 3172 Interconnect Controller offers
351. ration in the OS 2 environment but it may affect a memory constrained environment like that of DOS Novell NetWare users will have to add a NetWare Loadable Module NLM LLC8022 NLM for example to add LLC support to the configurations of their server machines The primary reason for doing so would be to enable the server adapter to be monitored as a critical resource from LAN Network Manager e Inability to address memory over 16 MB when bus master card only has twenty four address lines Bus master cards equipped with 24 address lines such as the 16 4 Adapter Il and the LANStreamer MC 16 cannot access memory over 16 MB This means that if you have a machine with 24 MB of memory and a LAN application that resides in memory somewhere above the 16 MB line problems could occur If you have more than 16 MB of real memory in a machine you should use an adapter with 32 address lines such as the LANStreamer MC 32 The really ironic thing about this is that a shared RAM adapter with only 24 address lines has no trouble getting to memory above the 16 MB line simply because the shared RAM adapter relies on the system processor to move the data to and from the card The bus master cards perform this data transfer themselves and must have the ability to address all of the memory within the machine It may be possible to write adapter device drivers which will overcome this problem 1 4 Bus Architectures This section covers the major PC bus architectu
352. re NDIS MAC drivers are being used The module is called ODI2NDI and its function is to map ODI requests to NDIS This module is currently available for OS 2 via NTS 2 and 38 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM is planned to be shipped with DOS NDIS support for the token ring LANStreamer adapter e Novell has developed a mapper module that will support NDIS protocols on top of ODI The module is called ODINSUP and is also available for DOS and OS 2 In each of these four configurations the ability to support the IBM and Novell software is preserved presuming that there are no memory constraints for the configurations that are DOS workstations Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 39 Figure 8 Mixed IBM and Novell Workstation Environments 40 NATIVE DRIVER SUPPORT NETWARE REQ REQ 3270 aay EMUL NETBIOS IBM S NDIS SUPPORT OF ODI PROTOCOLS ADAPTER LLC 3270 LAN EMUL SERVER REQ agara NETBIOS PROTOCOL pata NDIS NDIS MAC ADAPTER LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM NETWARE REO IPX SUPPORT NDIS DRIVER WITH NOVELL LANSUP NETWARE REQ LAN IPX a SUPPORT 3270 ee EMUL 802 2 ADAPTER NOVELL S SUPPORT OF NDIS PROTOCOLS
353. reas the port LEDs indicate the activity at each individual port You can see a brief description of each LED in Table 21 Table 21 8271 Status LEDs Status LEDs Color lit Meaning Power Green Indicates whether or not the 8271 is receiving DC power OK Green Indicates whether or not the switch is working correctly Unlabeled Amber Indicates whether or not the switch performed Fault diagnostics correctly Table 22 8271 Port LEDs Port LEDs Color lit Meaning Link Green Indicates whether or not the port is receiving link pulses from an attached device Rev Green Indicates whether or not the port is receiving data Xmit Green Indicates whether or not the port is transmitting data 3 1 1 Full Duplex Ethernet 206 In addition to those features that make the 8271 a cost effective high performance alternative LAN interconnection solution the 8271 EtherStreamer Switch provides another feature that is unique to the 8271 full duplex Ethernet As users segment their LAN populations to relieve network congestion they often extend this segmentation to a point where they have placed a single station on a dedicated LAN segment such as a high traffic file server This may reveal congestion of another sort congestion at the network access point or adapter within the server To increase the bandwidth available to the server dedicated LAN segments connected to any or all of the 8271 s eig
354. rence Model and LAN Components 1 1 2 Shared RAM Adapters 2 00000 2 eee 2 1 3 Bus Master DMA Adapters a 3 1 4 Bus Architectures 02 e e 4 1 4 1 Micro Channel Bus 2 0 000000 2s 4 W462 ASA BUS ac eos wa ee Se es EO A ee Ra Be ee te ee an 5 14 3 EISA BUS a t SoA tok eb Ge ed et eh ot oe Ge 5 1 4 As PGI BUS maan a be a Oh Ge Qa bah les S ETETA E 5 1 4 5 VE Bus Local BUS ag morior conse eee Oh Deda eee ees 5 1 4 6 PCMCIA LAN Adapter 0000000000000 6 1 5 Token Ring Adapters for the PC a 6 1 5 1 IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring Adapters 6 1 5 2 IBM LANStreamer Adapters 0 20004 7 1 5 3 IBM Token Ring PCMCIA Adapters 0 11 1 5 4 Token Ring Adapters Summary o 12 1 6 Ethernet Adapters for the PC O 2 o 12 1 6 1 IBM MCA Ethernet Adapters 0 0 0 o 12 1 6 2 IBM ISA Ethernet Adapters 0 0 o 13 1 6 3 IBM ISA Etherjet Adapters 0 0 0 o 14 1 6 4 IBM PCI Ethernet Adapters 0 0 o 14 1 6 5 IBM Ethernet Quad BT B2 PeerMaster Server Adapters 16 1 6 6 IBM PCMCIA Ethernet Adapters 0 16 1 6 7 Ethernet Adapters Summary 2 2 00 0 0004 17 1 6 8 IBM TURBOWAYS ATM Adapters 2 24 17 1 7 IBM FDDI Adapters forthe PC 2 2 o 18 1 7 1 IBM Wireless LAN Adapters
355. res used in the market today It is meant to give an overview of the differences in bus architectures 1 4 1 Micro Channel Bus 4 The Micro Channel bus was first introduced by IBM in the PS 2 line of computers in 1987 SETUP cycles along with programmable option select POS were defined as part of the architecture in order to resolve adapter configuration resource conflicts Micro Channel is an improvement over the preceding ISA standard in performance Data bus width can be 16 32 or 64 bits wide and bus cycles are 200 ns each allowing for large channel bandwidth The bus mastering architecture incorporates arbitration and fairness which means that a single adapter will not be able to take over the system but must fairly surrender the channel to allow other adapters access A special feature of the Micro Channel is streaming While an adapter is a bus master it can use the address lines as additional data lines to double the channel throughput LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 1 4 2 ISA Bus 1 43 ElSA Bus 1 44 PCI Bus The industry standard architecture ISA bus is the original IBM PC AT bus architecture The main feature of the ISA bus is the 16 bits of data and 23 bits of address allowing the bus to address 16 MB of memory Provisions are available for DMA and bus mastering although bus speed is limited to 8 MHz The advantage of ISA is that it has been around a while and therefore is available in 75 of the PCs
356. rsally administered address 137 unshielded twisted pair UTP 63 up links 264 UTOPIA 1 256 UTP unshielded twisted pair 63 UTP 5 Adapters FDDI 20 IBM Wireless LAN Adapters 22 V V 24 62 adapters supported 61 62 cables 61 62 V 35 62 adapters supported 60 61 62 cables 61 62 V 36 adapters supported 60 cables 61 view mail 144 view MIB attributes 144 virtual switch support 208 214 vital product data VPD 172 VL Bus 5 Voice Server Adapter VSA 225 226 Index 309 Voice Server Extensions VSE 225 VPD vital product data 172 WwW Weibull 240 wide area products 232 ARTour 233 PagerPAC 400 232 RadioPAC 400 232 wireless 231 comparison 236 network management 234 Performance 238 wireless products 231 Wireless ISA MCA and PCMCIA II RF Adapters 23 Wireless LAN Entry 231 Wireless LAN Entry PCMCIA II RF Adapter 22 wireless LAN performance 238 wireless products 231 wireless products IBM 231 wiring concentrator 136 wrap plug 140 X X 21 62 adapters supported 60 61 62 cables 60 62 X 25 cables 62 communication adapter feature 62 interfaces supported 62 speeds supported 62 310 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Printed in U S A G24 4 S 4
357. rt 179 DMM users Administrator 180 Superuser 180 User 180 Doppler effect 241 DOS memory overview 41 downloading 178 DSU CSU 60 dual attached station 138 dual attachment 136 dual fiber repeater module 190 dual homing concentrator 138 dual homing mode 153 dual homing station 141 dual homed concentrator 146 dual slot top filler 171 duplicate address 144 E E MAC 177 182 191 RMON support 183 statistics 183 E1 60 eavesdropping 233 eavesdropping protection 188 EC DMM 177 180 front panel 180 LCD display 181 ECF 144 EIA 136 RS 232 61 62 RS 422 RS 449 60 EISA Bus 5 PCI Bus 5 VL Bus Local Bus 5 elasticity buffer 144 electronic customer support 259 electronics industries association 136 Enhanced TriChannel 164 165 error code 137 error codes IBM 8240 142 Ethernet 205 24 Port 10Base T module 185 36 Port 10Base T module 184 adapter positioning 287 cables 61 Carrier Distributed Management Module EC DMM 163 communication adapter feature 61 Flexible Concentration Module 187 frame formats supported 61 full duplex 206 Media Access Control E MAC daughter card 163 modules 163 path 166 segments on the backplane 166 Ethernet 24 Port 10Base T module 185 Ethernet 36 Port 10Base T module 184 Ethernet Adapter 15 IBM Ethernet Quad BT B2 PeerMaster Server Adapters 16 IBM PCMCIA Ethernet adapters 16 Ethernet adapters summary 17 IBM TURBOWAYS ATM Adapters 17 Ethernet Carrier Distributed Management Module EC DMM 163 Etherne
358. rts LEDs Button Port and Their LEDs Figure 115 The 8282 Front Panel This 8282 has the optional 4 port module installed The IBM TURBOWAYS 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator allows you to connect twelve 25 Mbps ATM devices to 100 Mbps ATM switches This gives you affordable ATM access to the desktop When you need higher bandwidth or quick response time you can easily migrate from your current shared LAN environment to a dedicated ATM environment You do not need to replace your wiring to the office or change the applications on your workstation Full duplex 25 Mbps ATM links provide you with the extra capacity you need ATM concentrator highlights include the following e Attachment of eight or twelve 25 Mbps full duplex ATM workstations using existing UTP or STP cables e Attachment to an ATM Switch at 100 Mbps full duplex using multimode fiber and SC connectors allows the concentrator to be at a distance of two kilometers e Support of SVC and PVC ATM networks e Support of SNMP over IP and ILMI SNMP over AAL network management e PC based configuration tool for configuration management e Rack mounted or free standing unit with front side connectors The ATM Workgroup Concentrator gives you the link between your workstation ATM requirements and your high speed ATM network When you increase your use of client server applications you will require improved response time from your LAN network The 25 Mbps ATM provides the solution fo
359. rvation and minimize delays by using the priority queue Both these priority mechanisms transparently coexist with current token ring implementations The priority token is part of the token ring architecture and is already used in certain applications such as bridging With LANStreamer IBM has provided a mechanism in conjunction with the priority queue for making priority token reservation available to user applications The priority queue is a system interface implementation that does not affect token ring operation For more information on how these priority mechanisms can benefit multimedia applications refer to Multimedia Applications on IBM Token Ring LANs in the April 1993 issue of Personal Systems Technical Solutions On Card STP and UTP Support The LANStreamer adapters include on card filters for both STP and UTP media The UTP support is tested to meet the standards of the IBM Synoptics partnership For EMEA countries the LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM LANStreamer UTP solution meets CISPR and lOP requirements with the addition of an inexpensive UTP cable P N 60G0659 Other Features LANStreamer MC 32 includes RIPL support for both LAN Server all levels and NetWare V3 X and beyond LANStreamer provides full network management support and is fully compatible with LAN Network Manager The LANStreamer MC 32 adapter is available for the 3172 Interconnect Controller 1 5 3 IBM Token Ring PCMCIA Adapters
360. ry problems because the memory used in the conventional memory area is unavailable in the 640 KB DOS partitions e If the applications are true Windows applications Windows Virtual Device Drivers the memory problem does not exist since each of these applications has the entire address virtual space for execution e Normally requester code spreadsheets word processors and emulators take up more memory that the LAN Support Program drivers Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 45 1 9 LAN Adapters for the RISC System 6000 46 This section details the range of adapter features and functions that allow a RISC System 6000 to participate in LAN services Token Ring High Performance Network Adapter 2970 The Token Ring High Performance Network Adapter is designed to allow a RISC System 6000 system to attach to 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps token ring local area networks This token ring adapter is cable and network compatible with all IBM PS 2 Token Ring adapters no new cables or network components are required The required cable is included with the adapter and is 3 meters 9 8 feet in length Characteristics 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps e Compatible with IEEE 802 5 specifications e Micro Channel interface e 2 byte bus master e Streaming data mode e Up to four adapters per Micro Channel may be installed e Standard Micro Channel form factor card Ethernet High Performance LAN Adapter 2980 The Ethernet High Performance LAN Adapter is a high
361. s 284 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Table 55 Switch Block 2 Interrupt Levels Switches 7 8 Switch Interrupt Level Table 56 Switch Block 2 Primary or Alternate Switch 9 Switch Primary or Alternate 9 Primary off Alternate on Table 57 Switch Block 2 Shared RAM Size Switches 10 11 Switch Shared RAM Size 11 on on off off Table 58 Switch Block 2 Adapter Data Rate Switch 12 Switch 4 16 Mbps or 4 Mbps 12 16 Mbps off 4 Mbps on C 5 3 Jumper Setting Table 59 Jumper Setting for 8 or 8 16 Mode Jumper Position Mode Setting 1 2 8 bit 2 3 8 16 bit Appendix C ISA Adapter Switch Settings 285 286 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Appendix D LAN Adapter Selection Summary This appendix summarizes the different IBM PC adapters and their uses IBM 16 4 TOKEN RING ADAPTER HIGHLIGHTS ADAPTER NAME BUS DATA ADD UTP Part Single Multi TYPE WIDTH RPL STD PRIMARY USE o DOS clients particularly 802 2 apps 3 OR 16 4 ISA 16 Adapter ISA 16 NA Std y 9 PCs with gt 16M memory OR 73G2032 73G2079 o IBM T R Bridge Program support 16 4 Adapter II o OS 2 clients servers and gateways OR 03F0215 60G0989 ISA 16 24 Std Y 2 NetWare servers i 1 o DOS clients particularly 802 2 apps OR 16 4 Adapte
362. s two rings each ring consisting of a single fiber path equivalent to a pair of copper conductors e The primary ring which is similar to the main ring path in token ring terminology e The secondary ring which is similar to the backup ring path of a token ring More detailed information about FDDI topologies can be found in Chapter 2 in Local Area Network Concepts and Products Lan Architecture SG24 4753 Chapter 2 Hubs 145 2 10 2 Technical Description 146 The IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator is the primary attachment to the FDDI dual ring for attaching workstations to a 100 Mbps network It is available in six models which provide the following e Three models with six attachments Models 06 Model 06s are configured with two ports for ring attachment and four ports for workstations These 6 port concentrators can be upgraded to either 8 10 or 12 port concentrators for workstations by ordering 2 port kit features to be installed by an IBM customer engineer Each feature fiber multimode copper STP or UTP category 5 offers additional connection for two devices e Three models with 12 attachments Models 12 Model 12s have two ports for ring attachment and ten ports for workstations Devices can be connected to the 8244 via e Multimode optical fiber IBM cabling system s shielded twisted pair STP copper cable e Unshielded twisted pair UTP 5 copper cable The 8244 can operate as a dual attached single att
363. se T ports which is known as cascading Figure 18 on page 72 illustrates a cascaded configuration BB cc ES EEN Device 1 Device 2 Figure 18 Building a 10Base T Network with Cascaded 8222 Workgroup Hubs 72 You can build cascaded 10Base T networks larger than the one illustrated in Figure 18 For example instead of connecting devices such as personal computers to BB and CC you could connect additional Nways workgroup hubs AA and DD However remember that no more than four hubs can be in a path between devices Note The UTP connections B C and D between the hubs can have a maximum distance of 100 meters If the number of devices that will be connected to the 10Base T network exceeds the number that you can accommodate using cascaded Nways workgroup hubs consider dividing the network into two or more collision domains and connecting the domains with bridges switches or routers 2 3 3 2 Using Nways Workgroup Hubs in Mixed Networks As discussed earlier an Nways workgroup hub can be attached to other types of networks through its AUI and BNC ports In Figure 19 on page 73 the Nways workgroup hubs are connected to either a 10Base5 or 10Base2 segment Note The maximum segment length of the 10Base5 cable is 50 meters and 185 meters for the 10Base2 cable LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 10BASES5 or 10BASE2 Segment Legend Transcelver Terminatoror Terminator and Groun
364. se the 8250 Adapter Kit Depending on the kit that you order the 8250 adapter kit enables you to install up to 4 9 or 16 single slot 8250 modules or a mixture of single slot and dual slot 8250 modules The components of the 8250 4 slot adapter kit are shown in Figure 85 on page 162 The 8250 adapter kit consists of the following e Right Boundary Adapter This adapter is a full length adapter and occupies one slot Installation of this adapter result in 16 slots remaining available in the 8260 for the installation of media and management modules e Left Boundary Adapter This adapter will be installed on the left boundary of the area occupied by the 8250 modules The top portion provides a filler plate e Dual Slot Top Filler This adapter provides the filler plate for two slots e Single Slot Top Filler This adapter provides the filler plate for one slot Note that two of these adapters can be used as a dual slot top filler 2 11 4 8260 Fault Tolerant Controller Module The 8260 Fault Tolerant Controller Module is a critical component of the 8260 One active controller module is always required in order to keep the 8260 hub operational and running The 8260 Fault Tolerant Controller module does not occupy any of the payload slots The controller module provides the following functions e Clock generating and its distribution across Enhanced TriChannel and ShuntBus This provides the clocking to the backplane and synchronizes
365. se will be detected by the receiving antenna of your station This kind of interference is monitored by the IBM Wireless LAN and is tracked in an event log IBMWLERL LOG for Novell The source of an interfering signal may be e Another radio frequency network from another vendor e An adjacent IBM Wireless LAN network with a different network ID Chapter 4 Wireless 241 242 e Microwave ovens e Security systems e Elevator motors e Photocopiers e Known sources of strong electromagnetic disturbance The effect of these noise sources can be mitigated by proper antenna placement 4 2 3 1 Colocated Networks Interference from co channel and adjacent channel users is a major source of channel impairment in mobile communications and the ratio between the desired signal and the interfering signal might often be in the range of 1000 The presence of people in a room impacts the path loss primarily if the antenna height is low Placing an antenna in a higher position will usually obtain a gain of 4 to 6 dB in path loss Because propagation in buildings is difficult to predict and will vary constantly interference from other networks users can be a serious problem The IBM wireless LAN has a dynamic monitoring capability to detect interference through continuous sampling of the bit error rate per channel If a particular channel demonstrates consistent and high levels of interference it is dynamically replaced by another one Thus with dynamic
366. segmented isolated out of the network by SNMP commands written to the IBM 8224 MIB in both hubs This leaves hubs 1 through 3 still connected to one collision domain Segment 1 through the Ethernet bus in the hub expansion ports Then using UTP cables between 10Base T ports hubs 4 and 5 have been cascaded together to form Segment 2 Connectivity between the two segments for end user communication and management information flow has been accomplished by connecting each segment to an IBM 8271 EtherStreamer Switch Here the 8271 switch is operating in half duplex mode to match the hubs The result of this topology is connectivity for 76 devices spread over two separate 10 Mbps collision domains Four ports remain available on the 8271 switch for connecting servers or other high bandwidth devices to the network in full duplex mode Segmenting 8224s from a Stack You can use any SNMP management application to segment an 8224 from a managed stack Figure 33 on page 90 shows physical and logical views of a stack from which one 8224 has been segmented Notice that even though hub B has been logically removed from the Ethernet bus the inter hub control bus remains permitting the management information described in 2 4 1 3 Inter 8224 Communications in Managed Stacks on page 78 to reach the 8224 Chapter 2 Hubs 89 Terminator T III IO IA Physical View Logical View Inter hub Command Bus
367. software configurator called LANAID and a command line software configuration utility called LANAIDC And the adapter is also NetWare Ready allowing you to be up and running as a NetWare requestor in minutes with no switches to set or information to enter LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM The auto 16 4 token ring adapters provide enhanced workstation performance today and because they are enabled for full duplex operation you can take greater advantage of your current investment The full duplex function provides you with the capability to work with token ring full duplex switches that will allow your departments to implement leading edge high bandwidth applications like multimedia with no hardware upgrade required What s more the adapter s internal microcode in FLASH memory not EPROM can be upgraded for changes if needed or enhanced functions With your choice of cable whether you use unshielded twisted pair UTP or shielded twisted pair STP the auto 16 4 token ring adapters install easily The adapters automatically operate with either media type without operator intervention To maximize system resources the auto 16 4 token ring adapters require even less conventional memory when used with IBM LAN client software IBM LAN Client moves the device driver and protocol stacks into extended memory over 1 MB This reduces the amount of conventional memory required by the adapter freeing this space for other requir
368. ssing does not affect the throughput performance of user information frames which are passed directly to the system with no processor intervention The net result of the pipelined approach is that the adapter is never the bottleneck for throughput If the system can handle it LANStreamer can transfer or receive frames at 16 Mbps even at small frame sizes This means LANStreamer is capable of up to 48 000 frames per second throughput By comparison the bus master adapter has a throughput capacity approaching 3 000 frames per second In a server such as the IBM PS 2 Model 95 OMF or OMT with a fast 50 MHz 80486 processor a high bandwidth Micro Channel bus and a LANStreamer token ring adapter each critical server component is optimized to provide high LAN I O throughput capacity Another result of the pipelined architecture is the minimization of adapter latency Adapter transmit latency is defined as the interval from when the adapter is informed of a frame to transmit to when the first bit of the frame is placed on the ring Adapter receive latency is defined as the interval from when the last bit of the frame is copied from the ring into the adapter to when the last bit of the frame is in system memory and the system is informed of the frame Since there is no time spent on processing and the frame is moved out of the adapter at the same time as it is moved in LANStreamer adapter latency approaches the theoretical minimum possible In a tradi
369. ssword Load Operating Code Restart Concentrator Exit Concentrator Configuration Management Facility 00 YODO On Notes To configure the Concentrator initially you must set at least the IP configuration and community parameters An marks changeable parameters on panels that also display read only values Option number gt 1 Figure 66 CCMF Main Menu This menu is accessed via the EIA 232 port with an ASCII terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program More sophisticated methods of configuration include using an SNMP manager like NetView for AIX or NetView for Windows when the 8230 is set to run in SNMP mode When the 8230 is set to run in CMOL mode LNM for OS 2 V2 will serve the purpose 2 7 3 Cabling Requirements and Limitations 124 m Must Read Once again the two most useful books for this task are e Token Ring Network Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3677 05 or above 8230 Model 3 Supplement for the Token Ring Network Introduction and Planning Guide GD21 0055 01 or above Although most detailed information about token ring cabling requirements and limitations are documented in the above two references we have included below a summary which serves as a general rule of thumb We assume a data rate of 16 Mbps in all cases because this is more common today LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 7 3 1 Lobe Length This is the length of cable running from an
370. stalling the 70 LEDs 70 management 74 Model 008 68 Model 016 69 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 8222 continued models 196 network with 10Base2 72 network with 10Base5 72 network with fiber 73 number of ports 68 operation interface 69 positioning 75 power requirements 70 rear view 69 Technical Description 67 troubleshooting 74 typical network configuration 71 8224 92 197 8224 cabling requirements 81 8226 model 198 8226 Token Ring RJ 45 connection 99 8228 compared with other IBM hubs 64 model 198 splitters 126 technical description 101 used as Splitters 122 8228 Multistation Access Unit MAU 101 8230 CCMF 124 128 CMOL mode 129 compared with other IBM hubs 64 configuration 121 differences 8230 001 002 and 8230 003 013 104 drive distances RI RO 125 fan out devices 122 filters 127 impedance matching 127 LAMs lobe attachment modules 112 LIUs lobe insertion units 110 LNM for AIX 129 lobe length 125 MAC daughter card 115 management 127 models 199 PO Pl S adapters 115 positioning 130 remote LAM 114 RI RO modules 107 snmp management 128 splitters 122 126 technical description 103 wrap statuses 116 8238 network management 133 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub Nways 131 8240 136 compared with other IBM hubs 64 device attachment module 138 301 8240 continued 8260 continued documentation 140 compared with other IBM hubs 64 error code 141 concentration modules 251 hardware description 136 controller mo
371. station The wireless workstations are used in exactly the same way by the end users as if they were LAN attached The only hardware requirement is the addition of wireless adapters for the stations This configuration can support up to 50 wireless workstations but the number of simultaneous users in a cell depends on the volume and type of traffic It is possible to install several overlapping cells which do not interfere with each other s transmissions However workstations can only communicate with workstations in their own cell Note There is a physical limit of 12 overlapping cells However local that is country radio spectrum regulations may specify a maximum of less than this In Japan for example the maximum number of overlapping cells permitted is six Chapter 4 Wireless 235 4 1 4 2 Multiple Wired LAN Cells A wired LAN cell is a cell connected to a wired LAN backbone In this configuration wireless workstations can communicate via the base station with other workstations and servers connected to the wired LAN If other wireless LAN cells exist on the same wired backbone the wireless workstations in individual cells can communicate with those in other cells Acting as a MAC level bridge IP IPX router or SNA gateway the base station forwards frames from the wireless cell to the wired LAN and vice versa In this configuration the base station requires both a wireless adapter and an appropriate wired LAN adapter 4 1 4 3 T
372. suite of network communication software NTS 2 is a combination of the following 1 Network Driver Interface Specification NDIS compliant transport protocol and network adapter software 2 Novell NetWare requester enablement for OS 2 3 OS 2 2 0 DOS support for NetBIOS and IEEE 802 2 APIs 4 Configuration installation and distribution CID enabling software Note The LAPS function was released earlier this year in the LAN Enabler 2 V2 0 product A suite of NDIS network adapter software is shipped with NTS 2 including a series of NDIS network adapter software that has been certified by an independent IBM certified test organization When available new NDIS network adapter software from both IBM and qualified OEM vendors may be downloaded from the IBM National Support Center Bulletin Board System NTS 2 enables Novell NetWare Requester for OS 2 to share a single network adapter with NDIS based network applications for example IBM OS 2 TCP IP IBM OS 2 LAN Requester and IBM OS 2 Extended Services 1 0 An example of how these applications share the adapter would be to use a single Ethernet adapter to concurrently access both a Novell NetWare V3 11 server and an IBM Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 29 30 LAN Server V3 0 server This ability reduces the network hardware and network management costs In addition to the OS 2 API support NTS 2 provides the OS 2 2 0 virtual LAN support for the IEEE 802 2 and NetBIOS APls This
373. t Flexible Concentration Module 187 Ethernet Media Access Control E MAC daughter card 163 Ethernet connected cell 234 EtherPipe 208 EtherProbe 211 EtherStreamer switch 205 expansion shelf 224 explorer frame 248 F F C 2235 49 F C 2245 49 F C 2300 50 F C 2310 50 F C 2501 50 fading flat fading 240 frequency selective fading 241 multipath fading 240 fault reporting 178 fault tolerant controller module 171 191 FCS frame check sequence 222 FDDI adapter 143 FDDI concentrator 136 FDDI segments on the backplane 167 on the Enhanced TriChannel 167 on the ShuntBus 167 FDDI UTP 5 Adapters 20 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator 8244 145 features codes 58 2640 59 2650 60 61 2680 61 2720 61 2730 62 communication adapters 58 2 port V 35 V 36 compatible serial 60 2 port serial 59 4 port SDLC 61 Ethernet 61 token ring 61 X 25 62 types available 58 field replaceable unit 141 filter 144 flat fading 240 frame check sequence FCS 222 frame error 144 frame filter 235 frame relay 61 adapters supported 60 61 frequency channels 234 frequency selective fading 241 FRU 141 full duplex Ethernet 206 full duplex token ring 213 217 219 220 functions 102 functions of MF 143 G G 703 60 GSM 233 H hardware requirement for MF 143 hexadecimal display 140 High Speed Adaper 225 HSA 226 Hub Reset button 173 Hubs 63 IBM 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter 15 IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch description 223 models 227 software requ
374. ta are distributed to users For example TCP IP uses ARP Address Resolution Protocol frames for discovering routes Rather than burdening every station with receiving and discarding these frames group addresses could be utilized so that only stations using the TCP IP protocol used these frames Another example might be a stock Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 9 10 market application Brokers might want to belong to groups which received information on specific stocks of interest rather than receiving everything and having to sort through it A third example is software distribution Users owning a specific application would have an associated group address Updates to that application could be automatically sent to the group Current token ring adapters do have a solution for the above scenarios Today s implementation can be described as follows frames are sent to every station on the network using broadcast Each stations CPU sorts each frame using the functional address and discards frames not intended for it There are obvious disadvantages to this approach Each stations CPU must sort every broadcast frame whether it is intended for the local station or not tying it up for significant amounts of time In one case where TCP IP was being used on the network users reported that even stations that did not use TCP IP were spending 40 50 of their CPU cycles decoding ARP frames Multiple group addressing has significant advantages
375. tached to the DMM to log in to any other device which supports Telnet Inventory The DMM provides a complete inventory of the hub including power supplies fans and modules installed in the 8260 Staging The media modules save their configuration information in an on board non volatile RAM NVRAM This means flexibility for network managers as they can configure the modules at a central site and then send them out to the remote locations for installation Power management The DMM when used in conjunction with the fault tolerant controller module can be used to manage the power subsystem For example it can set power classes for modules and turn power fault tolerance on and off Mapping DMM allows you to display a detailed topological ring map including address to port mapping about the token ring segments on the network 2 11 7 1 The Distributed Management Module DMM The stand alone DMM is a single slot management module that has no facility for carrying daughter cards The DMM has 1 module status LED a 4 character display with a display control toggle button and 2 serial port connectors and looks like the EC DMM shown in Figure 93 on page 181 with the exception of the network status LEDs The LCD display and display control button are used to e Display the current operating state of the module e Determine the network assignment of ports and 8260 modules in the hub e Display the version of the DMM microco
376. tains the control point switch and other components used by the model 501 expansion unit Redundant and Non Redundant Modes All of these models can be used in either redundant or non redundant mode Redundant mode provides added fault tolerance through the duplication of the following components e Control point e Power unit e Switch e Clock Module if optional clock card is required Note In redundant mode all of these components are duplicated In non redundant mode only the power unit can optionally be duplicated 3 4 1 2 2220 Nways Switch Model 300 The 2220 Nways Switch Model 300 consists of the following base components e Rack with shelf containing eight adapter slots e Four slots for port or trunk Type 1 or Type 2 adapters or for combined trunk and control point Type 2 adapters and associated Line Interface Coupler LIC s e Two slots for independent control point Type 1 or Type 2 adapters Note These two slots do not allow for any Line Interface Coupler LIC s One of the above six four plus two slots must contain either a combined trunk and control point Type 2 or an independent control point Type 1 or Type 2 adapter e Two slots for voice server adapters and associated voice server extensions AC or DC power input e One Type 2 adapter The following required component must be installed on the shelf e One combined trunk and control point Type 2 or an independent control point Type 1 or Type 2 adapter if t
377. te SR bridges When performing transparent bridging functions it dynamically learns the addresses of all the nodes on the subnetworks To do so the module looks at the source address of each packet and creates a database containing these addresses You can also configure the filtering database with permanent entries to build a customized bridging environment When a packet is received by the module its destination is compared with the addresses in the database entries for that subnetwork If it is found the station is considered to be local and the packet will not be forwarded If the address is not found the station is considered to be in a subnetwork other than the source subnetwork and the packet will be forwarded on some or all the ports depending on how you have configured your bridge As a source route transparent bridge this module will use the routing information field RIF in the frame to forward the packet towards ts destination This module can also be configured to bridge the traffic between token ring and Ethernet or 802 3 networks In bridging traffic between token ring and Ethernet or 802 3 it also supports IPX traffic Routing Functions The Multiprotocol Interconnect Module supports the following routing protocols e IP e IPX DECnet Phase IV IP Routing Support When acting as an IP router the Multiprotocol Interconnect Module provides support for e Directed broadcast e ICMP e Proxy ARP Ethernet or
378. tected Mode of OS 2 A Virtual Device Driver VDD is provided for both IEEE 802 2 and NetBIOS The VDD will provide a link to the appropriate Physical Device Driver PDD in the ring 0 support of the OS 2 Protected Mode The PDD modules use the ring 0 interfaces of the NetBIOS and 802 2 Interfaces Note that this VDD support is provided for both the Virtual DOS Machine VDM and Virtual Machine Boot VMBOOT mechanisms of OS 2 The NTS 2 package also contains a VDD that will support applications using the 2A interrupt interface of the DOS LAN Requester This VDD will redirect the request to the OS 2 LAN Requester so that the DOS application requests will be handled by the OS 2 requester code Chapter 1 LAN Adapters and Support 31 NTS 2 LAI VDD SUPPORT FOR OS 2 MULTIPLE VIRTUAL DOS MACHINES OS 2 PROTECTED MODE DOS DOS WIN WIN Dos 802 2 NETB NETB 802 2 LAN 08 2 08 2 LAN LAN LAN LAN REQ LAN LAN APPL APPL APPL APPL APPL APPLS VDM VMBOOT RING 3 INT 24H RING 0 Y REQUESTER f VDD 802 2 DDI NETBIOS DDI NETBIOS 802 2 i Device Driver Device Driver LLC SUBSET NO EXTERNAL 802 2 1 F NDIS Interface NDIS MAC NDIS MAC NDIS MAC NDIS MAC NDIS MAC Device Driver Device Driver Device Driver Device Driver
379. ter 3 Switches 225 Adapters are classified as Low Speed Adapter LSAs High Speed Adaper HSAs Type 1 or Type 2 LSA Supports low speed ports and trunks with speeds up to 2 Mbps per interface HSA Supports high speed ports and trunks with speeds up to 52 Mbps per interface Type 1 Supports a certain number of connections as described in Table 23 Can operate either as a stand alone control point adapter not supporting any ports or trunks or as a port or trunk adapter Type 2 Supports a certain number of connections more than Type 1 as be described in Table 23 Can function as a combined trunk and control point adapter Table 23 Adapter Type Summary Adapter Type LSA Type 1 HSA Type 1 LSA Type 2 HSA Type 2 Used as Independent Port up to 300 up to 300 up to 800 up to 800 Adapter connections connections connections connections per LSA per LSA per LSA per LSA speed less speed less speed less speed less than 2 Mbps than 52 Mbps than 2 Mbps than 52 Mbps Used as Independent Trunk up to 900 up to 900 up to 1000 up to 1000 Adapter connections connections connections connections per LSA per HSA per LSA per HSA speed less speed less speed less speed less than 2 Mbps than 52 Mbps than 2 Mbps than 52 Mbps Used as Independent Control Network up to Network up to Network up to Network up to Point Models 300 500 128 nodes 128 nodes 400 nodes 400 nodes 128 trunks 128 trunks 1750 trunks 1750 trunks Used
380. terface to the external cabling is made through IEEE 802 3 15 pin D type female AUI connectors on the tailgate There are two LAN ports per ELA which can be active at the same time Cables The attachment cables to the AUI transceivers are not provided by IBM and must meet the IEEE 802 3 specifications 3745 Token Ring Adapter TRA Type 2 4770 The TRA Type 2 is a microprocessor based device providing two attachment ports to the 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps IBM Token Ring Network using standard protocols It supports software ring speed selection per port the use of larger frame sizes up to 4 KB at 4 Mbps and up to 16 KB at 16 Mbps the early token release option at 16 Mbps and the mixture of INN and BNN traffic on the same TRA Type 2 port TRA Type 1 4760 and TRA Type 2 4770 can coexist in the 3745 configuration 3746 Token Ring Processor TRP 5600 The TRP performs the logical link control function of a token ring adapter for the 3746 Model 900 It controls one or two TIC3s that is one or two 16 4 Mbps IBM Token Ring LANs Two TIC3s on the same TRP can operate at different speeds Up to 2000 physical units PUs can be active at the same time on a TRP with any ratio of PU sharing between the two driven TIC2 For the 3745 Model 41A and 61A a TRP is required to couple the 3746 Model 900 to the CCU B via a controller bus coupler 5602 This TRP is placed at a fixed location H next to the basic controller bus and service processor and
381. the Backplane The 8260 allows you to set up a maximum of six Ethernet segments on the Enhanced TriChannel and two Ethernet segments on the ShuntBus Each Ethernet segment on the backplane uses a number of pins on the backplane which is referred to as an Ethernet path in this document There are eight Ethernet paths on an 8260 The Ethernet segments on the Enhanced TriChannel use the same pins on the backplane as are used by the token ring and or FDDI segments Therefore simultaneous configuration of other types of networks such as FDDI and or token ring on your hub s Enhanced TriChannel will impact the number of Ethernet networks available for use However the two Ethernet segments on the ShuntBus have dedicated pins on the backplane and will not be impacted by the configuration of other segment types that is token ring and or FDDI on the ShuntBus Each Ethernet segment on the 8260 utilizes one of the Ethernet paths on the backplane regardless of the number of Ethernet modules which constitute that segment LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 2 11 2 3 Token Ring Segments on the Backplane The 8260 allows you to set up a maximum of seven token ring segments on the Enhanced TriChannel using the 8250 modules Also you can set up ten token ring segments on the ShuntBus using the 8260 token ring modules Each 8250 token ring module which is assigned to one of the seven token ring networks on the Enhanced TriChannel uses on
382. the cell and the Ethernet LAN Some products mentioned here may not have been announced or homologated in every country Copyright IBM Corp 1996 231 Note IBM provides both the software and the wireless LAN adapters b IBM Wireless LAN It supports communication between devices in the same cell via a workstation configured as a base station It supports communication with devices in other cells where the base stations for these cells are connected to the same LAN It uses spread spectrum TDMA as a transmission protocol The base station acts as both a MAC level bridge and a router which allows communication between the client devices and other hosts or workstations on the LAN Note IBM provides both the software and the wireless LAN adapters c IBM Infrared Wireless LAN It is designed for indoor short range operation only It uses spread spectrum CSMA CA as a transmission protocol It supports point to point communication between workstations in the same cell It supports roaming between LAN connected cells It supports bridging to token ring and Ethernet via an Access Point An Access Point is a workstation with both wireless and wired LAN adapters It is configured as a bridge between the two environments Note IBM provides both the software and the wireless LAN adapters d AS 400 Wireless LAN It connects PCs and dedicated data collection devices to an AS 400 system It uses spread spectrum d
383. the following functions e Transparent bridging between Ethernet 802 3 segments e Transparent bridging between token ring segments operating at 4 and or 16 Mbps e Source route transparent bridging between token ring segments operating at 4 and or 16 Mbps Chapter 2 Hubs 191 e Translational bridging between token ring and Ethernet or 802 3 segments when both sides use transparent bridging IP routing between Ethernet 802 3 and or token ring segments e IPX routing between Ethernet 802 3 and or token ring segments DECnet Phase IV routing between Ethernet 802 3 segments Note DECnet Phase IV routing is not supported on token ring ports The Multiprotocol Interconnect Module uses a 32 bit RISC processor 80960FA for high performance allowing you to forward up to 45 000 packets per second when bridging and up to 30 000 packets per second when routing IP The performance of the module will vary depending on the number of routing protocols running in the module as well the size of the packets This module can be managed using a local ASCII terminal VT100 VT220 connected to the module through an RS 232 port locally or via a dial up modem operating at speeds up to 9600 bps It can also be managed remotely using Telnet The Multiprotocol Interconnect Module also supports SNMP allowing it to be managed using an SNMP manager New software can be downloaded to the Multiprotocol Interconnect Module using BOOTP TFTP or X Modem This
384. their LED status and switches By clicking on a port the status of that particular port comes up as a separate window A few screens of these two applications follow m SNMP Setup In order to manage an 8230 using any SNMP manager you need to set up its IP address and community parameters using the RS 232 program CCMF 8230 Device Management for Windows Latest PTF The latest PTF for 8230 Device Management for Windows is UR43376 It is required for the program to recognize remote LIUs and remote LAMs correctly The PTF is UR43376 PACKAGE on LANCSD LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM NetView for Windows Interfaces NetView for Windows is a platform that has consistent interfaces across different product specific modules PSMs that run on top of it More detailed information about the usage of this application can be found in 8230 Device Management for Windows Users Guide part number 04H7256 it is also in softcopy format on a diskette that comes with the 8230 LNM for AIX The LAN Network Manager for AIX program works with the NetView for AIX to enable you to manage the LAN resources of your network and provides topological views of the LAN The functions of LNM for AlX are integrated into the NetView for AIX graphical interface Consider LNM for AIX as a super application that has various components in it to interact with different agents which collect and manage information in different enviro
385. ther hub MAU Multistation Acess Unit or concentrator e In splitter mode the 8226 provides the phantom current to its upstream lobe port when any of its workstation ports become active e Has one LED for each of the eight workstation ports to indicate when active workstation is attached e Does not require a setup or initialization tool Comes with two wrap plugs for the RI and RO port whenever they are not in use e The 8226 coexists with all other IBM token ring concentrators and hubs 2 5 2 Cabling Requirements The 8226 supports all different types of commonly used STP category 4 5 UTP and FTP cables and follow the same basic token ring hub cabling rules Refer to the 8226 Planning and Installation Guide GA27 4981 and Token Ring Network Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3677 for restrictions on lobe length RI RO drive distance and number of workstations allowed in the ring segment You can also refer to the 8230 chapter of this book to find out as an example the cabling limitation of an 8226 when used as a splitter off an 8230 lobe port 2 5 3 8226 Positioning 100 The 8226 is very suitable for small workgroup environments especially where laying UTP cables is more convenient than STP With the splitter function the 8226 is also a good solution to extend an established token ring network to a small workgroup area by using a single lobe cable from the existing hub The major difference between an 8226 and a
386. thernet installations IBM s 8224 NetView for AIX Program is the latest result of a continuing effort to provide widespread support for the 8224 NetView for AIX is a full function network management platform supporting many IBM and non IBM network products 2 5 IBM 8226 Token Ring RJ 45 Connection The IBM 8226 Model 001 provides eight RJ 45 port attachments to a 4 or 16 Mbps token ring LAN It offers a splitter function that exceeds the capabilities of the IBM 8228 While offering increased function the IBM 8226 is not a replacement for the IBM 8228 but an addition to the product line Front View Rear View Port activity LED s Power input Workstation Power on LED Ring In Ring Out Ports Stand alone Ports Splitter switch Figure 38 8226 2 5 1 Technical Description The 8226 is a very simple plug and play box that has the following characteristics e Powered by an integrated auto ranging power supply e Has eight shielded RJ 45 connectors for workstation attachments e Has shielded RJ 45 ring in and ring out connectors to expand the ring segment Chapter 2 Hubs 99 e Supports 150 ohm STP cables e Supports 100 120 ohm UTP FTP cables e No lobe filters required for any type of cables for FCC and CISPR22 A certification e Has a switch to operate either as a concentrator like an 8228 or as a splitter When set to operate in splitter mode the 8226 can connect up to eight devices off a lobe port of ano
387. tion to the above parameters which are pertinent in any transmission system there are other parameters such as radio waves which can be reflected absorbed or blocked Therefore radio conditions can vary significantly from site to site and even moment to moment However these issues can often be addressed by simply adjusting antenna placement and positioning 4 2 1 1 Propagation Laws The well known formula for determining path loss is a R law where R is the distance between transmitter and receiver you may think of this as the radius of a circle In free space the path loss exponent is considered to be 2 However for indoor transmission different values can be used depending on the environment For example within building hallways channel RF energy may experience less loss than free space propagation But the exponent may increase from 2 to 12 with increasing values of R depending on the obstacles 238 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM between the transmitter and receiver In case of obstructed transmissions the following exponent law may be used 2 for1 lt R lt 10m 3 for 10 lt R lt 20m 6 for 20 lt R lt 40m 12 for R gt 40m The larger values of n are due to the likelihood of an increasing number of signal attenuators notably walls and partitions between the transmitter and receiver when A increases Receive Level 2 3 6 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 12 to 4 for 20 cm con
388. tional adapter the latency due to adapter processing is compounded by the storing of the frame in adapter memory This makes the adapter latency increase as frame size increases since it takes longer to move the whole frame in and out of adapter memory In contrast LANStreamer latency is essentially constant less than 30 microseconds regardless of frame size By comparison the latency to just store and forward a 4096 byte frame onto a 16 Mbps ring without considering any processor overhead is 2048 microseconds Multiple Group Addressing Group addressing is part of the token ring architecture but today s token ring adapters only implement one group address which is not very useful for most applications By implementing multiple group addressing LANStreamer offers complete hardware support for multicasting Multicasting can be thought of as a limited broadcast Rather than sending a frame to either a single destination station or broadcasting it to every station on the network multicasting allows a user to send frames to a limited group of destinations Stations may assign themselves to a particular group by setting one of the 256 hardware group addresses available on LANStreamer These 256 addresses allow each LANStreamer station to belong to up to 256 groups but there can be more than 256 groups on a network Examples of applications which would use multiple group addressing include protocols and applications where large amounts of da
389. tions There are five slots and each accepts LIUs of any kind including RLIU However with a RI RO module in slot 1 you can install a maximum of four LIUs The four types of LIUs are 1 2 Port ICS STP Passive LIU f c 2011 2 3 Port RJ 45 Active LIU f c 2008 3 4 Port RJ 45 Passive LIU f c 2009 4 Remote LIU f c 8230 Current support is one remote LIU per 8230 All LIUs are hot pluggable meaning that without powering off the 8230 plugging in or removing LIUs does not affect the main ring operation or workstations attached to other LIUs or LAMs The 3 Port RJ 45 Active LIU provides active retiming and regenerates electrical signals on the ring path This results in less stringent cabling requirements than passive LIUs The ICS STP LIU provides an interface to 150 ohm IBM shielded twisted pair cables Type 1 2 8 or 9 terminated with an IBM cabling system ICS data connector The two RJ 45 LIUs provide interface to 100 120 ohm balanced cables UTP or FTP category 3 4 5 for active LIU and category 4 5 for passive LIU Like the slot numbering of the base unit port 1 on LIUs starts from the right most position The 8230 internal code supports the presence of eight MAC addresses at each lobe port Provided cabling considerations are made each lobe port on the LIU can be used with an 8228 or similar device to fan out to a maximum of eight ports All ports on the LIU can be enabled for speed detection The speed
390. tions and parallel communications The third type is the Type III card which is used for PC hard drives These adapters can be used with laptops notebooks palmtops tablets and other portable computer systems The credit card adapters are a convenient alternative to pocket adapters and docking stations The use of the credit card adapters merely requires that the portable hardware meets the PC card standards 1 5 Token Ring Adapters for the PC 1 5 1 6 This section covers the token ring family of adapters from IBM This will include Micro Channel ISA EISA PCI and PCMCIA adapters IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring Adapters auto 16 4 token ring adapters are the following e IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring ISA Adapter P N 92G7632 e IBM Auto 16 4 Token Ring MCA Adapter P N 92G7682 The IBM auto 16 4 token ring adapters feature automatic ring speed selection on the adapter using only 16 KB of the IBM auto 16 4 token ring to determine and set the correct token ring speed 16 or 4 Mbps without operator intervention These adapters are also equipped with LED status indicators that allow you to determine both adapter and ring status without interrupting network operation To further simplify setup the auto 16 4 ISA adapter is enabled for plug and play which allows the adapter configuration to be set automatically when installed in plug and play systems For systems that are not plug and play enabled the adapter comes with both a graphical menu driven
391. to straight through Hubs B and C make up one collision domain and hubs A and D make up another Within each collision domain all devices attached to either hub see all the frames generated by stations attached to the other hub However hubs B and C have no path to enable them to communicate with hubs A and D LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM oooO A G aL L OA A 001 001 eee CORR RR a y e Lu Physical View Logical View Inter hub Command Bus External Ethernet Bus Figure 34 8224 Hub C Cascaded from Hub B If you want to cascade the 8224 provides a convenient way to do so with no need for special crossover cables You can turn the switch beside port 16 to the equals symbol straight through and then use a standard Ethernet straight through cable to interconnect the hubs 2 4 3 6 8224 in a Campus Network Figure 35 on page 92 is an example of a number of 8224 Model 001 and Model 002 hubs cabled together The hubs in the warehouse manufacturing and administration buildings are connected to an 8271 switch for separate collision domains in the network Fiber is used between buildings to overcome the distance limitations of copper cabling and so fiber expansion ports in the 8224s are required Chapter 2 Hubs 91 Warehouse Building 8224 002 with Fiber Expansion Port i
392. tors offering 100 Mbps TAXI ATM Forum compliant interfaces over multimode fiber A 1 slot 2 port ATM concentration module with daughter cards offering 155 Mbps SONET ATM Forum compliant interfaces over multimode fiber or single mode fiber with SC connectors or UTP category 5 or STP wiring with RJ 45 connectors Any combination of add on modules is possible A 1 or 2 slot ATM carrier module for one or two daughter cards with the industry standard interface UTOPIA 1 With both the ATM 155 Mbps and the 100 Mbps ATM concentration modules various speeds are available for you to connect high speed ATM workstations and bridge routers or linking ATM switches together Because of its granularity you can have both ATM speeds installed within a single 8260 hub Parallel 100 Mbps or 155 Mbps module links can connect 8260s to build backbone links with higher bandwidth The ATM control point splits the traffic evenly over the parallel links according to the load of each link e The Nways 8260 TR Ethernet ATM LAN Bridge Module The ATM bridge gives you a key infrastructure function that allows you to bridge between token ring or Ethernet and ATM networks It is available both as an 8260 module and as a separate unit the IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge e The 8260 UTOPIA 1 ATM Carrier Modules A module that gives third party access to IBM s campus technology Note An integrated 25 Mbps ATM workgroup switch will be available in 1996
393. trator 6 Optical bypass a feature which supplies the necessary signals to inform an optical bypass switch that all is well with the concentrator If the 8244 loses power then the switch will maintain the main and backup paths of the ring without wrapping the ring This reduces the chances that the network will wrap in two places and fragment the ring Port A Port B Ports M1 to M10 master ports to connect workstations or additional concentrators Numbers 10 to 12 on the front panel represent the port LEDs 10 Yellow LED for each port 11 Port connector e Fiber MIC Chapter 2 Hubs 147 e DB 9 for SDDI STP e RJ 45 for UTP category 5 12 Green LED for each port 2 10 3 Configuration 148 This section describes the basic installation of an 8244 concentrator selecting an operating mode and performing microcode updates to the flash memory 2 10 3 1 Installing the 8244 Refer to Chapter 3 of the IBM 8244 FDDI Workgroup Concentrator Users Guide GA33 0339 for step by step instructions for installing the 8244 Concentrator and integrating it into an FDDI network After powering on the 8244 wait at least five seconds for the self test to be performed During the self test the green and yellow LEDs on the front panel illuminate The self test is complete when the green OK LED remains lit The colors of the LEDs indicate the current status of the 8244 2 10 3 2 Customizing the 8244 Concentrator You can display a
394. troller module and distributed management module DMM The control signals are used to carry clocking voltage status and other information pertinent to the proper operation of the hub and the installed modules 164 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM On the Enhanced TriChannel 54 pins are available to be used for passing network traffic The rest of the pins are used for non data traffic signals These signals are used for passing control signals between the controller module and the media modules as well as signals between the management module and the media modules On the Enhanced TriChannel the pins used for passing the network traffic are not permanently allocated to a specific type of network Instead a pin may be configured to be used for passing either token ring Ethernet or FDDI packets at any one time This enables more efficient utilization of the backplane resources The following is the maximum number of permitted LAN segments when a single protocol is used on the Enhanced TriChannel e Six Ethernet segments or e Seven token ring segments or Four FDDI segments Note that you are allowed to have a mixture of token ring Ethernet and FDDI segments on the Enhanced TriChannel In this case the exact number of each network type which is allowed in a mixed protocol environment depends on the configuration of your hub For detailed information about the permitted configurations in a mixed protocol environment
395. ts The slots are allocated sequentially to the stations which have data to transmit The fact that a transmission hops from one channel to another provides good security against casual or intentional eavesdropping IBM Wireless LAN allows personal systems and workstations to access LANs such as token ring Ethernet or the IBM PC Network via short range wireless communication An IBM Wireless LAN cell consists of a base station and one or more wireless workstations which are described as follows Wireless workstation This is a workstation on the wireless network Base station This is the focal point of the network providing frame relaying functions between the cell members wireless workstations The base station can also be the access point between the wireless workstations and a wired LAN where it can perform IPX IP routing Novell Network and bridging OS 2 on token ring functions between the wired LAN and wireless workstations IBM Wireless LAN supports both the ODI and NDIS industry standard adapter interfaces A base station can coexist with various network operating systems and can support other functions besides bridging and routing It can for example act as an SNA gateway 4 1 4 1 The Stand Alone Cell This is the simplest configuration with the base station acting as the relay station for the cell members A wireless workstation can communicate with the base station as well as with other wireless workstations via the base
396. ts to any of the backplane or isolated segments e Support for 1 E MAC LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Support for 1 Ethernet security card e Support for port redundancy You can set up redundancy between two links on the same module or two different modules 8260 Ethernet Flexible Concentration Module This is a single slot media module with a flexible architecture which allow you to populate the module with various input output I O cards This architecture allow you to mix and match front end card types The 8260 Ethernet flexible module supports the mix and match capability with five types of field installable I O cards This structure authorizes the creation of a customized mixed media solution to meet individual needs When the number of collisions or duration of collisions exceeds a threshold the I O card automatically disables the port The card also enables the port when it detects good data The module supports the following field installable I O cards e Two ports FB FL with ST connectors e Two ports FB FL with FC connectors e Two ports FB FL with SMA connectors FB or FL networks can be mixed on the same I O card The module supports eight fiber ports four I O cards e Four port UTP with RJ 45 connectors Maximum ports per module is 16 four I O cards e Three ports BNC Maximum ports per module is 12 four I O cards e Three ports AUI Male e Three ports AUI female Maximum
397. u may however change the operation mode to administrator or engineer The administrator mode is used to perform system administrator functions e Edit PMF passwords file e Refresh PMF passwords e Change profile options The engineer mode should be used only by an IBM support representative to execute troubleshooting procedures lt provides two debugging facilities Trace Debug When running the Proxy Agent in administrator or engineer mode a check mark is displayed in the User Mode pull down menu to identify the operation mode The absence of a check mark in both operation modes means that the Proxy Agent is running in customer mode the default Both administrator and engineer modes require a password The administrator password is set by the user while the engineer password is controlled by IBM support personnel 2 10 5 4 Customizing NetView for AIX Version V1 For detailed procedures on how to customize NetView for AIX Version 1 for use with the Proxy Agent refer to FDDI Concepts and Products GG24 3865 2 10 5 5 Customizing NetView for AIX Version 2 and Version 3 For detailed procedures on how to customize NetView for AIX Versions 2 and 3 for use with the Proxy Agent refer to FDDI Concepts and Products GG24 3865 Chapter 2 Hubs 159 160 2 10 5 6 Using NetView for AIX to Manage the 8244 NetView for AlX includes a MIB browser function to retrieve MIB information and also change attributes which are defined to be re
398. ual circuit 252 switch 225 switch fabric 225 switch control point module S CPM 252 switched virtual circuit SVC 252 switches 205 T T MAC 177 183 191 statistics 183 T1 60 TCP IP TCP IP protocols PPP 60 61 TDMA Time Division Multiple Access 235 technical description 131 Telnet support 179 test buttons 173 Time Division Multiple Access TDMA 235 token protocols 220 Token Ring 100VG Token Ring 215 8226 Token Ring RJ 45 connection 99 8272 token ring switch 212 adapter positioning 287 cables 61 communication adapter feature 61 fiber 215 full duplex 219 full duplex 213 217 220 IEEE recommendations 113 modules 163 Token Ring continued path 167 positioning 8230 and token ring hubs 130 ring in ring out 107 segments on the backplane 167 speeds supported 61 splitters 100 122 Token Ring 16 4 Credit Card Adapter 11 Token Ring Media Access Control T MAC daughter card 163 TokenPipe 213 TR 18 Port Active PPS Switch Module 188 traffic load management 208 transceivers 241 translational bridging 192 transparent bridge 234 TURBOWAYS 100 ATM MC Adapter 17 TURBOWAYS 155 ATM MC Adapter 17 TURBOWAYS 155 ATM SBus Adapters 18 TURBOWAYS 25 ATM ISA 18 TURBOWAYS 25 ATM MCA Adapters 18 TURBOWAYS 25 ATM SBus Adapters 18 twisted pair copper 150 Two slot Multiprotocol Interconnect Module functions 191 type 1 adapter 225 226 type 2 adapter 225 226 undesirable connection 144 UNI 253 Universal Feature Slot 210 215 unive
399. ude faster than other PC bus architectures In addition to memory space and I O space the bus includes a third address space or configuration space to support automatic resource allocation and configuration of system and adapter boards Unique features of the PCI bus include parity on all bus lines and control lines The parity is required not optional as in other architectures All PCI bus masters must support memory data streaming Physical provisions in the connector keying accommodate both 5 volt and 3 3 volt chip technology The processor independence has been underscored by public announcements from Apple announcing PCI for a future Macintosh as well as IBM s announcement to use PCI in the PowerPC and IBM PC families 1 4 5 VL Bus Local Bus The VESA VL bus is a local bus structure introduced by the Video Equipment Standards Association VESA in order to overcome the bottleneck caused by the 16 bit wide 8 MHz ISA bus The VL bus is directly attached to the CPU is 32 bits wide and runs at processor speeds up to a maximum of 50 MHz The architecture allows multiple bus masters The VL bus is an extension of the ISA bus but only supports a maximum of 3 VL bus slots A single VL bus slot has normal ISA connectors as well as 112 additional pins located in the card slot to support the wider data path wider address path and additional control signals for VL bus usage This design allows either an ISA adapter or a VL adapter to Chapte
400. ule In addition to a wide range of 8260 media and management modules which are specifically designed to take advantage of the features offered by the new chassis the 8260 supports all of the media and management modules from the 8250 but not its controller module This provides you with the ability to protect your investment in the 8250 modules As the 8260 is taller than the 8250 an optional adapter kit is required to install the 8250 modules in an 8260 The 8260 is designed to be a stand alone unit or to be mounted in a standard 19 inch rack There are four models of the 8260 e 8260 017 8260 010 e 8260 A17 e 8260 A10 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM When you order the 8260 the following components will be included in the 8260 chassis that is shipped to you One controller module One power supply One power supply bay cover One AC power cord Three fan units One cable tray One rack mount kit One rubber feet kit Six blank dual slot filler plates Three blank single slot filler plates Additionally you can order the following features to be included in your 8260 Up to three additional power supplies for 8260 Model 017 and Model A17 or up to two additional power supplies for the 8260 Model 010 or Model A10 8250 adapter kit Distributed Management Module DMM Ethernet Carrier Distributed Management Module EC DMM Ethernet Media Access Control E MAC daughter card Token Ring Media Access Contr
401. um of fuss and bother lts flexible stackable design will not only let you grow it will accommodate complementary applications like redundant power supplies and remote dial in access for network users no matter where they are lts compatibility with existing IBM token ring products such as the 8230 8250 and 8260 concentrators and hubs let the 8238 fit nicely into your long term networking plans 2 8 1 5 What You Get Power cord e Manuals shipped with the product and available separately Quick Start Guide GA27 4091 Management Guide GA27 4092 Quick Reference Guide GA27 4086 Installation and Operations GA27 4093 Installation or RI RO GA27 4094 Memory Card Installation GA27 4095 Table 17 Upgradable Network Management Software SNMP Yes Yes Yes Configuration Yes Yes Yes Status Yes Yes Yes Ring Traffic Yes Yes Yes Per Port Traffic Monitoring Yes Yes Thresholds Yes Yes Event Logging Yes Table 18 Page 1 of 2 IBM Nways 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub at a Glance Machine type 8238 Passive Base Bronze PB1 38H6220 8238 Passive Base Silver PS1 38H6225 8238 Passive Base Gold PG1 38H6226 8238 Active Base Bronze AB1 38H6210 8238 Active Base Bronze AS1 38H6215 8238 Active Base Bronze AG1 38H6216 Features 8238 Passive Expansion 6240 38H6240 8238 Active Expansion 6230 38H6230 Fiber RI RO Module 6201 38H6201 Copper RI RO Module 6202 38H6202 4 MB Memory Expansion 6208 38H6208 8 MB Memory Exp
402. upport 208 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Client Group A Client Group B ni a Labatt LS tie CA provides the ability to grow and tune the bandwidth required between IBM EtherStreamer Switches In Figure 99 you can see a connection between two switches using EtherPipe PA Figure 99 8271 Connection Using EtherPipe BOOTP TFTP Support BOOTP TFTP support enhances customers ability to remotely manage their IBM EtherStreamer Switches from a central location By installing a central BOOTP server BOOTP compliant SNMP devices such as the IBM EtherStreamer Switch can be downloaded with their IP addresses This allows IBM EtherStreamer Switches to be more easily installed eliminating the need to individually configure each IBM EtherStreamer Switch via the console attached to the serial port on the switch Additionally BOOTP servers can designate by IP address the trivial file transfer protocol TFTP server that contains an image of the IBM EtherStreamer Switch microcode Via either the serial console or via an SNMP management console users may request a download of the IBM EtherStreamer Switch microcode from this server This allows new releases for example containing service modifications to be easily distributed to a network of geographically dispersed switches IBM EtherStreamer Switches with Release 1 0 of the microcode only support microcode download via the serial port
403. upport for ATM Forum UNI Specification V3 0 for switched virtual circuits 1 SVC permanent virtual circuits PVC and AAL 5 adaptation layer interface e Enablement of the TCP IP protocol e Scalable options for bandwidth with 155 100 25 Mbps speeds in a variety of Bus types and operating systems e Interoperability IBM s TURBOWAYS adapters are designed and tested to interoperate with ATM networks built on other vendors equipment e Signalling channel setup e Virtual connection setup and tear down e Bandwidth allocation and management e Capability of transmitting and receiving data on virtual connections 1 7 IBM FDDI Adapters for the PC 18 There are three adapters available for workstations based on MCA ISA and EISA standards These adapters are available for both dual attach and single attach stations Both fiber and STP cabling are supported The adapters are based on the ANSI X3T9 5 and ISO 9314 standards for FDDI workstation adapters The IBM FDDI MC Adapters are 16 32 bit bus master adapters designed for the PS 2 family of products and for non IBM workstations implementing MC architecture LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM The IBM FDDI ISA Adapters are 16 bit bus adapters designed for entry level PS 2 products implementing the Personal Computer AT bus PS ValuePoint workstations and industry compatible personal computers that implement ISA The following are the supported workstations e The IBM
404. uration is required if the 8226s are switched to splitter mode Otherwise treat it as an 8228 8226 Advantage 8226 is an active device and when set in splitter mode provides the phantom current through its RI port whenever any workstation on its ports requests insertion It provides fan out to LAM ports as well as LIU ports This LIU port must have PCAP enabled if 8226 is set 8226 in concentrator mode Ned workstation This 3226 must be in splitter mode workstation Figure 65 Fan Out Using 8226s Chapter 2 Hubs 123 2 7 2 2 Summary of Configuration In summary configuring an 8230 can be a very simple task It is more important to put effort in cabling planning If any setup is required the simplest way to perform configuration is to attach an ASCII terminal or a PC running an ASCII emulation program local or via modems to the EIA port to run CCMF A glimpse of the CCMF main menu is shown in Figure 66 and explanation of its options is discussed in the section on management E gt Main Menu Concentrator Configuration Management Facility Type the number of the desired option and then press Enter IP Configuration Concentrator MIB Parameters MIB II System Parameters Community Parameters Trap Parameters Set Pa
405. vements the amount of data moved with each data transfer is doubled from 16 bits to 32 bits and the streaming data mode available on many new PS 2s including the PS 2 M95 0Mx halves the time for each data transfer from 200 nanoseconds to 100 nanoseconds The combination of these factors allows LANStreamer MC 32 to achieve peak burst transfer rates across the Micro Channel of 40 Mbps LANStreamer s high Micro Channel transfer rates allow it to minimize its utilization of the Micro Channel leaving bus capacity for other adapters and applications The LANStreamer Micro Channel interface also supports parity checking for both data and address This feature provides added robustness for mission critical applications Pipelined Frame Processing LANStreamer achieves superior performance by changing the paradigm for how token ring adapters transmit and receive frames Traditional token ring adapters all use variations of a store and forward architecture where frames are moved into buffers in the adapter memory and processed by the adapter before being moved to their final destination The processing that must be done includes managing the adapter s interface with the device driver handling hardware and software interrupts managing adapter buffers checking frame status managing the protocol handler and moving frames in or out of buffer memory MAC Media Access Control frame processing is also performed by the adapter processor In contrast LAN
406. ver IP To manage a stack using SNMP over IP you must first set the IP address of an 8224 Model 002 using one of the following methods e By sending a configuration file using the XMODEM protocol e By configuring a BOOTP or RARP server to send the IP address to the 8224 e By using an IPX based network management application to discover the Model 002 and then sending the IP address over IPX Assign IP addresses with care especially if you plan to communicate on the Internet Duplicate addresses may cause misrouting of frames and data loss Special Considerations for SNMP Over IPX BOOTP requests disrupt SNMP activity for six seconds every five minutes as long as an 8224 has no IP address so you may want to disable this if you do not plan to use the IP protocol You can disable BOOTP and RARP requests by setting the IBM 8224 MIB object iobm8224BootpRarpRequests to 2 noBootpRarp 2 4 4 5 Managing 8224s Using SNMP For detailed information on this topic please refer to pages 3 11 to 3 13 of the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Installation and Users Guide GA27 4024 2 4 4 6 IP Management through the Com Port For detailed information on this topic please refer to pages 3 14 to 3 16 of the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub Installation and User s Guide GA27 4024 2 4 4 7 IBM 8224 Graphical Management Applications All 8224 network management applications provide a graphical representation of how your networks are interconnected and enable you to view
407. versions of the IBM Redbook Catalog First name Last name Company Address City Postal code Country Telephone number Telefax number VAT number e Invoice to customer number e Credit card number Credit card expiration date Card issued to Signature We accept American Express Diners Eurocard Master Card and Visa Payment by credit card not available in all countries Signature mandatory for credit card payment DO NOT SEND CREDIT CARD NUMBERS OVER THE INTERNET How To Get ITSO Redbooks 299 300 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Index Special Characters amp NVDMA6K 229 Numerics 100 10 PCI Ethernet Adapter 15 100Base T 210 100Base TX card 211 100VG Ethernet 211 10Base FL 210 10Base T 205 210 10Base2 222 16 4 Credit Card Adapter 11 2220 Nways Switch IBM 2220 Nways BroadBand Switch 223 3174 LAN Adapters 3026 51 3044 51 3045 52 4770 53 4780 53 5600 53 5601 53 6611 communication adapter features types available 58 6629 60 802 1d 216 802 3 standard 206 802 5 217 802 5C 190 8222 10Base T cabling 74 10Base T ports 70 AUI port 70 AUI BNC selector switch 70 BNC port 70 cable interfaces 70 cabling 71 cabling guidelines 74 cascading hubs 71 compared with other IBM hubs 64 comparison of IBM s Ethernet hubs 75 98 configuration 70 Ethernet workgroup hubs 67 features 67 front view Model 008 68 front view Model 016 68 in 10Base T networks 71 in mixed networks 72 in
408. will enable DOS NetBIOS and IEEE 802 2 applications running in the OS 2 2 0 DOS environment to share an adapter with other DOS and OS 2 NetBIOS applications running on the same machine Integrated with NTS 2 is LAN Configuration Installation Distribution CID Utility which enables the LAN Adapter and Protocol Support LAPS installation diskette images to be installed and configured at a client workstation from a code server and supports the installation of other OS 2 CID enabled products Please see Chapter 2 of Local Area Network Concepts and Products Routers and Gateways SG24 4755 for more information 1 8 5 3 LAN Adapter and Protocol Support LAPS The NTS 2 LAPS component supplies the LAN transport network communication software for OS 2 environments It is comprised of the following e NDIS compliant protocol drivers e NDIS compliant network adapter drivers e Novell NetWare requester support e OS 2 and DOS support for LAPS APIs NetBIOS and IEEE 802 2 e CID enabled installation and configuration program IBM Network Transport Services 2 offers additional performance improvements and enhanced network services over previous LAPS products lt was packaged with the Extended Services 2 and IBM LAN Server V2 0 products It later became available separately with the LAN Enabler Version 2 0 product and is now a major component of the NTS 2 product The LAPS component of NTS 2 is CID enabled and therefore may itself be installed from a
409. wlett Packard HP HYPERchannel IDNX Intel i960 Pentium 386 486 80386 IPX LANalyzer NetWare NetWire NE2000 Novell SFT LANtastic Lotus Lotus Notes Mobitex MS MS DOS Network File System NFS Solaris Sun SunOS NT OpenView Prodigy Proteon QEMM Qualitas Quarterdeck SCO Sniffer Network Analyzer SPARCstation SynOptics Toshiba VESA LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Advantis Apple Computer Incorporated Datapoint Corporation American Telephone and Telegraph Company Attachmate Corporation Banyan Systems Incorporated Cisco Systems Incorporated Compaq Computer Corporation The Open Software Foundation Digital Equipment Corporation 3Com Corporation Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Company Network Systems Corporation Network Equipment Technologies Incorporated Intel Corporation Novell Incorporated Artisoft Incorporated Lotus Development Corporation Televerket Microsoft Corporation Sun Microsystems Incorporated Northern Telecom Limited or Microsoft Corporation Hewlett Packard Company Prodigy Services Company Proteon Incorporated Quarterdeck Office Systems Qualitas Quarterdeck Corporation The Santa Cruz Operation Incorporated Network General Corporation SPARC International Incorporated SynOptics Communication Incorporated Toshiba Corporation Video Electronics Standards Association Wellfleet Wellfleet Communications Incorporated X Open X
410. work and by customers with several IBM hub products in their network NetView for Windows will eventually manage all IBM hub products In addition to the 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hubs NetView for Windows also supports the IBM 8230 Token Ring concentrator the 8271 and 8272 switches and the 8250 Hub 8224 NetView for AIX Program is the PSM for the 8224 that runs on the IBM NetView for AIX management platform In conjunction with the facilities provided by NetView for AIX this application lets you perform point and click management of your 8224 hubs via hot spots on realistic graphical representations You can also perform a number of configuration performance management and monitoring tasks All these graphical management applications allow you to easily do the following e Graphically define network topologies using a library of bit mapped geographic maps and network elements e Point and click on various managed graphical elements for immediate statistical displays e Obtain real time event information including time stamped alarm information e Establish and invoke redundant link connections for critical network devices e Automatically download microcode to the 8224 2 4 5 Positioning The 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hubs round out IBM s Ethernet hub offerings At the low end of the Ethernet hub line IBM has the Nways 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hub for very small networks not requiring management One step up from the 8222 is the
411. workstations A PU to PU session is made between the SNA host and the Ethernet LAN attached terminal Dependent 3270 CUT and ASCII terminals attached to the SNA Gateway can access both upstream SNA hosts and Ethernet LAN attached TCP IP Telnet hosts 3 When used for the additional TCP IP host access dependent 3270 CUT and ASCII terminals attached to the 3174 can access SNA hosts via upstream local or remote 3174 host links and TCP IP Telnet hosts via the downstream Ethernet LAN LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Maximum One Ethernet adapter per 3174 1 12 3745 LAN Adapters This section specifies the current LAN adapter features available for the 3745 and 3746 Model 900 Communications Controller A new feature for the 3746 900 is that TIC3 couplers equipped with an IBM Token Ring UTP Media Filter allow the 3746 900 to be used as a LAN gateway for token ring networks using low cost UTP cabling An IBM 8250 must be used as the hub for the UTP connections to the token ring stations and the 3746 900 Ethernet LAN Adapter 4780 The ELA using Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detection CSMA CD provides the attachment to Ethernet V 2 or IEEE 802 3 LAN through OEM AUI transceivers not provided by IBM The AUI transceivers should meet the IEEE 802 3 recommendation and support the signal quality error SQE test signal enabling The ELA is plug compatible with the High Speed Scanner 4740 The physical ELA in
412. wrap plug installed Depth 330 mm 13 13 inches front of mounting surface to rear of unit with wrap plug installed Height 133 mm 5 25 inches Weight 6 8 kg 15 lbs Base Unit Model 002 Width 451 mm 17 75 inches Depth 371 mm 12 1 inches Height 133 mm 5 25 inches Weight 9 6 kg 21 25 Ibs Base Unit Model 003 013 Width 483 0 mm 19 0 inches Depth 362 0 mm 14 25inches Height 133 0 mm 5 25 inches Weight 9 07 kg 20 0 Ibs Lobe Attachment Module ICS Width 483 mm 19 0 inches Depth 190 mm 7 48 inches Height 133 mm 5 23 inches Weight 3 6 kg 7 9 lbs Lobe Attachment Module RJ 45 Width 483 mm 19 0 inches Depth 190 mm 7 48 inches Height 89 mm 3 50 inches Weight 3 2 kg 7 0 lbs 16 4 Unshielded Media LAM Width 451 mm 17 75 inches Depth 305 mm 12 0 inches Height 89 mm 3 50 inches Chapter 2 Hubs 199 Weight 5 8 kg 12 7 lbs Lobe Attachment Module Passive and Active Remote LAM Width 438 5 mm 17 25 inches Depth 254 0 mm 10 0 inches Height 66 0 mm 2 6 inches Weight 3 85 kg 8 5 lbs Installation Tabletop Rack mount e Power Selection 100 or 240 Volts 50 or 60 Hertz switch selectable e Cabling Types STP type 1 Category 3 4 5 balanced cables Optical fiber EIA 232 port EIA 232 cable e Connector Types ICS IBM Cabling System data connector RJ 45 Optical fiber mini BNC for 001 002 ST connector for 003 013 EIA 232 port DB 25
413. xternal Fault Bottom Internal Fault Chapter 2 Hubs 119 120 2 7 1 4 Current EC and Internal Code Level The 8230s are intelligent boxes that contain a combination of hardware components and internal code software It is therefore important to check for the latest engineering changes EC and internal code updates before adding new modules to the base unit If ECs involve hardware customer engineering should be involved For software updates e IBM SEs and internal users should check out the LANCSD tool disk using the TOOLCAT command Customers should contact their local IBM branch office Latest Code Level The latest internal code level 2 1 0 which is the minimum level to support RLIUs and RLAMs will be posted on LANCSD For customers who have existing 8230 003s 013s installed and want to add these features refresh the 8230s with this level of code before installation See 2 7 4 Management on page 127 for using CCMF on how to verify the existing code level 2 7 1 5 Compatibility The 8230s operate a token ring network according to the IEEE 802 5 standard regarding connectors cabling rules and signaling As the standard evolves IBM s recommendation will be fully compatible with the IEEE and take advantage of any new flexibility offered See 2 7 3 Cabling Requirements and Limitations on page 124 regarding some newly updated changes which are quite different from existing documentation Concerning
414. y It is shipped together with the IBM 8240 It can be ordered as a customer replaceable unit CRU e 02F9774 Ring Attachment Module The module does have to be ordered separately It is not shipped together with the IBM 8240 Chapter 2 Hubs 139 2 9 3 140 e 02F9783 Device Attachment Module for Optical Fiber e 02F9793 Device Attachment Module for Copper e 92F9003 FDDI Wrap Plug for Optical cable e 33G2759 FDDI Wrap Plug for Copper e 33G2760 IBM Concentrator Copper Attachment Port cable It is strongly recommended to order wrap plugs to verify the installation of the IBM 8240 They are also needed to test the FDDI adapter cards in other FDDI stations for example in a PS 2 Installation Consideration The shipment of the IBM 8240 will include the following items IBM 8240 housing e Rack mounting shelf e Concentrator control module e Power cord e Six slot covers installed in the IBM 8240 Cable management bracket e Documentation Unpacking instruction IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator Customer Setup Instruction GA17 0235 IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator Service Guide SY17 0014 IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator Maintenance Facility User s Guide GA17 0237 e Maintenance Facility Program Diskette The RA module which must be ordered with the IBM 8240 is packaged separately This is also true for all the DA modules which are ordered In the fiber ports of the RA module and the DA module there are protection plugs installed the
415. y due to incorrect cabling So that your Ethernet network will operate as intended take care in selecting the cabling and ensure that it is correctly installed 10Base T Cabling Specifications Refer to pages 4 9 to 4 19 of the IBM 8222 Nways Ethernet Workgroup Hubs Installation and Planning Guide GA27 4079 which details the specifications for cables and connectors used in 10Base T link segments 2 3 4 Management 74 The IBM Nways Ethernet Workgroup Hub provides limited network management and troubleshooting capability The 8222 provides for automatic partitioning disabling of any of its ports connected to a device that generates repeated collisions re enabling that port when the condition clears The 8222 also automatically detects and corrects for polarity reversals on cables connected to its 10Base T ports repeater receive pair The 8222 contains status LEDs for power of the 8222 collision and activity on the Ethernet network LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Troubleshooting tips are provided in the BM 8222 10Base T Workgroup Hub Installation Instructions and Planning Guide GA27 4079 shipped with every 8222 2 3 5 Positioning The IBM Nways 8222 Ethernet Workgroup Hubs provide an ideal Ethernet networking solution for those requiring a low cost unmanaged hub The 8222 provides connection for up to eighteen workstations in an Ethernet network and provides limited network management capability Some exampl
416. y other wireless system e The radio is not waterproof don t place it outside a building e Do not use metal items to mount the transceiver e Do not glue anything on the antenna side IBM logo of the radio e For the base station use the following additional guidelines Place the base station transceiver close to the center of your cell Bear in mind that the propagation path behind the radio is more than twice as short as what it is in front Use the intersection of corridors to broadcast in all directions of the corridors corridors guide the waves Place the radio vertically if so do the same thing for the radios of the remote workstations Orient the transceiver in the direction of the furthest workstation The above are suggested remedies that may help you in your environment The IBM Wireless LAN product has many built in features to overcome a variety of problems You can help it do so by keeping these tips in mind when you are installing and or trouble shooting your network Chapter 4 Wireless 245 246 LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Chapter 5 ATM Products In 1994 IBM introduced a solution to ATM in the area of adapters hubs concentrators internetworking and management products as well as WAN These products enable you to build and operate your local area networks of any size and mix protocols and interconnect them ATM today plays a key role in the desktop to world information
417. ynchronous upgrades are provided The first endstation support deals with the FDDI node s ability to prioritize synchronous traffic over normal asynchronous traffic Because the traffic priority is performed on the transmit path synchronous support is suited for servers with time critical applications The prioritization is designated based on the setting of the 802 5 Priority thus compatible with the IBM LAN Server Multimedia product The synchronous endstation support includes an interaction with a synchronous bandwidth allocator SBA for the purpose of getting permission to transmit high priority traffic The second upgrade includes the SBA This SBA application when enabled by the user will manage the pool of synchronous bandwidth The SBA protocol supports the following functions e Managing the allocation of the limited synchronous bandwidth resource e Monitoring the amount of synchronous bandwidth allocated for use e Monitoring the ring for over allocation of synchronous bandwidth e Monitoring for and recover from ring instability due to over allocation of the total bandwidth LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM Operating system support through device drivers has been extended to include the latest levels of DOS and OS 2 Microsoft Windows NT Novell NetWare 3 12 and 4 0 releases and SFT Ill levels Santa Cruz Operation SCO UNIX V2 1 and Interactive UNIX UNIX V2 1 device driver coverage now includes Windows NT NDIS
418. ypes of communication adapter features available for the IBM 6611 Network Processor e Multi Interface Serial Adapter feature 2640 e 6611 2 Port V 35 V 36 Compatible Serial Adapter feature 2650 e IBM 6611 Token Ring Network 16 4 Adapter feature 2660 e 6611 Ethernet Adapter feature 2680 e 6611 4 Port SDLC Adapter feature 2720 e 6611 X 25 Adapter feature 2730 e 4 port multi interface serial adapter e 2 port token ring network 16 4 adapter e 2 port Ethernet adapter LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM e Multi interface serial token ring combination adapter e Multi interface serial Ethernet combination adapter e 2 port multi interface serial adapter e 1 port token ring network 16 4 adapter e 1 port Ethernet adapter The first four communication adapter features listed 2640 2650 2660 2680 share a similar design which incorporates a RISC processor with memory on each adapter These adapters are able to perform adapter to adapter transfers without direct intervention of the system processor through the exploitation of the IBM Micro Channel architecture Additionally these adapters are able to process network layer and data link layer protocols within the adapter using the RISC processor and memory contained on each adapter The combination of these two features adapter to adapter transfers and protocol processing within the adapter enable high levels of performance to be achieved This is because the
419. z ZE0ZDEZ TOVL 9L WVSI p 91 ON ve eLz 261 97 91 VIOWOd Megane ay v9 ay 8 v 91 Nd Se ewes z9vee6o 2208 gaya F gi 110389 Hoddns ON vib Zh 060 061 vz 91 gu Si ay v9 gn 8 v 91 8ELS4tZ O lS4rz 0818 W dVL v 91 Hoddns ON 8 8 S 060 061 0z 8 Od oi ay v9 aye v 91 6Z1S4bZ LZbSarZ ZLS dV v 9t Hoddns ON viL ZL 081 281 vz 91 gu cal ay 91 aye v Nd se ewes vLLSX96 vLLS W dVL Hoddns ON viL EL 081 281 0z 8 Od aa ay 94 ay 8 v Nd se ewes LLSX96 449 dYLl YEEOAEG 8 S S ON 02 881 02 8 Od 1888 ay 79 an e v 91 e6 6492 1981397 L9 L v 91 vIe L v88839z OvGZ4Sz a w ON v L 9 700 061 vz 91 2 1888 ay 91 gn 8 v AEN 869636 8651 Old duvoa Kuoys 7 w ON v L 9 912 161 vz 91 2 N ay v9 ay 8 v 91 SLY63bZ OLv63bz 6v0 lan LE 04 6 ON vib ZL 202 881 vz 91 gu 1888 ay v9 ay 8 v 91 8v 11388 CEL 1391 eel V v 91 vrlLdgt OvGZ4sz viL 9 ON 920 281 vz 91 gu 1888 ano ane v 62v936 8 18X69 062p V 83LAVOV viL ZL 8 18X69 B E S v0z 881 6E8Z 970491 8986497 8986 ON 0z 8 Od ang gane v I 43ldYdY viL EL 990 981 6 82 Nd se ewes 8Ev0XZ9 e909 ON viL El EZL S84 0z 8 Od 6 82 gn 8 ay 8 v Nd se ewes 00L6ee9 L6e yY3LAVOV SANIT HLONAT 3dAlL Od 3ZIS 3ZIS sdqu Pe 3INVN TL auvo ENNY P sna did Nvu wou qaads pes a 3a Y3LdYaY ssajdepy WYY peleys Aiewwng sajdepy buly uayo 9Z e1qel LAN Concepts and Products Adapters Hubs and ATM 270 A 2 Field Descriptions for Bus Master DMA Ad

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

PDF IBM Redbooks ibm redbooks pdf ibm redbooks datastage pdf

Related Contents

Computer multi-buttons booting system and method  Cyber Acoustics IC-1002RD  Professional Series PS74131 User's Manual  Tool Box Talks - Advanced Data Technologies  Affilatore elettrico  随時申請後の利用登録について  VPCCW23FX/P  Concevoir un projet EPS avec intervenant extérieur  Parrainage : Mode d`emploi  PMA 8000 UV 9 PMA 16000 UV 13  

Copyright © All rights reserved.